MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MELSEC System Q

Programmable Logic Controllers

Users's Manual

QJ71MES96
MES Interface Module

Art. no.: 204927

01 08 2006
SH (NA)-080644 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Version A
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using the product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with only this product. For the safety precautions of the
PLC system, please read the User's Manual for the CPU module used.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

DANGER conditions,resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical
damage.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous

CAUTION conditions,resulting in death or severe injury.

Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels as they are important for personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Design precautions]
DANGER
When controlling a running PLC (e.g. data modification), create an interlock circuit on sequence
programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time.
Also, be sure to read the manual carefully and ensure safety before performing any other controls
such as operating status change.
Especially, when controlling a PLC from a remote location via network, problems on the PLC side
may not be dealt with promptly due to failure of data communications.
Create an interlock circuit on a sequence program.

For the operation status of each station at a communication error, refer to the manual for that station.
Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident.

Create a safety circuit outside the PLC so that safety of the whole system can be ensured against an
external power supply failure or a PLC failure.
Incorrect output or malfunctions may cause an accident.

When the PLC system security needs to be protected against illegal access from an external device
via a network, take measures at the user's discretion.

A-1
[Design precautions]
DANGER
Do not write any data to the "System area" in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module.
As for signals output from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module, never output (ON) a "Use
prohibited" signal.
Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the PLC system.

CAUTION
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines,
or bring them close to each other.
Keep a distance of 100 mm (3.91 inch) or more between them.
Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise.

During registering each setting, do not power OFF the mounted module or reset the PLC CPU.
Otherwise, data in the CompactFlash card will be undefined. Therefore, resetting and re-registering
data are required.
This may also cause a module failure or malfunctions.

[Installation precautions]
CAUTION
Use the PLC under the environment specified in the User's Manual.
Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock, fire, malfunctions, product deterioration, or damage.

While pressing the module mounting lever on the bottom of the module, insert the module fixing
projection securely into the fixing hole in the base unit and mount the module using the module fixing
hole as a fulcrum.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions, a failure or a drop of the module.
In an environment of frequent vibrations, fasten the module with screws.

A -2
[Installation precautions]
CAUTION
Always shut OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before mounting or
removing a module.
Not doing so may damage the module.

Tighten screws within the specified torque range.

Loose screws may cause a drop of the module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.
Tightening screws excessively may damage the screws and/or the module, resulting in a drop of the
module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.

Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic parts of the module.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module.

When connecting a connector, properly press, crimp, or solder it using the tools specified by the
manufacturer.
Incomplete connection may cause short-circuit, fire, and malfunctions.

Push the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash card slot and install it securely.
After installing the CompactFlash card, check that it is inserted securely.
Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to poor contact.

[Wiring precautions]
CAUTION
Always store the communication cables and power cables connected to the module in the duct or fix
them in place with clamps.
Not doing so may cause swing, move, or poor connection of the cable, or damage of a module and/
or cable due to careless pull, resulting in malfunctions.

Install connectors securely to modules.

Tighten screws within the specified torque range.

Loose screws may cause a drop of the module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.
Tightening screws excessively may damage the screws and/or the module, resulting in a drop of the
module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.

When disconnecting communication cables connected to the module, never pull on the cable
section.
When using a cable with a connector, disconnect it with holding the connector connected to the
module.
When the cable is pulled while connected to the module, this may cause malfunctions or module/
cable damage.

A-3
[Wiring precautions]
CAUTION
Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Failure to do so may cause a fire, failure or malfunctions.

To prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module, protective film is affixed on
the top of the module.
Do not peel OFF this film during wiring.
When starting the system, remove the film to release heat.

[Start-up and maintenance precautions]

DANGER
Do not touch any terminal during power distribution.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.

Always switch OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before cleaning or
retightening terminal screws.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.
Loose screws may cause a drop of the module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.
Tightening screws excessively may damage the screws and/or the module, resulting in a drop of the
module, short-circuit, or malfunctions.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or transform the module.
Doing so may cause a failure, malfunctions, personal injuries, and/or a fire.

Always shut OFF the external supply power used by the system in all phases before mounting or
removing a module.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.

Do not install/remove the module to/from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the
product. (IEC 61131-2 compliant)
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.

Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery.

Doing so may damage the battery, resulting in a battery fluid leakage inside the battery.
If any impact has been applied, discard the battery and never use it.

Before handling a module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the
human body.
Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.

A -4
[Operation precautions]
DANGER
Make sure safety before controlling a running PLC (e.g. data modification).

Do not write any data to the "System area" in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module.
As for signals output from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module, never output (ON) a "Use
prohibited" signal.
Doing these operations may cause malfunctions of the PLC system.

[Disposal precautions]
CAUTION
When disposing of the product, treat it as industrial waste.

[Transportation precautions]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations.
(Refer to Appendix6 for details of the relevant models.)

A-5
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date Manual number Revision
Sep., 2006 SH(NA)-080644ENG-A First edition

Japanese Manual Version SH-080643-A

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A -6
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers.
Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions
and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1

REVISIONS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 6
CONFORMANCE TO THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES ......................................................... A - 12
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....................................................................................................................... A - 13
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS................................................................................................... A - 15
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS ........................................................................................ A - 16
PACKING LIST .............................................................................................................................................. A - 18

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 8
1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
1.2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration ....................................................................................... 1 - 8

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 13

2.1 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1.1 Overall system configuration .................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.1.2 System configuration for installation ......................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.1.3 System configuration for initial setup........................................................................................ 2 - 3
2.1.4 System configuration for operation........................................................................................... 2 - 4
2.2 Applicable Systems ......................................................................................................................... 2 - 5
2.3 Connection System Equipment ....................................................................................................... 2 - 7
2.4 Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 2 - 9
2.4.1 Configuration computer ............................................................................................................ 2 - 9
2.4.2 Server computer ..................................................................................................................... 2 - 10
2.4.3 Computer for developing XML processing applications ......................................................... 2 - 11
2.5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number............................................................................. 2 - 12

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 31
3.1 Performance Specifications ............................................................................................................. 3 - 1
3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges ..................................................................................................... 3 - 3
3.3 Function List .................................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU ............................................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.4.1 I/O signal list ........................................................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.4.2 I/O signals details ................................................................................................................... 3 - 14
3.5 Buffer Memory List......................................................................................................................... 3 - 17

A-7
 3.6 Buffer Memory Details ................................................................................................................... 3 - 21
3.6.1 Module status area ................................................................................................................. 3 - 21
3.6.2 Network connection status area ............................................................................................. 3 - 21
3.6.3 Network settings status area .................................................................................................. 3 - 21
3.6.4 Current error area ................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.6.5 Error log area.......................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
3.6.6 Sampling/monitoring cycle area.............................................................................................. 3 - 24
3.6.7 Tag status area....................................................................................................................... 3 - 24
3.6.8 Current tag data value area .................................................................................................... 3 - 26
3.6.9 Access target CPU setting status area ................................................................................... 3 - 29
3.6.10 Information linkage function area............................................................................................ 3 - 30

CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION 4 - 1 to 4 - 26

4.1 Handling Precautions....................................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2 Settings and Procedure to Operation .............................................................................................. 4 - 2
4.3 Parts Names .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
4.4 Wiring............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
4.4.1 Wiring........................................................................................................................................ 4 - 7
4.4.2 Wiring precautions .................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings .................................................................................... 4 - 8
4.6 Self-diagnostics Test ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.6.1 Self-loopback test ................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.6.2 Hardware test ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 13
4.7 CompactFlash Card ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 15
4.7.1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card........................................................................... 4 - 15
4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card......................................................................... 4 - 16
4.8 Battery ........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 21
4.8.1 Battery specifications.............................................................................................................. 4 - 21
4.8.2 Mounting of battery ................................................................................................................. 4 - 21
4.8.3 Battery replacement................................................................................................................ 4 - 22
4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery ............................................................................................. 4 - 25
4.10 Removing Battery for Storage ....................................................................................................... 4 - 26

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 5 - 1 to 5 - 7

5.1 Installation........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 1
5.2 Uninstallation ................................................................................................................................... 5 - 6

CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONS 6 - 1 to 6 - 23
6.1 DB Interface Function ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.1.1 DB interface function operation ................................................................................................ 6 - 1
6.1.2 Job execution procedure .......................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.1.3 Tag function .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 5
6.1.4 Trigger monitoring function ....................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.1.5 Trigger buffering function.......................................................................................................... 6 - 7

A-8
 6.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action) ..................................................................... 6 - 10
6.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action) .................................................................. 6 - 11
6.1.8 Program execution function.................................................................................................... 6 - 11
6.1.9 DB buffering function .............................................................................................................. 6 - 12
6.1.10 Precautions............................................................................................................................. 6 - 20
6.2 XML Processing Function.............................................................................................................. 6 - 22
6.3 Time Synchronization Function ..................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.3.1 Using the SNTP time query result in the PLC CPU ................................................................ 6 - 23

CHAPTER 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL 7 - 1 to 7 - 111

7.1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool..................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool ................................................................. 7 - 1
7.3 Screen Structure.............................................................................................................................. 7 - 2
7.3.1 Screen structure ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.3.2 Menu configuration ................................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.3.3 Toolbar configuration................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree ........................................................................................ 7 - 6
7.4 Project File Handling........................................................................................................................ 7 - 8
7.4.1 Creating a new project.............................................................................................................. 7 - 8
7.4.2 Opening a project ..................................................................................................................... 7 - 8
7.4.3 Saving a project........................................................................................................................ 7 - 9
7.4.4 Importing a project.................................................................................................................. 7 - 10
7.4.5 Importing a CSV file................................................................................................................ 7 - 12
7.4.6 Exporting a CSV file ............................................................................................................... 7 - 15
7.4.7 Printing a setting information file ............................................................................................ 7 - 15
7.5 Project Setting ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 16
7.6 System Setting............................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting ............................................................................................. 7 - 18
7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting ........................................................................ 7 - 19
7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting ............................................................................................. 7 - 21
7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting ...................................................................................... 7 - 24
7.7 Access Target CPU Setting ........................................................................................................... 7 - 28
7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting ............................................................................ 7 - 29
7.8 Device Tag Setting ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 32
7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting ........................................................................................ 7 - 33
7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting........................................................................................ 7 - 37
7.9 Server Service Setting ................................................................................................................... 7 - 42
7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting ................................................................................... 7 - 43
7.10 Job Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7 - 46
7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting..................................................................................................... 7 - 47
7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions ......................................................................................... 7 - 50
7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution........................................................................................ 7 - 61
7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering.................................................................................................. 7 - 65
7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation............................................................................................ 7 - 66
7.11 Job Setting - Actions...................................................................................................................... 7 - 67
7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action .................................................................................. 7 - 71

A-9
 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action............................................................................................ 7 - 85
7.12 Online ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 89
7.12.1 Setting the target MES interface module ................................................................................ 7 - 89
7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings ............................................................................ 7 - 90
7.12.3 Reading the MES interface function settings.......................................................................... 7 - 92
7.12.4 Verifying the MES interface function settings ......................................................................... 7 - 92
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module ......................................................... 7 - 93
7.12.6 Executing a job as a one-shot task......................................................................................... 7 - 98
7.13 Online - Remote operation............................................................................................................. 7 - 99
7.13.1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function ............................................... 7 - 100
7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function.......................................... 7 - 101
7.13.3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution........................................................ 7 - 103
7.13.4 Changing the job status ........................................................................................................ 7 - 104
7.13.5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering ..................................................................... 7 - 105
7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering ................................................................................................... 7 - 106
7.13.7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering .......................................................... 7 - 107
7.13.8 Formatting the CompactFlash card ...................................................................................... 7 - 107
7.14 Help ............................................................................................................................................. 7 - 108
7.15 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 7 - 109

CHAPTER 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL 8 - 1 to 8 - 25

8.1 DB Connection Service Functions ................................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database ........................................................................................................ 8 - 5
8.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool ................................................................................ 8 - 11
8.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ............................................................. 8 - 12
8.4.1 Screen structure ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 12
8.4.2 Menu configuration ................................................................................................................. 8 - 13
8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool ................................................................... 8 - 14
8.6 Importing/Exporting Files .............................................................................................................. 8 - 19
8.7 Help ............................................................................................................................................... 8 - 21
8.8 Output Log Specifications .............................................................................................................. 8 - 22
8.8.1 Access log .............................................................................................................................. 8 - 23
8.8.2 SQL failure log ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 25

CHAPTER 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT 9 - 1 to 9 - 6

9.1 XML Message Format Definition ..................................................................................................... 9 - 2
9.2 XML Message Format Sending Method .......................................................................................... 9 - 4
9.2.1 XML message format sending method ..................................................................................... 9 - 4
9.2.2 Sample program ....................................................................................................................... 9 - 5

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 - 1 to 10 - 43
10.1 Error Codes ................................................................................................................................... 10 - 2
10.1.1 Finding an error code.............................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.1.2 Error types .............................................................................................................................. 10 - 3

A - 10
 10.1.3 System monitor....................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
10.2 Error Code List............................................................................................................................... 10 - 6
10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module ............................................................................. 10 - 6
10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service ................................................................................. 10 - 20
10.2.3 Error codes returned in XML response messages ............................................................... 10 - 30
10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom....................................................................................................... 10 - 31
10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool...................................................... 10 - 31
10.3.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool ................................................................ 10 - 36
10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module.......................................................................... 10 - 37

APPENDICES App- 1 to App - 46

Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables ........................................................................App - 1

Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table .........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names,
variable names, etc. .................................................................................................... App - 2
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc. ............................................ App - 3
Appendix 1.4 Characters available for field names, table names, etc...............................................App - 3
Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format) ............................................................. App - 4
Appendix 2.1 Setting information files list.......................................................................................... App - 4
Appendix 2.2 Setting information file format and editing precautions ...............................................App - 5
Appendix 2.3 SYSTEM.CSV ............................................................................................................. App - 8
Appendix 2.4 ACCOUNT.CSV ........................................................................................................App - 10
Appendix 2.5 DBBUF.CSV..............................................................................................................App - 12
Appendix 2.6 CPU.CSV ..................................................................................................................App - 13
Appendix 2.7 TAG.CSV...................................................................................................................App - 16
Appendix 2.8 COMPONENT.CSV...................................................................................................App - 18
Appendix 2.9 SERVER.CSV ...........................................................................................................App - 20
Appendix 2.10 JOB.CSV ...................................................................................................................App - 22
Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV ......................................................................................................App - 24
Appendix 2.12 ACTION.CSV ............................................................................................................App - 28
Appendix 2.13 ACFIELD.CSV...........................................................................................................App - 30
Appendix 2.14 ACCONDITION.CSV.................................................................................................App - 32
Appendix 2.15 ACEXCEPTION.CSV ................................................................................................App - 34
Appendix 2.16 ACOPERATION.CSV ................................................................................................App - 36
Appendix 2.17 REMOTE.CSV...........................................................................................................App - 39
Appendix 3 Processing Time................................................................................................................App - 41
Appendix 4 External Dimensions..........................................................................................................App - 43
Appendix 5 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly ................................App - 44
Appendix 6 Transportation Precautions ...............................................................................................App - 46
Appendix 6.1 Controlled model .......................................................................................................App - 46
Appendix 6.2 Handling for shipping.................................................................................................App - 46

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 2

A - 11
CONFORMANCE TO THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES

When incorporating the Mitsubishi PLC into other machinery or equipment and making
compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives, refer to Chapter 3 "EMC and Low
Voltage Directive" of the User's Manual (Hardware) included with the CPU module or base
unit used.
The CE logo is printed on the rated plate of the PLC, indicating compliance with the EMC
and low voltage directives.
To make this product comply with the EMC and low voltage directives, refer to "3.1.3
Cables" in Chapter 3 "EMC and Low Voltage Directive" of the User's Manual (Hardware)
included with the CPU module or base unit used.

A - 12
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual is organized by objective for using the QJ71MES96 MES interface module
and MX MESInterface Version1 (SW1DNC-MESIF-E). Use this manual with referring to
the following.

(1) Features and software configuration

Chapter 1 OVERVIEW
Section 1.1 covers the features.
Section 1.2 covers the MX MESInterface software configuration.

(2) System configuration, applicable systems, connection system equipment, and

operating environment
Chapter 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Section 2.1 covers the system configuration.
Section 2.2 covers the applicable systems.
Section 2.3 covers the connection system equipment.
Section 2.4 covers the operating environment.

(3) Performance specifications about the MES interface module

Chapter 3 SPECIFICATIONS
Section 3.1 covers the performance specifications.

(4) Procedure up to MES interface Function module start-up

Chapter 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION
Section 4.2 covers the schematic procedure up to the MES interface module operation.

(5) Installation and uninstallation methods for MX MESInterface

Chapter 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION
Chapter 5 covers MX MESInterface installation and uninstallation methods.

(6) MES interface module functions

Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS
Chapter 6 covers the MES interface module functions.

(7) Setting method for MES Interface Function Configuration Tool

Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL
Chapter 7 covers the setting method of the MES Interface Function Configuration
Tool.

(8) Setting method for DB Connection Service

Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL
Chapter 8 covers the functions and setting method for the DB Connection Service.

(9) XML message format

Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT
Chapter 9 covers the XML message format.

(10)Methods for checking errors and the corrective actions

Chapter 10 TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 10 covers troubleshooting and lists the error codes.

A - 13
 Displaying a reference Displaying a chapter title
Reference in this manual and
Index on the right of a page
reference manual are shown
clears the chapter of the page.
with .

Displaying a section title

The section in which the open page
is included is clear.

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
In addition, this manual provides the following explanations.

Point
Explains the matters to be especially noted, the functions and others related to the
description on that page.

Remark
Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the
convenient information.

A - 14
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and
abbreviations to explain the QJ71MES96 MES interface module and MX MESInterface
Version1 (SW1DNC-MESIF-E).

Generic term/abbreviation Description

Generic term for the A1NCPU, A0J2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJCPU, A1SJHCPU,
A2CCPU, A2CJCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1FXCPU, A2ACPU,
ACPU
A2ACPU-S1, A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1,
A3NCPU, A3ACPU, A3UCPU, and A4UCPU
CC-Link Abbreviation for Control & Communication Link
Ethernet Generic term for 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 10BASE5, and 10BASE2 network systems
Ethernet module Generic term for the E71, QE71, and Q series E71
Generic term for the AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N3-T,
E71
A1SJ71E71N-B5, and A1SJ71E71N-B2
Generic product name for the model names of the SWnD5C-GPPW-E,
SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA. (n = Version 4 or
GX Developer
later)
- A designates a multiple-license product; -V designates a version upgraded product.
MELSECNET/H Abbreviation for MELSECNET/H network system supporting the Q series
MELSECNET/10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET/10 network system supporting the AnU and QnA/Q4AR
MES interface module Abbreviation for the QJ71MES96 MES interface module
MX MESInterface Product name for the model name SW1DNC-MESIF-E
QCPU (A mode) Generic term for the Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A
Generic term for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
QCPU (Q mode)
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU, and Q25PHCPU
Generic term for the AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4, A1SJ71QC24,
QC24(N) A1SJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4, A1SJ71QC24N,
A1SJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24N1, and A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
Generic term for the AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2,
QE71
A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, and A1SJ71QE71N-B2
Generic term for the Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU,
QnACPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, and Q4ARCPU
Generic term for the QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, and
Q series C24
QJ71C24-R2
Q series E71 Generic term for the QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, and QJ71E71-B2
Generic term for the AJ71UC24, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF,
UC24 A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A1SCPUC24-R2, A2CCPUC24, and
A2CCPUC24-PRF
Generic term for the UC24, QC24(N), and Q series C24
Computer link module (Serial
Especially when referring to the QC24(N) and Q series C24, they are written as "Serial
communication module)
communication module".
Personal computer Abbreviation for the IBM-PC/AT-compatible personal computer

A - 15
DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMS

The following table shows the definitions and descriptions of the terms used in this
manual.

Term Description
Abbreviation for Comma Separated Values
CSV
Text file in which the data are aligned and set off by commas and double quotations
Function temporarily stores SQL text that failed to be sent due to a communication error and
DB buffering
resends the text when the communications have been recovered
Abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HTTP Protocol to exchange XML format messages between the MES interface module and user
applications in the XML processing function
Abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution Systems
Systems for controlling and monitoring the plant status in real time to optimize production
MES activities
The systems enable to speed up the responses to production plan and status changes that lead
to efficient production processes and optimization of production activities.
Abbreviation for Open DataBase Connectivity
ODBC
Standard specifications for software to access databases
Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol
SNTP
Protocol for synchronizing computer time via a TCP/IP network
Computer that provides time information to the MES interface module
SNTP server computer
This computer can be shared with a server computer.
Abbreviation for Structured Query Language
SQL
Data manipulation language and used for relational database operations
Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator
URL
Notation method for indicating the locations of information resources on the Internet
Converts character strings into characters can be used in URLs.
URL encode
This designates percent encoding defined by RFC3986.
Abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language
XML
Markup language for describing documentation, data meanings, and structures
Item One setting group unit included each setting type for editing
Designates the right to use the MES interface module or server computer, or an ID necessary for
Account
their use.
Unit for processing defined in a job
There are [Communication action] for communicating with a database and [Operation action] for
Action operating tag component values.
[Communication action] is a processing unit for sending one SQL text (Select, Update, Insert).
[Operation action] is a unit up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed.
COMMIT Processing for finalizing the changes to a database
Storage card regulated by the [CF+ and CompactFlash Specification] issued by the Compact
CompactFlash card Flash Association
(CF card) This memory card is necessary for the MES interface module to operate the MES interface
function.
Generic term for the services can be offered by a server computer to which DB Connection
Service is installed
Server service There are database server service and application server service.
The database server service is a service for accessing a database.
The application server service is a service for linking with a program.
(To the next page)

A - 16
 (From the previous page)
Term Description
There are database server computers and application server computers.
The database server computer is a personal computer with a relational database which links
Server computer information with the MES interface module.
The application server computer is a personal computer with a program that operates upon
request from the MES interface module.
Job Unit for accessing a database
Processing updates the MES interface module settings from MES Interface Function
Update settings
Configuration Tool
Personal computer for configuring various settings required for the MES interface function in the
Configuration computer MES interface module
This computer can be shared with a server computer.
Standard time zone for each region of the world
Each nation uses the time difference ( 12 hours maximum) from the time at the Greenwich
Observatory in the United Kingdom (GMT) as the standard time. The region using the same time
Time zone
difference is called a time zone.
The standard time for Japan is 9 hours ahead of the GMT.
In some nations, daylight time in which the clock is advanced for one hour is used in summer.
Generic term for a component (Device data) making up a device tag (Tag)
Tag component
This data organizes the communications path, data type, device, etc. for access to each PLC
(Component)
CPU device data as a single data unit.
Connection information necessary for accessing data using ODBC
With Windows , a data source name is assigned to connection information for management. The
Data source
database can be accessed via ODBC by specifying the data source name in the MES interface
function.
Data management method that follows relational data model logic
Database (DB) or
One data is expressed as a collection of multiple items (Fields) and the data collection is
relational database
expressed as a table.
(RDB)
Data can be easily merged and selected using key data.
Data management format managed with relational databases
Table
It is a two-dimensional table format composed of rows and columns.
Variety of memory data in the PLC
Device
There are devices handled in units of bits and devices handled in units of words.
Data table that contains a set of information (Component) required to access the device data in
Device tag (Tag) the PLC CPUs on the network
The MES interface module collects device data in units of tags at an interval defined in the tag.
Trigger condition Startup conditions for job operation
When trigger conditions (conditions for data transmission) of multiple jobs are met in a
concentrated manner, their data and trigger times are buffered in the module's internal memory so
Trigger buffering that actions (data operation/transmission) can be executed later using the buffered data.
Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high, jobs are executed without missing any
trigger.
For highly reliable processing, PLC CPU devices are used to manage processing between the
Handshake
PLC CPU and MES interface module.
Field Corresponds to a column in a relational database and indicates a type of data (Record attribute).
Variable (Temporary Variable that can be used in a single job for temporary storage of values selected from a database
variable) and for writing operation values to a database or tag components
Corresponds to a row in a relational database. One row (Record) stores the values of multiple
Record
columns (Fields).
Rollback Processing for canceling changes to a database

A - 17
PACKING LIST

The following table shows the products included to the QJ71MES96 MES interface
module and MX MESInterface Version1 (SW1DNC-MESIF-E).

Model Product name Quantity

QJ71MES96 QJ71MES96MES interface module 1
SW1DNC-MESIF-E MX MESInterface Version 1 (with one license) (CD-ROM) 1
SW1DNC-MESIF-EA MX MESInterface Version 1 (with multiple licenses) (CD-ROM) 1

A - 18
 1 OVERVIEW

1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW
This manual explains the specifications, preparatory procedures, functions, and
troubleshooting for the MELSEC-Q series QJ71MES96 MES interface module (hereafter,
abbreviated as MES interface module).
The MES interface module links the PLC (Production equipment) device data with
2
information system (Manufacturing Execution System) database without communication

CONFIGURATION
gateways.

SYSTEM
Information linkage using the MES interface module Conventional information linkage
without the MES interface module
<Manufacturing Execution System> <Manufacturing Execution System> 3
Information system Information system
(Database) (Database)

SPECIFICATIONS
<Communication gateway>
Host information system
communication processing
Computerization via
communication gateways
is unnecessary.
SQL
XML
Data processing
(Operation processing, 4
logging, etc.)

PROCEDURE TO
Controller communication

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
<Production equipment> <Production equipment>

MES interface module Communication module

PLC CPU PLC CPU

5
(Device data) (Device data)

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 1.1 Information linkage using the MES interface module

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

1-1
 1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Features

This section explains the features of MX MESInterface.

(1) Connection with the information system is enabled by simple settings without
program
Access to information system databases can be realized simply by making the
necessary settings with the setting tool.
There is no need to write programs for accessing databases, so the engineering costs
for system construction can be reduced and the work period can be shortened.

[MX MESInterface] - [MES Interface Function Configuration Tool]

Figure 1.2 [MX MESInterface] - [MES Interface Function Configuration Tool]

1-2 1.1 Features

1 OVERVIEW

1
(2) The information system load can be reduced.
Data can be monitored on the MES interface module side and when the conditions

OVERVIEW
are met, the data can be sent to the information system.
Also, the data can be operated and the results of the operations can be sent to the
information system. 2
This can reduce the information system loads compared to the conventional system
of constantly obtaining and monitoring data.

CONFIGURATION
[MES interface module...]

SYSTEM
<Information system>

3
Sends data as required.
Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS
met Database

[In the conventional system...]

<Information system>
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Database

OPERATION
Constantly obtaining/monitoring data
from information system are required.

Figure 1.3 Loads reduction of information system 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

1.1 Features 1-3

 1 OVERVIEW

(3) Buffering function for reliable data acquisition/transmission

(a) Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high, no trigger will be
missed. (Trigger buffering function)
When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated
manner, their data and trigger times can be buffered in the module's internal
memory.
After the loads are reduced, data operations and transmission are executed using
the buffered data.

[MES interface module]

[When loads are concentrated]
Trigger buffer Job1-1) Sending
Job1-1)
Trigger conditions Job1-2) Trigger information (Tag data, time) Action data
met execution
Job3-3) Trigger information (Tag data, time) Database
Job 1-2)
Trigger conditions
met
Executes action of Job 1-1), and
Job3-3) stores trigger information of Job 1-2)
Trigger conditions and 3-3) in the trigger buffer.
met

Time Time

After loads have been reduced

[When loads are reduced]

Trigger buffer Job 1-2) Sending
Action data
execution Database
Job3-3)
Action
execution After completing the action of Job 1-1),
executes actions of Job 1-2) and 3-3)
in this order based on the trigger buffer
information.

Time Time

The numbers 1) to 3) show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met.
Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database.
Figure 1.4 Data buffering in the case of load concentration

1-4 1.1 Features

1 OVERVIEW

1
(b) Data to be send to the database are protected even if a communication error
occurs. (DB buffering function)

OVERVIEW
When an error occurs during communications with a database, the SQL texts
failed to send can be stored in a CompactFlash card.
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database.
(Manual operation is also possible.) 2

CONFIGURATION
Disconnected

SYSTEM
Database

INSERT...
3
INSERT...

SPECIFICATIONS
INSERT...
UPDATE...

CompactFlash card 4
Recovered

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Resend
Database

5
INSERT...

INSTALLATION AND
INSERT...

UNINSTALLATION
INSERT...
UPDATE...

CompactFlash card
6
Figure 1.5 Buffering of send data (SQL text) during a communication error

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

1.1 Features 1-5

 1 OVERVIEW

(4) log data are available in the event of an access error

After connection with a database, when there is a communication error, a log of the
error contents can be recorded to the database side.
Analyzing the log can protect data and analyze the error.

Database

DB Connection
Service

Access
log SQL
failure
log

Figure 1.6 Obtaining logs for access errors

(5) Directions from the information system can be realized.

Processing registered in the MES interface module can be started from information
system applications.
This enables to realize production directions from the information system.
Not only can data be sent to a database but it can also be received from a database.
This enables to download data such as production information from information
system databases.

<MES interface module> <Information system>

1) Instructs job execution.

2) Starts registered
processing.
(Job execution)
Database
3) Sends data.

<MES interface module> <Information system>

1) Instructs job execution.

2) Starts registered
processing.
(Job execution)
Database
3) Sends data.

Figure 1.7 Realization of directions from the information system

1-6 1.1 Features

1 OVERVIEW

1
(6) Supporting diverse databases
When designing a new system, a wide range of database types can be selected.

OVERVIEW
Even when connecting to the existing system, the system can be transferred without
changing the existing database.
2
(7) Access independent of the database table configuration is possible.
Freely designed database tables can be used for access to databases.

CONFIGURATION
When designing a new system, not only the high flexibility of design, but when
connecting to the existing system, the system can be constructed without changing

SYSTEM
the database tables.

(8) Time synchronization using SNTP is also possible. 3

The clocks for the MES interface module and the PLC CPU can be set through

SPECIFICATIONS
communications with an SNTP server computer.
This enables to synchronize the time for the entire system.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

1.1 Features 1-7

 1 OVERVIEW

1.2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration

This section explains the MX MESInterface software configuration.

Table 1.1 MX MESInterface software configuration

Reference
Item Description
section
Installs each execution software (MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, DB
Installer Connection Service, and DB Connection Service Setting Tool) in each operating Chapter 5
environment.
Operates on a configuration computer and configures various settings required for the
MES Interface Function MES interface function.
Chapter 7
Configuration Tool In addition to the configuration, the application tool offers features such as the operation
status check, working log check, or stop/restart operation.
DB Connection Service Operates on the server computer and links databases with the MES interface module. Chapter 8
DB Connection Service Operates on the server computer and changes the settings of the DB Connection
Chapter 8
Setting Tool Service.

1-8 1.2 MX MESInterface Software Configuration

 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the system configuration of the MES interface module.

2.1 System Configuration 2

CONFIGURATION
2.1.1 Overall system configuration

SYSTEM
This section shows the overall system configuration when using the MES interface
module.
3
Oracle R , SQL Server, etc.
Database (manufactured by

SPECIFICATIONS
other companies)
SNTP server computer *1 *2 Server computer

DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool 4

PROCEDURE TO
Ethernet

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
MES interface module

MES Interface
5
CompactFlash Configuration Tool

INSTALLATION AND
card

UNINSTALLATION
Configuration computer *1

MELSECNET/H, etc.

Q/QnA/ACPU Q/QnA/ACPU FUNCTIONS

:Functions provided by MX MESInterface
Figure 2.1 Overall system configuration when using the MES interface module

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

*1 The SNTP server computer and configuration computer can be shared with server computers.
MES INTERFACE

*2 This computer is necessary when using the SNTP server computer time for the MES interface
module time.
FUNCTION

Section 6.3 Time Synchronization Function

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.1 System Configuration

2.1.1 Overall system configuration
2-1
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.2 System configuration for installation

This section shows system configurations for installing MX MESInterface.

(1) When installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting

Tool on a server computer

MX MESInterface Server computer

Installation

DB Connection Service
DB Connection Service Setting Tool
Commercialized product

Figure 2.2 Installing DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool

Point
(1) When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the
ODBC setting for the database used must be done beforehand.
Section 8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database
(2) When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an
account for user program execution must be created beforehand.

(2) When installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool on a configuration

computer

MX MESInterface Configuration computer

Installation

MES Interface Configuration Tool

Commercialized product

Figure 2.3 Installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool

2-2 2.1 System Configuration

2.1.2 System configuration for installation
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
2.1.3 System configuration for initial setup

OVERVIEW
This section shows system configurations for initial setup of the MES interface module
using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool.

MES interface module Twisted pair cable

(Crossing cable) 2
Ethernet

CONFIGURATION
Configuration computer

SYSTEM
or

3
MES interface module
Twisted pair cable
(Straight cable)

SPECIFICATIONS
Ethernet

Hub Configuration computer

Figure 2.4 System configurations for initial setup of the MES interface module
4
Remark

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
The following explains the network settings of the configuration computer when

OPERATION
connecting it to the MES interface module on a 1:1 basis.

1 Set the same network address as the one of the MES interface module in the
network settings for the configuration computer. 5

INSTALLATION AND
Set the values to be identical.

UNINSTALLATION
Set different values.
Default value of Host Host
"MES interface module" Network section section "Configuration computer"
Network section
section
IP ADDRESS 192.168.3. 3 IP ADDRESS 192.168.3. 1
Subnet mask 255.255.255. 0 Subnet mask 255.255.255. 0
6
Figure 2.5 Network settings for configuration computer

2 Make the network settings of the configuration computer in the [Internet Protocol
FUNCTIONS
(TCP/IP) Properties] dialog box.
Example: Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

Figure 2.6 [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] dialog box

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.1 System Configuration

2.1.3 System configuration for initial setup
2-3
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.4 System configuration for operation

This section shows the system configuration when operating the MES interface module.

Point
The MES interface module can only be connected with a LAN.
The module cannot be connected via the Internet.

MES interface module

Twisted pair cable

Ethernet
Intranet

Server computer
SNTP server computer

Configuration computer
Figure 2.7 System configuration for operating the MES interface module

2-4 2.1 System Configuration

2.1.4 System configuration for operation
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
2.2 Applicable Systems

OVERVIEW
This section explains the applicable systems.

(1) Applicable PLC CPUs and No. of mountable modules

The following shows the PLC CPUs compatible with the MES interface module and 2
No. of mountable MES interface modules.

CONFIGURATION
Table 2.1 Applicable PLC CPUs and No. of mountable modules
Applicable module No. of mountable modules Remarks

SYSTEM
Q00JCPU Maximum 8
Q00CPU
Maximum 24
Q01CPU 3
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU

SPECIFICATIONS
PLC CPU (*1)
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU Maximum 64
Q25HCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
4
*1 Refer to the following manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
(2) Mountable positions on base unit
The MES interface module can be mounted to any I/O slot *2 of the base unit.
However, the power capacity may reduce depending on combination with other
5
mounted modules or the number of mounted modules, pay attention to the power

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
capacity when mounting modules.
*2 Must be within the range of the number of I/O points for the PLC CPU.

(3) Application to multiple CPU system

When using the MES interface module in multiple CPU system, refer to the following 6
manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The MES interface module is compatible with the multiple CPU system with function
FUNCTIONS
version B from the first product.

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.2 Applicable Systems 2-5

 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(4) Compatible software packages

The following table shows the systems where the MES interface module can be used
and the compatible software packages.
Note that GX Developer is inaccessible to a PLC CPU via the MES interface module.

Table 2.2 Compatible software packages

Software version
Item
GX Developer MX MESInterface
Single CPU system Version 7 or later
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later
Single CPU system Version 4 or later Version 1.00A or
Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU
Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later later
Single CPU system Version 7.10L or
Q12PH/Q25PHCPU
Multiple CPU system later

2-6 2.2 Applicable Systems

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
2.3 Connection System Equipment

OVERVIEW
This section explains the equipment can be connected to the MES interface module.

(1) CompactFlash card (sold separately)

The MES interface module requires one CompactFlash card. 2
Use either of the following CompactFlash cards. *1

CONFIGURATION
Table 2.3 CompactFlash card (sold separately)

SYSTEM
Model Description
GT05-MEM-128MC CompactFlash card 128 MB
GT05-MEM-256MC CompactFlash card 256 MB

*1 For commercial CompactFlash cards, refer to the following.

3
Information site for Mitsubishi Electric Industrial Automation products, MELFANSweb

SPECIFICATIONS
(http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)

Point
(1) For CompactFlash card format, use the formatting function of MES Interface
4
Function Configuration Tool.
Section 7.13.8 Formatting the CompactFlash card

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(2) A CompactFlash card has a service life (restriction on the number of writes).

OPERATION
For details, refer to the specifications of each product.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.3 Connection System Equipment 2-7

 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

(2) Twisted pair cable (sold separately)

Use twisted pair cable that meets IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

(a) For 100 Mbps

Either 1) or 2) of the following can be used.
1) Unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP cable), Category 5
2) Shielded twisted pair cable (STP cable), Category 5

(b) For 10 Mbps

Either 1) or 2) of the following can be used.
1) Unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP cable), Category 3 (4, 5)
2) Shielded twisted pair cable (STP cable), Category 3 (4, 5)

Point
During high speed communication (100 Mbps) via 100BASE-TX connection,
communication errors may occur due to the effect of high frequency noise
generated from the equipment other than PLC, depending on the installation
environment.
Take the following countermeasures on the MES interface module side to
eliminate the effect of high frequency noise when constructing the network
system.
(1) Wiring
• Do not install the twisted pair cables together with the main circuit or
power lines, or bring them close to each other.
• Make sure to place the twisted pair cable in a duct.
(2) Cable
• In the environment where the cable is susceptible to noise, use the
shielded twisted pair cable (STP cable).
(3) 10 Mbps communication
• Connect the 10 Mbps-compatible equipment with the MES interface
module and transmit the data to the equipment at a transmission speed of
10 Mbps.

2-8 2.3 Connection System Equipment

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
2.4 Operating Environment

OVERVIEW
2.4.1 Configuration computer

This section explains the operating environment for the configuration computer.
2
Table 2.4 Operating environment for configuration computer

CONFIGURATION
Item Description
Computer PC/AT-compatible personal computer can operate the following basic software

SYSTEM
CPU
Required See "Performance required for personal computer and basic software" below.
memory
Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more 3
Disc drive CD-ROM disc drive
Display Resolution 1024 × 768 pixels or higher

SPECIFICATIONS
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version) *1 *2
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version) *2 *3
Basic software Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System (English version) *2 *3
Windows 2000 Server Operating System (English version) *1 *2
Microsoft
4
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System (English version) *2 *3
Interface Ethernet

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
*1 When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional, ServicePack2 or later is

OPERATION
required.
*2 Installing MX MESInterface requires the Administrator's authority.
Also, logging on to MX MESInterface as a user in Administrator group is recommended.
*3 The following functions cannot be used.
If any of the following functions is used, this product may not operate normally.
5

INSTALLATION AND
• Application startup in Windows compatibility mode

UNINSTALLATION
• User simple switching
• Remote desktop
• Large Fonts (Detailed setting in the Display Properties)

Performance required for personal computer and basic software

6
Table 2.5 Performance required for personal computer and basic software
Performance required for personal computer
Basic software
CPU Required memory
FUNCTIONS
Windows 2000 Professional
Intel Pentium /Celeron series
Windows XP Professional CPU with clock speed of at least 300 128 MB or more
MHz
Windows XP Home Edition
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Windows 2000 Server Intel Pentium /Celeron series

CPU with clock speed of at least 550 256 MB or more
MES INTERFACE

Windows Server 2003 MHz

FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.1 Configuration computer
2-9
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.4.2 Server computer

This section explains the operating environment for the server computer.

Table 2.6 Operating environment for server computer

Item Description
Computer PC/AT-compatible personal computer can operate the following basic software
CPU
Required See "Performance required for personal computer and basic software" below.
memory
Hard disk available capacity 64 MB or more
Disc drive CD-ROM disc drive
Display Resolution 1024 × 768 pixels or higher

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version)*1 *2

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version)*2 *3

Basic software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System(English version)*1 *2

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System (English version)*2 *3

Interface Ethernet
When using the DB interface function: relational database (any of the following)
• Oracle 8i
• Oracle 9i
• Oracle 10g
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000*4
Required software
• Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)*4
• Microsoft Access 2000*5 *6
• Microsoft Access 2003*5 *6
When using the time synchronization function: SNTP server
(Equipped as a standard to Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003)

*1 When using Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2000 Professional, ServicePack2 or later is
required.
*2 Installing MX MESInterface requires the Administrator's authority.
*3 The following functions cannot be used.
If any of the following functions is used, this product may not operate normally.
• Application startup in Windows compatibility mode
• User simple switching
• Remote desktop
• Large Fonts (Detailed setting in the Display Properties)
*4 Set the security authentication mode to Mixed Mode. ( POINT)
*5 One communication action can update up to 127 fields.
*6 Do not access a file from multiple MES interface modules at the same time.

Performance required for personal computer and basic software

Table 2.7 Performance required for personal computer and basic software
Performance required for personal computer
Basic software
CPU Required memory

Windows 2000 Professional Intel Pentium /Celeron series

CPU with clock speed of at least 128 MB or more
Windows XP Professional 300 MHz

Windows 2000 Server Intel Pentium /Celeron series

CPU with clock speed of at least 256 MB or more
Windows Server 2003 550 MHz

2 - 10 2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.2 Server computer
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Point
How to set the security authentication mode (Mixed Mode)

OVERVIEW
(1) In the case of Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Set it in [SQL Server Properties (Configure)].
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 2.8 [SQL Server Properties (Configure)]

(2) In the case of Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
5
When installing MSDE2000, specify a command parameter.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
setup sapwd = "sa" SECURITYMODE = SQL
(sa: Specify any password.)

2.4.3 Computer for developing XML processing applications 6

This section explains the operating environment of the computer for developing XML
processing applications. FUNCTIONS

Table 2.8 Operating environment of computer for developing XML processing applications
Item Description
Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Program development environment

Sun Microsystems J2SE v1.4.2
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.4 Operating Environment

2.4.3 Computer for developing XML processing applications
2 - 11
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number

This section explains how to check the function version and serial number of the MES
interface module.

(1) Checking at "SERIAL" on the rating plate on the side of the MES interface
module

MAC ADD. Serial No. (first 5 digits)

08071

Compliant standard

Figure 2.9 "SERIAL" on the rating plate on the side of the MES interface module

(2) Checking with GX Developer

The function version and serial number can be checked with [Product Information List]
or [Module's Detailed Information] of GX Developer.
The following shows how to check them on [Product Information List].
Refer to the following section for [Module's Detailed Information].
Section 10.1.3 System monitor

(a) Operation procedure

1 [Diagnostics] [System monitor] [Product Information List]

2 The [Product Information List] dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2.10 [Product Information List] of GX Developer

2 - 12 2.5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1
(b) Checking the serial number and version
• The serial No. of MES interface module is displayed in the “Serial No.”

OVERVIEW
column.
• The function version of MES interface module is displayed in the “Ver.”
column.
2
Point

CONFIGURATION
The serial No. shown on the rating plate may not match with the one displayed on
Product Information List of GX Developer.

SYSTEM
• The serial No. on the rating plate indicates the management information
of the product.
• The serial No. displayed on Product Information. List of GX Developer 3
indicates the functional information of the product.
The functional information of the product is updated when a new function

SPECIFICATIONS
is added.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

2.5 Checking Function Version and Serial Number 2 - 13

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter explains the performance specifications, functions, buffer memory, etc. of the
MES interface module and the MX MESInterface.
For general specifications of the MES interface module, refer to the following manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

3.1 Performance Specifications

This section explains the MES interface module and the MX MESInterface performance
specifications.

(1) Transmission and interface specifications

Table 3.1 Transmission and interface specifications
Item Specifications
*1 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX
Interface
Data transmission
10 Mbps 100 Mbps
rate
Transmission method Base band
No. of cascaded
Ethernet Maximum 4 stages Maximum 2 stages
stages
Max. segment
100 m
length*2
The auto-negotiation function is available. (automatically distinguishes 10BASE-T from
Supported function
100BASE-TX)
Supply power voltage 3.3V 5%
Supply power
Maximum 150 mA
capacity
CompactFlash card
Card size TYPE I card
No. of installable
1
cards
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points/slot (I/O assignment: Intelli. 32 points)
The clock data is obtained from a PLC CPU (in multiple CPU system, CPU No.1) or the
Clock SNTP server computer.
Section 6.3 Time Synchronization Function
5VDC internal current consumption 0.65A
External dimensions 98 (3.86) (H) × 27.4 (1.08) (W) × 90 (3.54) (D) [mm (inch)]
Weight 0.16 kg

*1 The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE-T from 100BASE-TX depending on the device
on other end.
For connection with a hub not having the auto-negotiation function, set the hub side to half-duplex
auto communication mode.
*2 Distance between a hub and node.

3-1 3.1 Performance Specifications

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(2) Software specifications

OVERVIEW
Table 3.2 MX MESInterface performance specifications
Reference
Item Specifications
section
No. of connected databases Maximum 32 items/project
7 types 2
Oracle 8i

CONFIGURATION
Oracle 9i
Oracle 10g Section 7.9.1

SYSTEM
No. of databases that can be connected
Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
Microsoft Access 2000 3
Microsoft Access 2003

SPECIFICATIONS
Section
Allowable number of settings Maximum 64 items/project
7.10.1
Trigger buffering Maximum 128 times
No. of conditions Maximum 2 conditions
can be combined (Combination can be selected either AND or OR)/job
21 types
Period: 1 to 32767 seconds
4
Time: Year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute Section
Trigger
7.10.2

PROCEDURE TO
Value monitoring*1: Compares tag component value and tag

SETTINGS AND
conditions
Condition type

OPERATION
component value (6 types).
Compares tag component value and constant value (6 types).
Module startup
Handshake*1
5
DB interface

Job Allowable number of

Maximum 10 actions/job
settings Section 7.11

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Type 4 types (Select, update, insert, operation)
No. of Maximum 8192 fields/project
communication [DB-tag link settings]: Maximum 256 rows/communication action Section 7.11.1
Action action fields [Select/Update conditions]: Maximum 8 rows/communication action
No. of operations
possible for
operation action
(Maximum 20 dyadic operations)/operation action
Section 7.11.2
6
Operators for 6 types (Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, remainder,
operation action character string combination)
Maximum 2 programs
Program Allowable number of Section FUNCTIONS
(One program before execution of initial action + one program after
execution settings 7.10.3
execution of final action)/job
No. of tags 64 tags/project

No. of components
256 components/tag
4096 components/project
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

5 types (Signed single-precision integer type (16 bits), signed

MES INTERFACE

Device tag Data type double-precision integer type (32 bits), single-precision floating point Section 7.8.2
type (32 bits), bit type, character string type (1 to 32 characters))
FUNCTION

6 types
Statistical
(Average, maximum, minimum, moving average*2, moving
processing
maximum*2, moving minimum*2)
Buffering capacity 8
during Maximum capacity: CompactFlash card capacity - 32M bytes
DB buffering Section 7.6.4
communication
DB CONNECTION

(16 M bytes to 512 M bytes)

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

error*3

(To the next page)

3.1 Performance Specifications 3-2

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(From the previous page)

Table 3.2 MX MESInterface performance specifications

Reference
Item Specifications
section
3 types (One-shot execution of a job, enabling the job, disabling the
Command type
XML processing

job)
Request message size Maximum 128 K bytes
Reception protocol HTTP1.0 Chapter 9
No. of accounts: 16
User authentication User ID: 1 to 20 characters
Password: 6 to 14 characters
Maximum capacity: 1 M byte
Error log capacity
Working log

• At least 4800 logs can be recorded.

Section
Maximum capacity: 2 M bytes
7.12.5
Event log capacity • At least 4800 logs can be recorded. (When there is no detailed log)
• At least 2 logs can be recorded. (When there is a detailed log)

*1 The monitoring interval is 1 to 600 (in units of 0.1 seconds) or 1 to 32767 (in units of seconds).
*2 [No. of samples] can be set up to 20.
*3 The following shows the method for roughly calculating the buffering duration from the buffering
capacity.
Buffering duration = (No. of executable bufferings) (Execution frequency [times/hour]) [h]
No. of executable bufferings = (Usage capacity) (SQL text length + Overhead (4 bytes) [cases]
SQL text length = Total field character length + 6 × No. of fields + Total data length + 20 [bytes]

[Calculation example]
Accessing to 256 fields with 1 job and 1 action and performing every 30 seconds when capacity:
64 M bytes, field name: 16 characters, data length: 32 characters
SQL text length = (16 × 256) + 6 × 256 + (32 × 256) = 13844 [bytes]
No. of executable bufferings = (64 × 1024 × 1024) (13844 + 4) 4846 [cases]
Buffering duration = 4846 (60 30 × 60) 40 [h]

3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges

This section explains the accessible devices and accessible ranges.

For inaccessible PLC CPUs, refer to the following.
Appendix 5 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly

(1) Accessible PLC CPUs

Table 3.3 Accessible PLC CPUs
PLC series Model
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU,
QCPU (Q mode)
Q25PHCPU
Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1, Q3ACPU,
QnACPU
Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QCPU (A mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
A1NCPU, A0J2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJCPU, A1SJHCPU, A2CCPU, A2CJCPU, A2NCPU,
ACPU A2NCPU-S1, A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1FXCPU, A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1,
A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A3NCPU, A3ACPU, A3UCPU, A4UCPU

3-3 3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(2) Accessible routes

OVERVIEW
(a) Single network

MES interface module Network 2 to 7

2
Network 1 Relay Relay Network 8 Access target CPU
station station

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Network communication route
"Network" indicates MELSECNET/10(H) or Ethernet.
The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU.
Figure 3.1 Single network
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 3.4 Single network
Network communication Access target CPU (PLC series)
route QCPU (Q mode) QnACPU QCPU (A mode), ACPU
NET/10(H)
Ethernet *1 *1 *2 4
: Accessible : Inaccessible

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
MES interface module

5
Access target CPU

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
C24 multidrop
CC-Link
Network communication route
Figure 3.2 Single network

6
Table 3.5 Single network
Network communication Access target CPU (PLC series)
route QCPU (Q mode) QnACPU QCPU (A mode), ACPU
FUNCTIONS
CC-Link *3 *3

C24

: Accessible : Inaccessible 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3-4

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(b) Different network

MES interface module Network 2 to 7 C24 multidrop

CC-Link

Network 1 Relay Relay Network 8 Relay Access target CPU

station station station

Network communication route Different network

communication
route
"Network" indicates MELSECNET/10(H) or Ethernet.
The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU.
Figure 3.3 Different network

Table 3.6 Different network

Network Access target CPU (PLC series)
Co-existence
communication QCPU (A mode),
network route QCPU (Q mode) QnACPU
route ACPU
NET/10(H), CC-Link *3 *3

Ethernet C24

: Accessible : Inaccessible

MES interface module Network 2 to 7

Relay Network 1 Relay Relay Network 8 Access target CPU

station station station

C24 multidrop
CC-Link Network Different network communication route
communication
route
"Network" indicates MELSECNET/10(H) or Ethernet.
The relay stations are assumed as the QCPU.
Figure 3.4 Different network

Table 3.7 Different network

Network Access target CPU (PLC series)
Co-existence
communication QCPU (A mode),
network route QCPU (Q mode) QnACPU
route ACPU
NET/10(H)
CC-Link, C24
Ethernet *1

: Accessible : Inaccessible
*1 For the network No. and station number, set the values same with the parameter settings of the Q
series E71 and QE71 on access target CPU side.
Also, set [Station No. IP information] in the parameter settings of the Q series E71, QE71.
For the [Station No. IP information], specify the IP address computation method, table conversion
method, or both.
*2 For the QnACPU and QE71 on the access target CPU side, use products of the manufacturing
date 9707B or later.
*3 For the CC-Link system master/local module on the access target CPU side, use modules of
software version "S" or later.

3-5 3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(3) Accessible devices

OVERVIEW
Table 3.8 Accessible devices

Device*1 QCPU QCPU

QnACPU ACPU
(Device name) (Q mode) (A mode)
Function input (FX) 2
Function output (FY)

CONFIGURATION
Function register (FD)
Special relay (SM) (M)*2

SYSTEM
Special register (SD) (D)*3
Input relay (X)
Output relay (Y)
3
Internal relay (M)*9
Latch relay (L)*9

SPECIFICATIONS
Annunciator (F)
Edge relay (V)
Link relay (B)
Data register (D)
Link register (W) 4
Contact (TS)
Timer Coil (TC)

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Current value (T/TN)*4

OPERATION
Contact (CS)
Counter Coil (CC)
Current value (C/CN)*4
Contact (SS) 5
Retentive timer Coil (SC)

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Current value (ST/SN)*4
Link special relay (SB)
Link special register (SW)
Step relay (S) *9
Direct input (DX)
Direct output (DY)
6
Accumulator (A)
(Z)
Index register
(V) FUNCTIONS

(R) *8

File register (ZR) *8

(ERn\R)*5*10 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

*6
Link input (Jn\X)
Link output (Jn\Y)*6
MES INTERFACE

Link relay (Jn\B)*6

FUNCTION

Link direct device

Link special relay (Jn\SB)*6
Link register (Jn\W)*6
Link special register (Jn\SW)*6 8
Intelligent function
Buffer register (Un\G0)*7
module device
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges 3-6

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

*1 The local devices of the Q/QnA series PLC CPU and file registers for individual programs cannot
be accessed by specifying the program name.
Do not use local devices and file registers for individual programs since they may not be read/
written correctly.
*2 For the QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU, specify SM; for the QCPU (A mode)/ACPU, specify M9000 or
later.
*3 For the QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU, specify SD; for the QCPU (A mode)/ACPU, specify D9000 or
later.
*4 For the device name, specify either of them.
*5 For "n", specify the block number.
*6 For "n", specify the network No.
*7 For "n", specify the intelligent function module/special function module I/O number.
*8 When using the Q00JCPU, the access is not possible.
*9 M, L, and S devices are in the same region, regardless of the parameter device setting.
*10 ER0\R cannot be specified.

3-7 3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.3 Function List

OVERVIEW
This section lists the MES interface module functions.

(1) Function summary

The following explains the function summary of the MES interface module and MX 2
MESInterface.

CONFIGURATION
The functions of the items are listed (2) and the subsequent descriptions.

SYSTEM
MX MESInterface
Database
Products manufactured
by other companies
3
Windows MES Interface DB Connection User-created

SPECIFICATIONS
R

application application SNTP server

Configuration Tool Service

MES interface module

DB interface
function
XML processing
function
Time
synchronization 4
function

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 3.5 Function summary

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.3 Function List 3-8

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(2) MES interface module function list

Table 3.9 MES interface module function list
Reference
Function Description
section
Section 6.1
DB interface function Executes access to the database in units of jobs. Section 7.10
Section 7.11
Collects device data of the PLC CPUs on the network in units of tags.
By allocating database fields to tag components, the DB interface function enables the
Section 6.1.3
Tag function following.
Section 7.8
• Database value reading/writing
• Reading/writing of PLC CPU device data specified with tag components
Trigger monitoring Monitors values such as the time and tag values, and when the trigger condition Section 6.1.4
function changes from false to true (when the conditions are met), starts a job. Section 7.10.2
When multiple sets of conditions for data transmission are met in a concentrated
manner, their data and trigger times are buffered in the module's internal memory so that
Trigger buffering Section 6.1.5
actions (data operation/transmission) can be executed later using the buffered data.
function Section 7.10.1
Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high, jobs are executed without
missing any trigger.
Automatically creates an SQL text and communicates with the database.
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
SQL text transmission Section 6.1.6
• Select
(Communication action) Section 7.11.1
• Update
• Insert
Arithmetic processing
Section 6.1.7
function Performs operations for tag component values.
Section 7.11.2
(Operation action)
Program execution Executes programs in the application server computer before execution of the first action Section 6.1.8
function and after execution of the last one in a job. Section 7.10.3
Buffers SQL texts into a CompactFlash card when they cannot be sent due to network Section 6.1.9
disconnection or failure of the database server computer. Section 7.6.4
DB buffering function
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual Section 7.10.4
operation is also possible.) Section 7.13.6
Processes execution of requests made by user applications using XML format
messages.
The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution. Section 6.2
XML processing function
• One-shot execution of a job Chapter 9
• Validating a job (The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met.)
• Invalidating a job (The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met.)
Time synchronization Makes the time of the MES interface module synchronized with the time of the SNTP Section 6.3
function server computer on the network or a PLC CPU (No.1 CPU in the multiple CPU system). Section 7.6.2

3-9 3.3 Function List

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(3) MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list

OVERVIEW
Table 3.10 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool function list
Reference
Function Description
section
System Setting Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module. Section 7.6 2
Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the
Network settings Section 7.6.1
network.

CONFIGURATION
Time synchronization
Make the time setting for the MES interface module. Section 7.6.2
setting

SYSTEM
Account setting Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module. Section 7.6.3
DB buffering setting Configure the settings for the DB buffering function. Section 7.6.4
Access Target CPU setting Set a connection channel to the access target CPU. Section 7.7
3
Device tag settings Configure the settings for the tag function. Section 7.8
Component setting Configure the tag component settings. Section 7.8.2

SPECIFICATIONS
Server Service setting Configure the settings for access to a server computer. Section 7.9
Job settings Configure the settings for the DB interface function. Section 7.10
Trigger conditions Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job. Section 7.10.2
Trigger buffering Set whether to utilize the Trigger buffering function or not. Section 7.10.1
Communication action Configure the settings for communications with a database. Section 7.11.1
Operation action Configure the settings for operation of tag component values. Section 7.11.2
4
Program execution Configure the settings for the program execution function. Section 7.10.3

PROCEDURE TO
DB buffering Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not. Section 7.10.4

SETTINGS AND
Online Perform online operations to the MES interface module connected to the network. Section 7.12

OPERATION
Communication setting Set the target MES interface module. Section 7.12.1
Write Write the MES interface function settings (project) to the MES interface module. Section 7.12.2
Read Read the MES interface function settings (project) from the MES interface module. Section 7.12.3

Verify
The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with
Section 7.12.4
5
those in the currently editing project.

INSTALLATION AND
Display or change the operation status of the MES interface module, or format a

UNINSTALLATION
Remote operation Section 7.13
CompactFlash card.
Working log The working log of the MES interface module can be checked. Section 7.12.5
One-shot execution of a
Execute a job as a one-shot task. Section 7.12.6
job

Help
The product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and the
Section 7.14 6
Connect to MELFANSweb screen can be displayed.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.3 Function List 3 - 10

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(4) DB Connection Service function list

Table 3.11 DB Connection Service function list
Reference
Function Description
section
ODBC connection function Connects the MES interface module and the ODBC interface for database.
Executes a program on the application server computer upon request from the MES
Program execution function
interface module.
Specifies the IP address of the MES interface module that can connect to the DB
IP filter function
Connection Service to ensure the security of the server computer. Section 8.1
Communication Outputs the communication contents between the MES interface module and DB
Log output log Connection Service to the access log.
function If data cannot be updated/inserted normally due to no table, etc. at SQL text
SQL failure log
execution, the error contents are output to the SQL failure log.
DB Connection Service Setting
Software changes the DB Connection Service settings Section 8.5
Tool

3 - 11 3.3 Function List

3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

OVERVIEW
3.4.1 I/O signal list

The following lists the MES interface module I/O signals to the PLC CPU.
The following I/O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I/O No. of the
2
MES interface module is "0000" (installed to slot 0 of the main base unit)

CONFIGURATION
If the MES interface module is mounted other than slot 0, see the list with changing the I/O
signals by those of the mounted slot.

SYSTEM
Device X indicates an input signal from the MES interface module to the PLC CPU and
device Y indicates an output signal from the PLC CPU to the MES interface module.
3
Table 3.12 I/O signal list

SPECIFICATIONS
Signal direction MES interface module PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU MES interface module
Device Device
Signal name Signal name
No. No.
Module READY
X0 ON: Module prepared Y0
OFF: Module being prepared Use prohibited 4
CompactFlash card status
X1 Y1
ON: Installed OFF: Not installed

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
File access status File access stop request

OPERATION
X2 Y2
ON: Stopped OFF: Running ON: Stop request OFF: —
X3 Use prohibited Y3
Network connection status
X4 Y4
ON: Connected OFF: Not connected 5
Information linkage status
X5 Y5
ON: Executing OFF: Stopped

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
X6 Y6
X7 Y7
X8 Use prohibited Y8
Use prohibited
X9 Y9
XA YA
SNTP time query timing
6
XB YB
ON: Query complete OFF: No query
XC YC
XD YD
Use prohibited FUNCTIONS
XE YE
XF YF

(To the next page)

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

3.4.1 I/O signal list
3 - 12
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(From the previous page)

Table 3.12 I/O signal list

Signal direction MES interface module PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU MES interface module
Device Device
Signal name Signal name
No. No.
ERR. LED status Error clear request
X10 Y10
ON: Lighting, flashing OFF: Extinction ON: Error clear request OFF: —
Sampling error
X11 Y11
ON: Error OFF: Normal
Information linkage error
X12 Y12
ON: Error OFF: Normal
X13 Y13
X14 Use prohibited Y14
X15 Y15
Access target CPU error
X16 Y16
ON: Error OFF: Normal
X17 Y17
Use prohibited
X18 Y18
X19 Use prohibited Y19
X1A Y1A
X1B Y1B
Another error
X1C Y1C
ON: Error OFF: Normal
X1D Y1D
Use prohibited
X1E Y1E
Watchdog timer error
X1F Y1F
ON: Error OFF: Normal

Point
As for I/O signals to a PLC CPU, do not output (ON) a "Use prohibited" signal.
Doing so may cause malfunctions of the PLC system.

3 - 13 3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

3.4.1 I/O signal list
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.4.2 I/O signals details

OVERVIEW
The following table shows the details of the I/O signals of the MES interface module.

(1) Input signals details

Table 3.13 Input signals details
2
Device
Signal name Description

CONFIGURATION
No.
Turns ON when the MES interface module becomes ready after the PLC is powered ON from OFF or
X0 Module READY

SYSTEM
the PLC CPU is reset.
CompactFlash card (1) Turns ON when the CompactFlash card is installed and the file access status (X2) is OFF.
X1
status (2) Turns OFF when the CompactFlash card is not installed or the file access status (X2) is ON.
(1) Turns ON while file access is stopped. 3
(a) The following operations are available while file access is stopped.
• Removing and installing a CompactFlash card

SPECIFICATIONS
( Section 4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card)
• Powering OFF the PLC during operation without battery
( Section 4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery)
(b) While file access is stopped, the following status occurs.
• Reading from or writing to a CompactFlash card is disabled. 4
• The MES interface function is suspended.
• Operation from MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is disabled.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(2) Turns OFF during file access operation.

OPERATION
Powering ON the PLC from OFF or resetting the PLC CPU brings file access in operation.

X2 File access status File access stop request (Y2)

5

INSTALLATION AND
(In operation) (During stop)

UNINSTALLATION
File access status (X2)

Information linkage status (X5)

CompactFlash card status (X1)

6

Replace the CompactFlash card. FUNCTIONS

Power OFF the PLC.

(1) Turns ON when the MES interface module is connected to the network.
Network connection
X4
status
(2) When powering ON the PLC from OFF or resetting the PLC CPU, the MES interface module
connects with the network.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(To the next page)

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

3.4.2 I/O signals details
3 - 14
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(From the previous page)

Table 3.13 Input signals details

Device
Signal name Description
No.
(1) Turns ON when the MES interface function operation is enabled.
This indicates that MES interface function processing is executable.
(2) Turns OFF when the MES interface function is in stop.
The MES interface function processing stops in the following cases.
1) The period after the PLC is powered ON from OFF or the PLC CPU is reset until the MES
interface function starts
Information linkage 2) When the MES interface function processing stops with [Remote operation] of MES Interface
X5
status Function Configuration Tool ( Section 7.13 Online - Remote operation)
3) When a module stop error occurs in the MES interface module
( Section 10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool)
4) During updating settings ( Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES
interface function)
5) While file access is stopped ( Section 4.7 CompactFlash Card)
(1) Turns ON when [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected in [Time synchronization setting], and
after succeeding the time query and storing the time into the buffer memory.
(2) Reads time data from the SNTP time query results (Buffer memory address: 11501 to 11507),
while XB is ON.
(3) This device turns OFF 1 second after XB turns ON.

SNTP time query timing (XB) (Initial value: OFF)

1 second 1 second
SNTP time query
XB
timing "Time synchronization" setting status (Initial value: 0)
(Buffer memory address: 11500)

SNTP time query result (Initial value: 0)

(Buffer memory address:
11501 to 11507) Sets time Sets time
data data

Inquires time Inquires time

Time query processing to the SNTP to the SNTP
server computer. server computer.
(Initial)

(1) Turns ON while the ERR. LED is ON (during a module continuation error) or flashing (during a
module stop error).
(2) Turns OFF when the ERR. LED is turned OFF by turning the Error clear request (Y10) ON with
X10 ERR. LED status
the ERR. LED ON. (However, this is not possible while the ERR. LED is flashing.)
(3) While the ERR. LED is ON or flashing (when X10 is ON), any or some of X11, X12, X16, and
X1C turn(s) ON.
(1) Turns ON when an error regarding Sampling error occurs.
(2) When this device is ON, the error code is stored into the Tag status area (Buffer memory
X11 Sampling error
address: 1000 to 1075).
(3) Turns OFF when the Error clear request (Y10) is turned ON.
(1) Turns ON when an error regarding information linkage occurs.
Information linkage (2) When this device is ON, the error code is stored into the Error log area (Buffer memory
X12
error address: 150 to 247).
(3) Turns OFF when the Error clear request (Y10) is turned ON.

(To the next page)

3 - 15 3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

3.4.2 I/O signals details
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(From the previous page)

Table 3.13 Input signals details

OVERVIEW
Device
Signal name Description
No.
(1) Turns ON when an error occurs in communications with the access target CPU.

X16
Access target CPU
error
(2) When this device is ON, the error code is stored into the Access target CPU setting status area
(Buffer memory address: 4000 to 4071).
2
(3) Turns OFF when the Error clear request (Y10) is turned ON.

CONFIGURATION
(1) Turns ON when an error not corresponding to X11, X12, or X16 occurs.
(2) When this device is ON, the error code is stored into the Error log area (Buffer memory

SYSTEM
X1C Another error address: 150 to 247).
(3) Turns OFF when the Error clear request (Y10) is turned ON. (Only in case of a module
continuation error)

X1F
Watchdog timer
Turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs.
3
error

SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Output signals details
Table 3.14 Output signals details
Device
Signal name Description
No. 4
File access stop (1) Turns ON when file access is stopped.
Y2
request (2) For ON/OFF timing, refer to the description of X2.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(1) By turning ON during a module continuation error (ERR. LED: ON) turns OFF the ERR. LED

OPERATION
and X10, X11, X16, and X1C.
During a module stop error (ERR.LED: flashing), turning this device ON does not turn OFF the
Y10 Error clear request ERR. LED.
(2) Clears the Current error area (Buffer memory address: 140 to 145).
Clears the latest error code displayed on [System monitor] of GX Developer. ( Section
5
10.1.3 System monitor)

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.4 I/O Signals for PLC CPU

3.4.2 I/O signals details
3 - 16
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.5 Buffer Memory List

The buffer memory list is shown below.

Table 3.15 Buffer memory list

Address Initial Read/ Reference
Application Name *1
(Decimal) value write section
RUN LED status
0 0 R
0: OFF 1: ON
ERR. LED status
1 0 R
0: OFF 1: ON 2: Flash
Switch 1 status (Mode setting)
0000h: Online
2 0 R
0001h: Hardware test
0002h: Self-loopback test
Switch 2 status (Default operation setting/battery error detection setting)
(1) Default operation setting [Account setting] (b0)
0: Operates according to [Account setting].
Module status Section
1: Operates according to the default.
area 3.6.1
(2) Default operation setting [Account setting] (b1)
3 0 R
0: Operates according to [Network settings].
1: Operates according to the default.
(3) Battery error detection setting (b2)
0: Detects battery errors.
1: Does not detect battery errors.
Switch 3 status (Response monitoring time setting)
4 0 R
15 to 255 (Second): Response monitoring time
5 to 6 System area — —
Battery status
7 0 R
0: Normal 1: Battery error
8 to 54 Use prohibited System area — — —
55 to 56 Network IP address 0 R
Section
57 to 58 connection Subnetwork 0 R
3.6.2
59 to 60 status area Default gateway 0 R
61 to 70 Use prohibited System area — — —
71 to 72 Network IP address 0 R
Section
73 to 74 settings status Subnet mask 0 R
3.6.3
75 to 76 area Default gateway 0 R
77 to 139 Use prohibited System area — — —
140 Error code 0 R
Current error Section
141 System area — —
area 3.6.4
142 to 145 Time 0 R
146 to 149 Use prohibited System area — — —

*1 Shows whether or not reading/writing is possible.

R: Only reading is possible. W: Only writing is possible.
R/W: Both reading and writing are possible.
(To the next page)

3 - 17 3.5 Buffer Memory List

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(From the previous page)

Table 3.15 Buffer memory list

OVERVIEW
Address Initial Read/ Reference
Application Name
(Decimal) value write*1 section
150 Error count 0 R
151 Error log write pointer 0 R 2
152 Error code 0 R
153 Error log 1 System area — —

CONFIGURATION
154 to 157 Time 0 R
158 to 163 Error log 2 (Same as Error log 1)

SYSTEM
164 to 169 Error log 3 (Same as Error log 1)
170 to 175 Error log 4 (Same as Error log 1)
176 to 181 Error log 5 (Same as Error log 1)
182 to 187 Error log 6 (Same as Error log 1) Section
3
Error log area
188 to 193 Error log 7 (Same as Error log 1) 3.6.5

SPECIFICATIONS
194 to 199 Error log 8 (Same as Error log 1)
200 to 205 Error log 9 (Same as Error log 1)
206 to 211 Error log 10 (Same as Error log 1)
212 to 217 Error log 11 (Same as Error log 1)
218 to 223 Error log 12 (Same as Error log 1)
224 to 229 Error log 13 (Same as Error log 1) 4
230 to 235 Error log 14 (Same as Error log 1)
236 to 241 Error log 15 (Same as Error log 1)

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
242 to 247 Error log 16 (Same as Error log 1)

OPERATION
248 to 799 Use prohibited System area — — —
800 to 801 Sampling/ Current cycle (Unit: second) 0 R
Section
monitoring cycle
802 to 803 Maximum cycle (Unit: second) 0 R 3.6.6
area 5
804 to 999 Use prohibited System area — — —

INSTALLATION AND
1000 to 1003 Tag setting information 0 R

UNINSTALLATION
1004 to 1007 Sampling information 0 R
1008 to 1011 Sampling error information 0 R
Section
1012 Tag status area Sampling 1, error code 0 R
3.6.7
The composition of each area is the same as that of the Sampling 1, error
Sampling 2 to
1013 to 1075
64, error codes
code.
6
Refer to *2 for the assignment of each area.
1076 to 1289 Use prohibited System area — — —
1290 No. of requested tag 0 R/W
1291 No. of stored tag 0 R FUNCTIONS

1292 Current tag data Update count 0 R Section

1293 value area No. of components 0 R 3.6.8
1294 to 1299 System area — —
1300 to 1811 Current tag data value 0 R
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

1812 to 3999 Use prohibited System area — — —

MES INTERFACE

*1 Shows whether or not reading/writing is possible.

FUNCTION

R: Only reading is possible. W: Only writing is possible.

R/W: Both reading and writing are possible.
(To the next page)

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.5 Buffer Memory List 3 - 18

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(From the previous page)

Table 3.15 Buffer memory list

Address Initial Read/ Reference
Application Name
(Decimal) value write*1 section
4000 to 4003 Access target CPU setting information 0 R
4004 to 4007 Access target CPU error information 0 R
Access target
4008 Access target CPU 1, error code 0 R Section
CPU setting
Access target The composition of each area is the same as that of the Access target 3.6.9
status area
4009 to 4071 CPU 2 to 64, CPU 1, error code.
error codes Refer to *3 for the assignment of each area.
4072 to 11499 Use prohibited System area — — —
"Time synchronization" setting status
11500 0 R Section
0: [Synchronize with PLC CPU time]1: [Synchronize with SNTP]
3.6.10
11501 to 11507 SNTP time query result 0 R
11508
System area — — —
11509
11510 Information Monitoring interval timeout count 0 R
Section
11511 linkage function No. of trigger buffer data 0 R
3.6.10
11512 area Trigger buffer overflow count 0 R
11513 to 11519 System area — — —
11520 Trigger buffer overflow count for Job 1 0 R
Trigger buffer The composition of each area is the same as that of the Trigger buffer Section
11521 to 11583 overflow counts overflow count for Job 1. 3.6.10
for Jobs 2 to 64 *4
Refer to for the assignment of each area.

*1 Shows whether or not reading/writing is possible.

R: Only reading is possible. W: Only writing is possible.
R/W: Both reading and writing are possible.
*2 The following table shows the error code area assignment for Sampling 1 to 64 (Buffer memory
address: 1012 to 1075).

Table 3.16 Sampling 1 to 64, error code areas

Sampling 1 to 64, error code areas
Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Sampling 1 to 10, error codes 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Sampling 11 to 20, error codes 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Sampling 21 to 30, error codes 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Sampling 31 to 40, error codes 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Sampling 41 to 50, error codes 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Sampling 51 to 60, error codes 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071
61 62 63 64
Sampling 61 to 64, error codes 1072 1073 1074 1075

3 - 19 3.5 Buffer Memory List

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
*3 The following table shows the error code area assignment for the Access target CPUs 1 to 64
(Buffer memory address: 4008 to 4071).

OVERVIEW
Table 3.17 Access target CPU 1 to 64, error code areas
Access target CPU 1 to 64, error code areas
Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Access target CPU 1 to 10, error codes 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
2
Access target CPU 11 to 20, error codes 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027

CONFIGURATION
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Access target CPU 21 to 30, error codes 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037

SYSTEM
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Access target CPU 31 to 40, error codes 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Access target CPU 41 to 50, error codes 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 3
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

SPECIFICATIONS
Access target CPU 51 to 60, error codes 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067
61 62 63 64
Access target CPU 61 to 64, error codes 4068 4069 4070 4071

*4 The following table shows the assignment of the Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to
64 (Buffer memory address: 11520 to 11583).
4
Table 3.18 Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64
Trigger buffer overflow count areas for Jobs 1 to 64

PROCEDURE TO
Name

SETTINGS AND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

OPERATION
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 10 11520 11521 11522 11523 11524 11525 11526 11527 11528 11529
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 11 to 20 11530 11531 11532 11533 11534 11535 11536 11537 11538 11539
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 5
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 21 to 30 11540 11541 11542 11543 11544 11545 11546 11547 11548 11549
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 31 to 40 11550 11551 11552 11553 11554 11555 11556 11557 11558 11559
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 41 to 50 11560 11561 11562 11563 11564 11565 11566 11567 11568 11569
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 51 to 60 11570 11571 11572 11573 11574 11575 11576 11577 11578 11579
61 62 63 64
6
Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 61 to 64 11580 11581 11582 11583

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.5 Buffer Memory List 3 - 20

 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

This section explains the buffer memory details.

Point
(1) The values stored in buffer memory are cleared when the PLC is powered ON
from OFF, or the PLC CPU is reset.
(2) When a value of 65536 or more is stored in the area composed of one word, a
count is stopped at FFFFh (65535).
(3) If a value of more than two words is stored in the area composed of two
words, a count is stopped at FFFFFFFFh (4294967295).

3.6.1 Module status area

The ON/OFF status of the MES interface module LED, setting status of the intelligent
function module switches, and battery status are stored.
Refer to the following for details.
• Section 4.3 Parts Names
• Section 4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings

3.6.2 Network connection status area

The status of network connection to which the MES interface module is currently
connected is stored.
For network connection, refer to the following.
Section 7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting

3.6.3 Network settings status area

This network settings status of the MES interface module is stored.

For network settings, refer to the following.
Section 7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting

3 - 21 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.1 Module status area
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.6.4 Current error area

OVERVIEW
(1) Error code (Buffer memory address: 140)
An error code which indicates the error contents is stored.
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 10.2 Error Code List 2

CONFIGURATION
(2) Time (Buffer memory address: 142 to 145)
The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code.

SYSTEM
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Year (00H to 99H) The last
3
Buffer memory address: 142 Month (01H to 12H)
two digits of the year

SPECIFICATIONS
143 Hour (00H to 23H) Day (01H to 31H)
144 Second (00H to 59H) Minute (00H to 59H)

145 Year (00H to 99H) The first

Day of the week (0H to 6H)
two digits of the year
Figure 3.6 Error time area
4

Point

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
(1) The information of the Current error area can be confirmed on the following
diagnostic screen.
(a) Select [System monitor] [Present Error] of GX Developer ( Section
10.1.3 System monitor) 5
(2) The Current error area can be cleared in either of the following methods.

INSTALLATION AND
(a) Turn ON the Error clear request (Y10).

UNINSTALLATION
(b) Power ON the PLC from OFF or reset the PLC CPU.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.4 Current error area
3 - 22
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.6.5 Error log area

(1) Error count (Buffer memory address: 150)

(a) The cumulative number of registrations to the Error log area is stored.

(2) Error log write pointer (Buffer memory address: 151)

(a) The number of error log to which the latest error is registered is stored.*1
0: No error (No error log stored)
1 or more: Error log number of the latest error stored
*1 The pointer value of "16" indicates that the latest error has been registered into the error log area
of 16.

(b) If 17 or more errors occur, the excess errors are registered to the error log areas,
starting from the error log 1 area again.

(3) Error log 1 to 16 (Buffer memory address: 152 to 247)

The error history is stored.
The Error log area is composed of 16 logs of the same data arrangement.

(a) Error code

An error code which indicates the error contents is stored.
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 10.2 Error Code List

(b) Time
The time when the error occurred is stored in BCD code.

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Buffer memory address: 152 to 157 Error log1 +0 Error code
158 to 163 Error log2 +1 System area (Use prohibited)
Year (00H to 99H) The last
+2 Month (01H to 12H)
two digits of the year
+3 Hour (00H to 23H) Day (01H to 31H)
Time
242 to 247 Error log16 +4 Second (00H to 59H) Minute (00H to 59H)
Year (00H to 99H) The first
+5 Day of the week (0H to 6H)
two digits of the year
Figure 3.7 Error time area

(c) If an error that has already stored in the Error log area recurs, the error code is not
stored in the Error log area.

Point
(1) The information of the Error log area can be confirmed on the following
diagnostic screen.
Select [System monitor] [Error Display] of GX Developer (Section 10.1.3
System monitor)
(2) The Error log area can be cleared in either of the following methods.
(a) Power ON the PLC from OFF or reset the PLC CPU.
(b) Select [Online] and click the [View working log] button.
( Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module)

3 - 23 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.5 Error log area
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.6.6 Sampling/monitoring cycle area

OVERVIEW
The MES interface module monitors the device data sampling time and trigger conditions
alternately.
The time (cycle) required for this repetition can be confirmed in this area.
When the sampling/monitoring cycle is one second, device tag sampling and trigger 2
conditions are monitored based on the set values.
When it is longer than one second, delay of up to "sampling/monitoring cycle minus 1

CONFIGURATION
second" may occur in the monitoring.

SYSTEM
(1) Current cycle (buffer memory address: 800 to 801)
The current sampling/monitoring cycle value is stored. (Unit: Second)
3
(2) Maximum cycle (buffer memory address: 802 to 803)

SPECIFICATIONS
The maximum sampling/monitoring cycle value up to the present moment is stored.
(Unit: Second)

3.6.7 Tag status area

4
(1) Tag setting information (Buffer memory address: 1000 to 1003)

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(a) The information on whether [Device tag settings] have been made or not is stored.

OPERATION
(b) The bit corresponding to the preset tag setting No. is turned ON.
0: Not set
1: Set
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Buffer memory address: 1000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1001 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
1002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
1003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Figure 3.8 Tag setting information area
6
(2) Sampling information (Buffer memory address: 1004 to 1007)
FUNCTIONS
(a) The tag sampling result is stored.

(b) The bit corresponding to the tag setting No. which executed sampling is turned
ON. 7
0: Not collected
CONFIGURATION TOOL

1: Collected
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Buffer memory address: 1004 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1005 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 8
1006 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
1007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Figure 3.9 Sampling information area

SERVICE AND

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.6 Sampling/monitoring cycle area
3 - 24
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Sampling error information (Buffer memory address: 1008 to 1011)

(a) The tag sampling error information is stored.

(b) The bit corresponding to the tag setting No. to which the Sampling error occurred
is turned ON.
0: No sampling error
1: Sampling error detected

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Buffer memory address: 1008 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1009 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
1010 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
1011 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Figure 3.10 Sampling error information area

(c) The following results when a Sampling error occurs.

(Example) When an error occurred in the tag sampling of the tag setting number
16
• The Sampling error (X11) is turned ON.
• Sampling error information area (Buffer memory address: 1008 (bit 15)) is
turned ON.
• The error code is stored in the Sampling 16, error code area (Buffer memory
address: 1027)

(4) Sampling 1 to 64, error codes (Buffer memory address: 1012 to 1075)
The error code that indicates the error contents is stored in the corresponding tag
setting number area for which the Sampling error occurred.
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 10.2 Error Code List

3 - 25 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.7 Tag status area
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.6.8 Current tag data value area

OVERVIEW
The specified current tag data is stored.
This section explains how to display the specified tag data in the Current tag data value
area.
2
1 Set the tag number displayed in the No. of requested tag (Buffer memory address:

CONFIGURATION
1290). *1

SYSTEM
2 Check that the tag number is stored in the No. of stored tag (Buffer memory address:
1291) and that the Update count (Buffer memory address: 1292) is incremented by
1. *2 3
3 Check that the tag component values for the No. of components (Buffer memory

SPECIFICATIONS
address: 1293) are stored in the Current tag data value (Buffer memory address:
1300 to 1811). *3
*1 The tag numbers are the numbers beginning at 1 to 64 in the order set with MES Interface
Function Configuration Tool.
*2 If a value outside the range is set, the Current tag data value area is not updated. 4
*3 The Current tag data value area is updated each time the sampling is completed for the tag whose
number is set as the No. of requested tag (Buffer memory address: 1290).

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
No. of requested tag Specify tag No.
(Buffer memory address: 1290) (Example) Specify "5".

No. of stored tag

(Buffer memory address: 1291)
The current tag No. is stored.
(Example) "5" is stored. 5
The cumulative number

INSTALLATION AND
Update count

UNINSTALLATION
of updates is stored.
(Buffer memory address: 1292) (Example) "1" is stored.

No. of components No. of components

(Buffer memory address: 1293) is stored.

Current tag data value Tag data is stored.

(Buffer memory address: 1300) 6
Figure 3.11 Current tag data value area

(1) No. of requested tag (Buffer memory address: 1290) FUNCTIONS

Specify the tag number whose current value is displayed as the Current tag data value
(Buffer memory address: 1300 to 1811).
7
(2) No. of stored tag (Buffer memory address: 1291)
CONFIGURATION TOOL

The tag No. displayed as the Current tag data value (Buffer memory address: 1300 to
MES INTERFACE

1811) is stored.
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.8 Current tag data value area
3 - 26
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Update count (Buffer memory address: 1292)

(a) After the power is ON, the cumulative number of updates for the Current tag data
value (Buffer memory address: 1300 to 1811) is stored.

(b) After specifying the tag number displayed as the No. of requested tag (Buffer
memory address: 1290), when the update count is increased, the Current tag data
value (Buffer memory address: 1300 to 1811) is updated with the value of the
specified tag number.

(4) No. of components (Buffer memory address: 1293)

The No. of components displayed as the Current tag data value (Buffer memory
address: 1300 to 1811) is stored.

Remark
The following is an example where the current value of tag No. 5 is confirmed in
[Buffer memory batch monitor] of GX Developer .

1 Specify "5" as the No. of requested tag (Buffer memory

address: 1290) with [Buffer memory batch monitor] of
GX Developer.

2 Check that "5" is stored as the No. of stored tag (Buffer

memory address: 1291).

3 Check that the Update count (Buffer memory address:

1292) is updated.

4 Check that the No. of components for tag No. 5 is

stored in the No. of components (Buffer memory
address: 1293).

5 Check that the tag component value is stored in the

Current tag data value (Buffer memory address: 1300
to the address required for the No. of components).

3 - 27 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.8 Current tag data value area
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
(5) Current tag data value (Buffer memory address: 1300 to 1811)

OVERVIEW
(a) The current values of the tag components whose No. is specified with the No. of
requested tag (Buffer memory address: 1290) are stored.

(b) Two words are assigned per tag component. 2

1300 Current value of

CONFIGURATION
1301 tag component 1
1302 Current value of
1303 tag component 2

SYSTEM
1810 Current value of
3
1811 tag component 256
Figure 3.12 Current tag data value area

SPECIFICATIONS
(c) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type for the tag component.

Upper word Lower word

Single precision: Current value
0
4
Double precision: Current value

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Floating point: Current value

4th character 3rd character 2nd character 1st character *1

Character string:

bit: 0 0/1
5

INSTALLATION AND
Figure 3.13 Data type of tag component

UNINSTALLATION
*1 Only the first four characters are stored.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.8 Current tag data value area
3 - 28
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.6.9 Access target CPU setting status area

(1) Access target CPU setting information (Buffer memory address: 4000 to 4003)
(a) The information on whether [Access target CPU settings] have been made or not
is stored.

(b) The bit corresponding to the preset Access target CPU setting No. is turned ON.
0: Not set
1: Set

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Buffer memory address: 4000 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4001 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
4002 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
4003 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Figure 3.14 Access target CPU setting information area

(2) Access target CPU error information (Buffer memory address: 4004 to 4007)
(a) The access target CPU error information is stored.

(b) The bit corresponding to the Access target CPU setting number for which the
Access target CPU error has occurred is turned ON.
0: No Access target CPU error
1: Access target CPU error occurred

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Buffer memory address: 4004 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4005 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
4006 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
4007 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Figure 3.15 Access target CPU error information area

(c) The following results when the Access target CPU error occurs.
(Example) When an error occurred in the access target CPU for Access target
CPU setting No. 16
• Access target CPU error (X16) is turned ON.
• Access target CPU error information area (Buffer memory address: 4004 (bit
15)) is turned ON.
• The error code is stored in the Access target CPU 16, error code area (Buffer
memory address: 4023).

(3) Access target CPU 1 to 64, error codes (Buffer memory address: 4008 to
4071)
The error code showing the error contents is stored in the corresponding area of
access target CPU setting number for which the Access target CPU error has
occurred.
For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 10.2 Error Code List

3 - 29 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.9 Access target CPU setting status area
3 SPECIFICATIONS

1
3.6.10 Information linkage function area

OVERVIEW
(1) "Time synchronization" setting status (Buffer memory address: 11500)
(a) The setting status of [Time synchronization setting] is stored.
For [Time synchronization setting], refer to the following.
2
Section 7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting
0: [Synchronize with PLC CPU time]

CONFIGURATION
1: [Synchronize with SNTP]

SYSTEM
(b) When selecting [Synchronize with SNTP] in [Time synchronization setting]
This area is set when the time information was obtained from the SNTP server
computer.
3
If the time information could not be obtained from the SNTP server computer, this
area is not set since the operation for when [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] is

SPECIFICATIONS
selected is performed (Time is synchronized with the PLC CPU).

(2) SNTP time query result (Buffer memory address: 11501 to 11507)
When [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected in [Time synchronization setting], the time
information obtained from the SNTP server is stored. 4
Table 3.19 SNTP time query result

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Address

OPERATION
Name Description Setting side
(Decimal)
11501 SNTP time query result (Year) The four-digit year data is stored.
SNTP time query result
11502 The month data, 01 to 12, is stored.
(Month) 5
11503 SNTP time query result (Day) The day data, 01 to 31, is stored.

INSTALLATION AND
11504 SNTP time query result (Hour) The hour data, 00 to 23, is stored.

UNINSTALLATION
SNTP time query result
11505 The minute data, 00 to 59, is stored. Set on system
(Minute)
side
SNTP time query result
11506 The second data, 00 to 59, is stored.
(Second)
The day of the week data is stored.
SNTP time query result (Day of 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 6
11507
the week) 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday
6: Saturday

FUNCTIONS
(3) Monitoring interval timeout count (Buffer memory address: 11510)
The cumulative number of times that a monitoring interval timeout has occurred is
stored. 7
The monitoring interval timeout occurs when trigger detection has not been completed
CONFIGURATION TOOL

within the monitoring interval.

MES INTERFACE

If this timeout occurs, perform the following:

FUNCTION

• Increase the monitoring interval

Increase the sampling interval of the tag that is used for trigger conditions.
• Reduce the trigger detection time.
Reduce the number of configured jobs. 8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.10 Information linkage function area
3 - 30
 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(4) No. of trigger buffer data (Buffer memory address: 11511)

The number of times the current trigger buffer has been used is stored.
If the number of times the trigger buffer has been used is always large, check the
number of jobs for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled and the trigger condition
setting. ( Section 7.10 Job Setting)

(5) Trigger buffer overflow count (Buffer memory address: 11512)

The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows is stored.
If the trigger buffer overflows frequently, check the number of jobs for which [Trigger
buffering] is enabled and the trigger condition setting. ( Section 7.10 Job Setting)

(6) Trigger buffer overflow counts for Jobs 1 to 64 (Buffer memory address: 11520
to 11583)
The cumulative number of trigger buffer overflows for each job is stored.

3 - 31 3.6 Buffer Memory Details

3.6.10 Information linkage function area
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the settings and procedure to operate the MES interface module in a
system.
2
Point
(1) Before use, make sure to read SAFETY PRECAUTIONS at the beginning of

CONFIGURATION
this manual.
(2) The mounting and installation environment of the MES interface module are

SYSTEM
the same as those of a PLC CPU.
For details, refer to the following manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Handling Precautions

This section explains the precautions for handling the MES interface module itself.
4
(1) Do not drop or apply severe shock to the module case since it is made of
resin.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
(2) Tighten the module fixing screws within the specified torque range as follows:

Table 4.1 Tightening torque

Screw Tightening torque range
5
Module fixing screw (usually not required) (M3 screw)*1 0.36 to 0.48 N·m

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
*1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module.
However, it is recommended to secure the module with the module mounting screw if the module
is subject to significant vibration or shock.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.1 Handling Precautions 4-1

 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

4.2 Settings and Procedure to Operation

This section explains the schematic procedure up to operation for using the MES interface
function.

(1) Starting the server computer

Point
Start the server computer, and then the MES interface module.
(2) Starting the MES interface module

Procedure to operation

Server computer/SNTP server computer

Database server computer *1 Application server computer *2 SNTP server computer *3

Start the SNTP server.

Install the relational database Create a user program.

and design the table.

Set ODBC for the database. Create an account for user program
execution. *4
Section 8.2 Setting ODBC to the
Database

Install DB Connection Service and DB Install DB Connection Service and DB

Connection Service Setting Tool. Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 5.1 Installation Section 5.1 Installation

Change the settings of DB Connection Change the settings of DB Connection

Service. Service.
Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool Connection Service Setting Tool

Operation
Figure 4.1 Server computer start-up procedure

*1 Be sure to make the settings to use the DB interface function.

Section 6.1 DB Interface Function
*2 Make the settings when using the program execution function.
Section 6.1.8 Program execution function
*3 Start it when using the SNTP server computer time with time synchronization function.
Section 6.3 Time Synchronization Function
*4 Log on to the application server computer with the created account for user program execution
once before using the program execution function.
When using the application server computer to which the program execution function is set, log on
with an account other than the created account for user program execution.

4-2 4.2 Settings and Procedure to Operation

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
(2) Starting the MES interface module

OVERVIEW
Point
Start the server computer, and then the MES interface module.
(1) Starting the server computer 2

CONFIGURATION
Procedure to operation

SYSTEM
MES interface module *1 Configuration computer
3
Install MES Interface Configuration Tool.

SPECIFICATIONS
Section 5.1 Installation

Mount a battery to the MES interface module. *2

Mount the MES interface module to a base unit. 4

Connect the MES interface module to the configuration computer on a 1:1 basis. *3

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Section 2.1.3 System configuration for initial setup

Power ON the PLC.

RUN LED is turned ON and ERR. LED flashes on the
MES interface module. 5

INSTALLATION AND
Install a CompactFlash card to the MES interface

UNINSTALLATION
module. *4

Start MES Interface Configuration Tool.

Confirm the outline of MES Interface Configuration Tool.
• Section 7.2 Starting the MES Interface
Function Configuration Tool
• Section 7.3 Screen Structure
6
• Section 7.4 Project File Handling

Format the CompactFlash card.

FUNCTIONS
Section 7.13.8 Formatting the CompactFlash card

Select [System setting] and make [Network setting]. 7

CONFIGURATION TOOL

Section 7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting

MES INTERFACE

Set the target MES interface module.

FUNCTION

Write a project to the MES interface module.

• Section 7.12.1 Setting the target MES interface
module
• Section 7.12.2 Writing the MES interface 8
function settings
Power OFF the PLC.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

(To the next page) (To the next page)

Figure 4.2 MES interface module start-up procedure

4.2 Settings and Procedure to Operation 4-3

 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

(From the previous page) (From the previous page)

MES interface module Configuration computer

According to [Network setting], connect the MES interface module and configuration computer to a network.

Section 2.1.4 System configuration for operation

Power ON the PLC.

Check communications with the MES interface module by
executing the PING command in the command prompt
screen. *5

Configure the settings in MES Interface Configuration

Tool for the MES interface function.
• Chapter 6 FUNCTIONS
• Section 7.6 System Setting
• Section 7.7 Access Target CPU Setting
• Section 7.8 Device Tag Setting
• Section 7.9 Server Service Setting

When changing
the settings

Set the target MES interface module.

Write the project to the MES interface module.
• Section 7.12.1 Setting the target MES interface
module
• Section 7.12.2 Writing the MES interface
function settings

Operation

Figure 4.2 MES interface module start-up procedure

*1 As necessary, execute the self-diagnostic test for checking the communication function and
hardware of the MES interface module.
Section 4.6 Self-diagnostics Test
*2 For a battery, refer to the following:
Section 4.8 Battery
Section 4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery
Section 4.10 Removing Battery for Storage
*3 If an account is forgotten and therefore connection to the MES interface module cannot be made,
eject the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module, then follow the procedure in the
figure above *3 and subsequent procedure.
For details on how to eject the CompactFlash card, refer to the following.
Section 4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
*4 For details on how to insert/eject the CompactFlash card and precautions for use, refer to the
following.
Section 4.7 CompactFlash Card
*5 When the test has been completed abnormally, check the following and execute the PING
command again.
• Network settings for the MES interface module or configuration computer
• Connection status of the MES interface module or configuration computer

4-4 4.2 Settings and Procedure to Operation

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.3 Parts Names

OVERVIEW
This section explains the parts names of the MES interface module.

(1) With the LED cover closed

2
QJ71MES96

CONFIGURATION
RUN
ERR. 1)

SYSTEM
PULL

CF CARD

10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

100
M 1) 3
2)
SD/
RD

SPECIFICATIONS
4
QJ71MES96

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 4.3 With the LED cover closed

(2) With the LED cover open

5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
3)

PULL

4)
CF CARD

10BASE-T/
6
100BASE-TX
5) 100
M

SD/

FUNCTIONS
RD

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

QJ71MES96

6)
7)

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Figure 4.4 With the LED cover open

SERVICE AND

4.3 Parts Names 4-5

 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

Table 4.2 Parts names

Name Description
1) Indicator LED Refer to (3) Indicator LED display contents.
Used for connecting the MES interface module in 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connection.
2)
interface connector (RJ45) (The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE-T from 100BASE-TX
depending on the device on other end.)
3) EJECT button Used for ejecting a CompactFlash card from the MES interface module.
4) CompactFlash card slot Used for installing a CompactFlash card to the MES interface module.
5) CompactFlash card slot cover Cover for the CompactFlash card slot
6) Battery Battery for file protection
Connector pin for battery lead
7) Battery connector pin (The battery lead is disconnected from the connector at shipment to prevent
battery consumption.)

(3) Indicator LED display contents

10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
QJ71MES96 100
RUN M
ERR.

SD/
RD

Figure 4.5 LED display

Table 4.3 LED display

Name LED status Description
In normal operation
ON (It may take some time until the RUN LED is turned ON after the module is
RUN
started.)
OFF Watchdog timer error (Hardware error)
OFF In normal status
ERR. ON Module continuation error
Flash Module stop error
ON 100 Mbps
100 M
OFF 10 Mbps
ON During data send or data receive
SD/RD
OFF Data not transmitted

4-6 4.3 Parts Names

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.4 Wiring

OVERVIEW
4.4.1 Wiring

This section explains how to connect cables to the MES interface module.
2

CONFIGURATION
HUB

SYSTEM
MES interface module
QJ71MES96
RUN
ERR.

PULL

CF CARD
3
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

100
M

Intranet

SPECIFICATIONS
SD/
RD

Twisted pair cable

(Straight)
QJ71MES96

Figure 4.6 Wiring

4

PROCEDURE TO
Point

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
For the equipment required for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connection and system
configuration examples, refer to the following.
Section 2.1.4 System configuration for operation
Section 2.3 Connection System Equipment 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
4.4.2 Wiring precautions

To establish a reliable system and fully utilize the MES interface module functions, make
wiring so that noise effect can be reduced. 6
(1) Sufficient safety measures must be taken when constructing the 100BASE-TX
and 10BASE-T networks. FUNCTIONS
Consult a specialist when connecting connection cable terminals, installing
main line cables, etc.
7
(2) Use a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connection cable compliant with the following
CONFIGURATION TOOL

standards.
MES INTERFACE

Section 2.3 Connection System Equipment

FUNCTION

(3) The bending radius near the connector should be at least four times longer
than the cable's outside diameter. 8
(4) Connect the device on other end according to its specifications.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.4 Wiring
4.4.1 Wiring
4-7
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings

The intelligent function module switches are used to make the mode setting, default
operation setting, battery error detection setting, and response monitoring time setting.

1 Select [Project] window [Parameter] [PLC parameter] [I/O assignment] tab

of GX Developer.

2 The [I/O assignment] tab is displayed.

Set the following items for the slot to which the MES interface module is mounted,
then click the Switch setting button.

Figure 4.7 [I/O assignment] tab

Table 4.4 [I/O assignment] tab setting items

Item Description
Type Select "Intelli.".
Model name Enter the model name of the module.
Points Select 32 points.
StartXY Enter the MES interface module head I/O number.
Detailed setting For a multiple CPU system, specify the control CPU of the MES interface module.

3 Clicking the Switch setting button displays the [Switch setting for I/O and intelligent
function module] dialog box.
Make the setting with referring to the following descriptions.
Selecting HEX in Input format facilitates the input.
After completing the setting, click the End button.

Figure 4.8 [Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] dialog box

4-8 4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
Table 4.5 Setting items of the [Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] dialog box
Switch number Description

OVERVIEW
Switch 1 Mode setting
Switch 2 Default operation setting/battery error detection setting
Switch 3 (Lower byte) Response monitoring time setting
Switch 4 to 5 For system use (Do not set.) 2
(1) Mode setting (Switch 1)

CONFIGURATION
Select the MES interface module operation mode.

SYSTEM
Table 4.6 Mode setting (Switch 1) setting items
Setting
Item Description
number 3
0000h Online Normal operation mode
Tests the ROM/RAM/intelligent function module switch settings.

SPECIFICATIONS
0001h Hardware test
( Section 4.6.2 Hardware test)
Executes the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface self-diagnostics
0002h Self-loopback test
test. ( Section 4.6.1 Self-loopback test)

(2) Default operation setting/battery error detection setting (Switch 2) 4

Select the default operation setting/battery error detection setting for the MES
interface module.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
b15 b3 b2 b1 b0
Specify "0". * Switch 2

Battery error detection setting Default operation setting [Account setting] 5

0: Detects battery errors. 0: Operates according to [Account setting].

INSTALLATION AND
1: Does not detect battery errors. 1: Operates according to the default.

UNINSTALLATION
User name :QJ71MES96
Password :MITSUBISHI

Default operation setting [Network setting]

0: Operates according to [Network setting].

* When other than 0 is specified in this area,

1: Operates according to the default.
IP ADDRESS:192.168.3.3
6
"Switch setting error" (0180h) occurs at hardware test. Subnet mask:255.255.255.0

Figure 4.9 Default operation setting/battery error detection setting (Switch 2)

FUNCTIONS
(a) Default operation setting (bit 0, 1)
Set whether to operate [Account setting] and [Network settings] with their default.
1) [Account setting] (bit 0)
0: Operates according to [Account setting].
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

1: Operates according to the default.

MES INTERFACE

2) [Network settings] (bit 1)

FUNCTION

0: Operates according to [Network settings].

1: Operates according to the default.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings 4-9

 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

Point
Use the default operation setting when changing the settings of the MES interface
module connected to the configuration computer on a 1:1 basis.

(b) Battery error detection setting (bit 2)

Set whether to detect battery errors while the MES interface module is operating
without battery. ( Section 4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery)
0: Detects battery errors.
1: Does not detect battery errors.

(3) Response monitoring time setting (Switch 3 (Lower byte))

Set the timeout time (Second) from when the MES interface module sends a request
to the access target CPU until receiving the reply.
A response time-out error (0002h) occurs if the access target CPU does not respond
within the set time.

Setting range: 15 to 255 (Second) (Default value: 15 seconds)

When setting the time between 0 and 14 or making no settings, response monitoring
time operates with 15 seconds.

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(Upper byte)* (Lower byte) Switch 3

Specify "0". Response monitoring time setting

15 to 255 (Second)
*The upper byte data is ignored. However, when other than 0 is specified When setting the time between 0
in this area, "Switch setting error" (0180h) occurs at hardware test. and 14 or making no settings,
response monitoring time operates
with 15 seconds.

Figure 4.10 Response monitoring time setting (Switch 3 (Lower byte))

Point
After Write to PLC is executed, the intelligent function module switch settings are
enabled when turning the power ON from OFF, or resetting the PLC CPU.

Remark
For GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Operating Manual

4 - 10 4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.6 Self-diagnostics Test

OVERVIEW
This section explains the self-diagnostics test designed for checking the MES interface
module communication function and hardware.

4.6.1 Self-loopback test 2

CONFIGURATION
Execute the self-loopback test for a hardware check including the communication function
of the MES interface module (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface).

SYSTEM
(1) MES interface module operation mode setting

1 In [Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] of GX Developer, set
3
"Mode setting" to "Self-loopback test". (Switch 1: 0002h)

SPECIFICATIONS
2 Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents
used.

(2) Self-loopback test execution 4

1 If a cable has been connected to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface,

PROCEDURE TO
disconnect it.

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
2 Set the PLC CPU to STOP status.

3 Reset the PLC CPU.

5
4 After the PLC CPU is reset, the following self-loopback test is executed

INSTALLATION AND
automatically.

UNINSTALLATION
1) Self-loopback check
This test checks whether data can be sent to/received from in the MES
interface module.
During the test, the ERR. LED flashes.
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.6 Self-diagnostics Test

4.6.1 Self-loopback test
4 - 11
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

(3) Confirmation of the self-loopback test result

1 Check the ERR. LED status to see the self-loopback test result.

Table 4.7 Self-loopback test result

ERR. LED status Self-loopback test result
OFF Completed
ON Failed

2 When the test is completed normally, set the "Mode setting" to "Online" with
[Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] of GX Developer and reset
the PLC CPU. (Switch 1: 0000h)

3 When the test has failed, conduct the self-loopback test again.
If an error occurs again, a possible cause is the hardware error of the MES
interface module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

4 - 12 4.6 Self-diagnostics Test

4.6.1 Self-loopback test
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.6.2 Hardware test

OVERVIEW
Test ROM/RAM/intelligent function module switch settings for the MES interface module.

(1) MES interface module operation mode setting

2
1 In [Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] of GX Developer, set
"Mode setting" to "Hardware test". (Switch 1: 0001h)

CONFIGURATION
2 Match the other intelligent function module switch settings to the setting contents

SYSTEM
used.

(2) Hardware test execution 3

1 Set the PLC CPU to STOP status.

SPECIFICATIONS
2 Reset the PLC CPU.

3 After the PLC CPU is reset, the following hardware tests are executed
automatically.
During the test, the ERR. LED flashes. 4
1) ROM check

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Reads the ROM data and checks the sum.

OPERATION
2) RAM check
Reads the test data written to the RAM and checks the consistency.
3) Switch setting check
5
Checks that the intelligent function module switch settings are set within the
allowable range.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
However, the Switch 1 "Mode setting" is not tested.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.6 Self-diagnostics Test

4.6.2 Hardware test
4 - 13
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

(3) Confirmation of hardware test result

1 Check the ERR. LED status to see the hardware test result.

Table 4.8 Hardware test result

ERR. LED status Hardware test result
OFF Completed
ON Failed

2 When the test is completed normally, set the "Mode setting" to "Online" with
[Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module] of GX Developer and reset
the PLC CPU. (Switch 1: 0000h)

3 If the test is completed abnormally, check the error contents with the error
information of [System monitor]. ( Section 10.1.3 System monitor)
Eliminate the error cause, then conduct the hardware test again.
If an error occurs again, a possible cause is the hardware error of the MES
interface module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

4 - 14 4.6 Self-diagnostics Test

4.6.2 Hardware test
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.7 CompactFlash Card

OVERVIEW
4.7.1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card

This section explains the precautions for using the CompactFlash card.
2
(1) When removing or replacing the CompactFlash card

CONFIGURATION
(a) Be sure to stop file access before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card.

SYSTEM
( Section 4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card)

(b) Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being
accessed or a file system error. 3
(c) If an error occurs in the CompactFlash card, restore the card.

SPECIFICATIONS
(2) CompactFlash card diagnostic time
The MES interface module diagnoses (such as file restoration) the installed
CompactFlash card when:
1) Powering ON the PLC from OFF or resetting the PLC CPU
4
2) Installing the CompactFlash card during power-on

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
(3) About a CompactFlash card format
(a) For the CompactFlash card format, use the formatting function of MES Interface
Function Configuration Tool. 5
( Section 7.13.8 Formatting the CompactFlash card)

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
(b) Do not format the CompactFlash card with Windows XP/2000.
If doing so by mistake, restore the card according to the CompactFlash card
manual.

(4) About a CompactFlash card file 6

User-original files cannot be stored to the CompactFlash card installed to the MES
interface module.
If the user-original files are stored in the card, the characters in directories or files may FUNCTIONS
be corrupted or deleted.

(5) Service life of CompactFlash card 7

A CompactFlash card has a service life (restriction on the number of writes).
CONFIGURATION TOOL

For details, refer to the specifications of each product.

MES INTERFACE

Generally, the service life of a CompactFlash card is dependant on its free space.
FUNCTION

Therefore, set an appropriate value to the user-settable DB buffering capacity so that

a sufficient free space will be ensured on the CompactFlash card.
Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.1 Precautions for using a CompactFlash card
4 - 15
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

Remark
When powering a PLC OFF while data are being written to the CompactFlash
card, the writing may not be completed.
However, because the MES interface module automatically restores files when
powered ON again, usually it can be powered OFF without performing the file
access stop.

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card

This section explains how to install/remove the CompactFlash card.

<Installation of the CompactFlash card>

Installation of a CompactFlash card

Install the CompactFlash card.

(2) Installation of the CompactFlash card

NO
Is the PLC power ON? Power ON the PLC.

YES

Check that the CompactFlash card is fully inserted to the

MES interface module.
(Turning CompactFlash card status (X1) ON indicates
correct installation.)

End

Figure 4.11 Installation of the CompactFlash card

4 - 16 4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
Before removing or replacing the CompactFlash card, be sure to stop file access by the
following procedure.

OVERVIEW
Removal/replacement of a CompactFlash card

NO 2
Is the PLC power ON? Power ON the PLC.

CONFIGURATION
YES

SYSTEM
Disable the read from/write to the CompactFlash card by
file access stop processing.
(1) Stopping file access

3
Remove the CompactFlash card.
(3) Removing a CompactFlash card

SPECIFICATIONS
Mount a new NO
CompactFlash card?

YES 4
Install a new CompactFlash card.

PROCEDURE TO
(2) Installation of the CompactFlash card

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
NO
Operation restarted?

YES
5

INSTALLATION AND
Turn the power OFF and ON, or reset the PLC CPU to

UNINSTALLATION
restart the MES interface module. Power OFF the PLC.

Check that file access is active by the following:

CompactFlash card status (X1): ON
File access status (X2): OFF
6
End

Figure 4.12 Removal or replacement of the CompactFlash card FUNCTIONS

Point
Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

card being accessed or a file system error.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
4 - 17
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

(1) Stopping file access

1 Stop file access.

• Turn the File access stop request (Y2) ON from OFF.

2 Check the file access stop by the following:

• Check the CompactFlash card status (X1) is OFF.
• Check the File access status (X2) is ON.
• Turn the File access stop request (Y2) OFF from ON.

File access stop request (Y2)

(In operation) (During stop)

File access status (X2)

CompactFlash card status (X1)

Figure 4.13 File access stop processing

(2) Installation of the CompactFlash card

1 Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module, then remove the
CompactFlash card slot cover.

1)

2)

Figure 4.14 CompactFlash card slot cover removal

• Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES
interface module, and lift the LED cover to open.
• Put the finger at the top of the CompactFlash card slot cover and then
remove the cover.

4 - 18 4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
2 Install the CompactFlash card.
When installing the CompactFlash card into the MES interface module, pay

OVERVIEW
attention to the orientation of the card.
Push the CompactFlash card securely into the slot until it is flush with the EJECT
button.
2
LED cover

CONFIGURATION
Tab direction
EJECT button

SYSTEM
PULL

CF CARD
Insert in
Orientation of a
CompactFlash
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

100
M
this direction.
3
card
SD/
RD

SPECIFICATIONS
CompactFlash card
CompactFlash card slot

QJ71MES96

Figure 4.15 Installation of a CompactFlash card

4
3 Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module until it clicks.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
When a CompactFlash card is installed, the CompactFlash card slot cover cannot

OPERATION
be attached to the MES interface module.
Save the removed CompactFlash card slot cover carefully.
4
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
4 - 19
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

(3) Removing a CompactFlash card

1 Open the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module, then remove the
CompactFlash card.

LED cover
EJECT button
EJECT button

Press
PULL

CF CARD
Remove in this
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
direction.
100
M

SD/
RD

CompactFlash card
CompactFlash card slot

QJ71MES96

Figure 4.16 CompactFlash card removal

• Put the finger at the bottom of the LED cover that is on the front of the MES
interface module, and lift the LED cover to open.
• When ejecting the CompactFlash card from the MES interface module, press
the EJECT button to push the CompactFlash card out.

2 Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover and close the LED cover on the front of
the MES interface module.
• Attach the CompactFlash card slot cover.
When the CompactFlash card is not installed, attach the CompactFlash card
slot cover.
• Lower the LED cover on the front of the MES interface module until it clicks.

4 - 20 4.7 CompactFlash Card

4.7.2 Installation/removing the CompactFlash card
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.8 Battery

OVERVIEW
This section explains the mounting and replacement of the battery.

4.8.1 Battery specifications

2
This section shows the specifications of the MES interface module battery.

CONFIGURATION
Table 4.9 Battery specifications

SYSTEM
Description
Item
Q6BAT
Type Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage 3.0 V 3
Nominal current 1800 mAh
Storage life Actual life of 5 years (Room temperature)

SPECIFICATIONS
Total power failure time Section 4.8.3 Battery replacement
Lithium content 0.49 g
Application File protection

4
4.8.2 Mounting of battery

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
The MES interface module is shipped with the battery connector disconnected. Before

OPERATION
using the MES interface module, connect the battery connector.

Open the cover on the bottom of the 5

MES interface module. Connector

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Check if the battery is correctly
Battery
mounted. Connector fixing

After confirming the insertion direction

is correct, insert the battery connector
6
into the connector pin on the case.

MES interface module

End FUNCTIONS

Figure 4.17 Battery mounting procedure

Point 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

When operating without battery mounted, refer to the following.

MES INTERFACE

Section 4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery

FUNCTION

Not following the procedure may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash
card being accessed or a file system error.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.8 Battery
4.8.1 Battery specifications
4 - 21
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

4.8.3 Battery replacement

This section explains how to replace the MES interface module battery.
The battery of the MES interface module is used for file protection.
If the voltage of the MES interface module battery has dropped, the battery must be
replaced.

(1) Checking the MES interface module for a battery voltage drop

1 Check for a battery voltage drop in the Battery status area (Buffer memory
address: 7).

2 The following results from battery errors.

• "1 (ON)" is written to the Battery status area (Buffer memory address: 7).
• The ERR. LED is turned ON, and ERR. LED status (X10) and Other error
(X1C) are turned ON.
The file contents will not be erased immediately after the battery error
occurrence, but may be erased if the battery error is not recognized.

3 Finish the battery replacement in the total power failure compensation time since
the Battery status area is turned ON is within the specified time.

Y100 is turned ON
at battery error.
Figure 4.18 Checking for a battery voltage drop

(2) MES interface module battery (Q6BAT) life

(a) The following shows the service life of the MES interface module battery.

Table 4.10 Battery life

Battery life
Power-on time
Guaranteed value Guaranteed time after battery
ratio *1 Actual value (TYP)*3
(MIN)*2 error *4
26,000 hours 43,800 hours 1,500 hours
0%
2.96 years 5 years 62 days
37,142 hours 43,800 hours 1,500 hours
30%
4.23 years 5 years 62 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 1,500 hours
50%
5 years 5 years 62 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 1,500 hours
70%
5 years 5 years 62 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 1,500 hours
100%
5 years 5 years 62 days

*1 The power-on time ratio denotes the ratio of power-on time in a day (24 hours).
(If the power is ON for 12 hours and OFF for 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2 The guaranteed value assumes that the storage ambient temperature is between -25 and 75°C
(operating ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C).
*3 The actual value assumes that the storage ambient temperature is 40°C (operating ambient
temperature: 25°C).
*4 In either of the following status, the guaranteed time after power-off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The battery lead wire is broken.

4 - 22 4.8 Battery
4.8.3 Battery replacement
4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
(b) The battery (Q6BAT) life is 5 years when disconnected to the MES interface
module.

OVERVIEW
(c) Even though the data is retained for the specified time after the Battery status
area (Buffer memory address: 7) is turned ON, replace the battery as soon as
possible.
2
However, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the
usage status, even when the battery error has not yet occurred.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Point
If the battery is not replaced after a battery error occurs, data in the CompactFlash
card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may occur. 3

SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Replacement procedure of the MES interface module battery
When the MES interface module battery has been exhausted, replace the battery with
a new one according to the procedure shown below.
The PLC must be powered ON for 10 minutes or more before removing the battery. 4
Even if the battery is removed, the memory is backed up by the capacitor for a while.
However, if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value in the table below,

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
data stored in the memory may be erased. To prevent this, replace the battery quickly.

OPERATION
Table 4.11 Power failure compensation time
Power failure compensation time
3 minutes 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

4.8 Battery
4.8.3 Battery replacement
4 - 23
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

Battery replacement

Power OFF the PLC.

Remove the MES interface module

from the base unit.

Open the MES interface module MES interface

module connector
cover.

Battery
Remove the battery in use from the connector
holder. Q6BAT battery

Insert a new battery into the holder in

the right orientation, and connect the
lead connector to the connector.

Close the MES interface module

MES interface module
cover.

Mount the MES interface module to

the base unit.

Power ON the PLC.

Monitor buffer
OFF
memory address 7 and check
the ON/OFF status.

ON

Battery failure of the MES interface End

module

Figure 4.19 Battery replacement procedure

4 - 24 4.8 Battery
4.8.3 Battery replacement
 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

1
4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery

OVERVIEW
This section explains operation without mounting a battery to the MES interface module.

(1) Shutdown operation required when the PLC is powered OFF while the MES
interface module is operating without battery 2
If the file protection battery is not mounted to the MES interface module, make sure to

CONFIGURATION
perform shutdown operation when the PLC is powered OFF.
When the PLC is powered OFF without mounting the battery, data such as setting

SYSTEM
information and system data may be lost.

(a) Operation procedure 3

1 Stop file access.

SPECIFICATIONS
(Turn the File access stop request (Y2) ON from OFF.)

2 Confirm that file access has stopped.

(Check the File access status (X2) is turned ON.)

3 Power OFF the PLC CPU. 4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
File access stop request (Y2)

(In operation) (During stop)

File access status (X2)
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Power OFF the PLC.
Figure 4.20 Shutdown operation required when the PLC is powered OFF while the MES interface module is operating without battery

Point
If the shutdown operation is not performed before powering OFF a PLC even
6
though the MES interface module is operating without battery, data in the
CompactFlash card being accessed may be corrupted or a file system error may
occur.
FUNCTIONS

(2) Making battery error undetected during operation without battery

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

1 A battery error occurs when the file protection battery is not mounted to the MES
interface module.
MES INTERFACE

• "1 (ON)" is written to the Battery status area (Buffer memory address: 7).
FUNCTION

• The ERR. LED is turned ON, and ERR. LED status (X10) and Other error
(X1C) are turned ON.

2 Battery errors are not detected by turning "ON" the battery error detection setting 8
(Switch 2 (Bit 2)) with intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer.
DB CONNECTION

Refer to the following for the intelligent function module switch settings of GX
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Developer.
Section 4.5 Intelligent Function Module Switch Settings

4.9 Operation without Mounting Battery 4 - 25

 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURE TO OPERATION

4.10 Removing Battery for Storage

When storing the MES interface module without mounting a battery, make sure to perform
the shutdown operation, then power OFF the PLC and remove the battery.

Point
Not doing so may cause the data corruption in the CompactFlash card being
accessed or a file system error.

(a) Operation procedure

1 Mount the PLC CPU and MES interface module on the base unit and power ON
the PLC CPU.

2 Stop file access.

(Turn the File access stop request (Y2) ON from OFF.)

3 Confirm that file access has stopped.

(Check the File access status (X2) is turned ON.)

4 Power OFF the PLC CPU.

5 Remove the battery from the MES interface module.

File access stop request (Y2)

(In operation) (During stop)

File access status (X2)

Power OFF the PLC and remove the battery.

Figure 4.21 Removing battery for storage

4 - 26 4.10 Removing Battery for Storage

 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

1
CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains how to install the execution software of MX MESInterface to each
operating environment and how to uninstall it.
2
5.1 Installation

CONFIGURATION
This section explains how to install MX MESInterface.

SYSTEM
(1) MX MESInterface installation procedure
3
Installation start

SPECIFICATIONS
Execute SETUP.exe.

Select the component to be

installed
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Exit Which software is
to be installed?

DB Connection Service MES Interface 5

and Setting Tool Configuration Tool

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Enter user information. Enter user information.

Enter the product ID. Enter the product ID.

Select the installation destination. Select the installation destination. 6

FUNCTIONS
Installation

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Installation end
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

Figure 5.1 MX MESInterface installation procedure

Point
If a confirmation message for overwriting DLL files is displayed at installation, click 8
the Yes button and overwrite the DLL files.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Not overwriting the DLLs may fail to execute MX MESInterface correctly.

SERVICE AND

5.1 Installation 5-1

 5 SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

(2) MX MESInterface installation

For system configurations, refer to the following:
Section 2.1.2 System configuration for installation

Point
(1) Before installing MX MESInterface, close any other applications running on
Windows .
(2) When installing MX MESInterface, log on as a user with Administrator
authority.

(The following screens are for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating

System.)
(Start)

1 Start Windows Explorer, then click the drive in

which the CD-ROM is loaded.
Double click "SETUP.exe".
To display Windows Explorer, right click [Start],
then select [Explore].

2 The dialog box for selecting the component to be

installed is displayed.
Select the component to be installed with the
radio button, then click the Install button.

1 If the left message appears, click the Cancel

button and after uninstalling MX MESInterface,
install this product.

2 If the left message appears, install this product on

a computer to which the basic software (OS)
compatible with the product is installed.
Section 2.4 Operating Environment

(To the next page)

5-2 5.1 Installation

5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

1
(From the previous page)

3 If the left message appears, execute

OVERVIEW
\EnvMEL\Setup.exe in the CD-ROM for this
product.
4 After executing Setup.exe, install this product.
2
5 If the product is not installed correctly, restart the
computer.

CONFIGURATION
3 The left screen appears. Check that all

SYSTEM
applications have been closed, then click the
OK button.
If any applications are running, close them all.
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4 Setup starts.
The left screen appears. Check the description,
then click the Next > button.
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
5 Enter a user name and company name, then click
the Next > button.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE

(To the next page)

FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

5.1 Installation 5-3

 5 SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

(From the previous page)

6 Check the user name and company name

registered.
If the registration contents are correct, click the
Yes button.
When changing the registration contents, click the
No button to return to the previous screen.

7 Register the product ID.

6 Enter the product ID, then click the Next >
button.
The product ID is shown on the software
registration card that came with the product.

8 Specify the folder for installation destination.

When using the default folder, click the Next >
button.
To change the folder, click the Browse... button,
then specify the drive and folder for installation
destination.

REMARKS
Up to 100 characters including "\MESIF" can be
used for the installation destination. This means
that up to 94 characters can be used when
specifying a destination folder as a directory.
(To the next page)

5-4 5.1 Installation

5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

1
(From the previous page)

OVERVIEW
9 When the left screen appears, installation is
complete.
Click the OK button.
2

CONFIGURATION
10 To restart the computer, check the "Yes, I want to

SYSTEM
restart my computer now." checkbox, then click
the OK button.
To not restart the computer, check the "No, I will
3
restart my computer later." checkbox, then click

SPECIFICATIONS
the OK button.

4
11 The dialog box for selecting the component to be
installed is displayed.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
12 When installing the other software, select the

OPERATION
component to be installed with the radio button,
then click the Install button.

13 When the installation is complete, click the Exit 5

button.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
14

(End)

After installing MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and DB Connection Service 6
Setting Tool, the following icons are registered.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Figure 5.2 Icon registration

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

5.1 Installation 5-5

 5 SINSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

5.2 Uninstallation

This section explains how to uninstall MX MESInterface.

(1) MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, DB Connection Service, and DB

Connection Service Setting Tool
(The following screens are for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating
System.)

(Start)

1 From the Control Panel, select [Add or Remove

Programs] and double click.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].

REMARKS
From the control panel, select [Add/Remove
Applications] and double click.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Setting] [Control Panel].

2 Select the program to be deleted and click the

Change/Remove button.
DB Connection Service and Setting Tool
(MESInterface DBConnector)
MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
(MX MESInterface)
1
2 REMARKS
3 (a) Click [Change or Remove Programs].
4 (b) Select the program to be deleted.
5 (c) Click the Change/Remove button.
(To the next page)

5-6 5.2 Uninstallation

5 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

1
(From the previous page)

OVERVIEW
3 Confirm the file to be deleted.
To uninstall it, click the Yes button.
To not uninstall it, click the No button. 2
Clicking the No button returns to the previous

CONFIGURATION
screen.
• The component indicates the installed icons

SYSTEM
and file.

6 If the left screen appears, click the No to All 3

button.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
4 When the message showing the completion of the
removal is displayed, click the OK button.
5 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS
(End)

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

5.2 Uninstallation 5-7

 6 FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains the MES interface functions of the MES interface module.

Point
The MES interface functions are set using MES Interface Function Configuration
Tool.
Chapter 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

6.1 DB Interface Function

The DB interface function executes access to the database in units of jobs.

6.1.1 DB interface function operation

The operation of the DB interface function is shown below.

PLC CPU MES interface module

Device Tag 1 Job 1
Trigger monitoring *2
Trigger buffering *3 Database server computer

Action *4
D1000 Component Communication action 1 (Update)
Operation action 2
Communication action 3 (Insert)

Executed Database
in order

Communication action 10 (Select)

Program execution *5

*1 DB buffering *6
Execute
file

Application server computer

Figure 6.1 DB interface function operation
*1 Collects tag data. Section 6.1.3 Tag function
*2 Activates a job. Section 6.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
*3 Stores data and trigger times temporarily in the module's internal memory when loads are
concentrated.
Section 6.1.5 Trigger buffering function

6-1 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.1 DB interface function operation
6 FUNCTIONS

1
*4 Accesses the database and performs arithmetic processing.
• Section 6.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
• Section 6.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)

OVERVIEW
*5 Executes programs. Section 6.1.8 Program execution function
*6 Temporarily stores SQL texts in a CompactFlash card when a communication error occurs.
Section 6.1.9 DB buffering function
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.1 DB interface function operation
6-2
 6 FUNCTIONS

6.1.2 Job execution procedure

The following shows the job execution procedure.

Start

Is the MES interface function Stopped

working?
No job is executed while the function is stopped.
Working Activate the MES interface function.
• Section 7.13.1 Checking the operation status of the
MES interface function
• Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the
MES interface function

Disabled
Is the job enabled?

The job is not executed when it is disabled.

Enabled Enable the job.
• Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status
• Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

• Section 6.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
• Section 7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger
conditions

When [Handshake operation] is selected for Trigger

conditions, tag component values are read out from the
PLC CPU.

Is the [Execute Not checked

program before action.] box
checked?

Checked
The program in the application server computer is
executed before execution of the first action.
• Section 6.1.8 Program execution function
• Section 7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution

(To the next page)

Figure 6.2 Job execution procedure

6-3 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.2 Job execution procedure
6 FUNCTIONS

1
(From the previous page)
Executed in order

Actions are executed.

OVERVIEW
Up to 10 actions can set for a job, and they are
executed in order.
• Section 6.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
• Section 6.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action) 2

CONFIGURATION
In Update/Insert actions, substitute or insert values are
committed to database.

SYSTEM
Is the [Execute
Not checked
program after action.]
box checked?
3
Checked
The program in the application server computer is

SPECIFICATIONS
executed after execution of the last action.
• Section 6.1.8 Program execution function
• Section 7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution

If a value was written to a tag component, it is written

to the device data of the PLC CPU.
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Job execution is completed.

OPERATION
End

Figure 6.2 Job execution procedure

5
Point

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
For the case where an error occurs during job execution, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.10 (2) When an error occurs in job execution

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.2 Job execution procedure
6-4
 6 FUNCTIONS

6.1.3 Tag function

The tag function collects device data of the PLC CPUs on the network in units of tags.
By allocating database fields to tag components, the DB interface function enables the
following.
• Database value reading/writing
• Reading/writing of PLC CPU device data specified with tag components
For the tag function setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.8 Device Tag Setting
PLC CPU MES interface module

CPU1 Device Tag name: Process1

Device Component name CPU name Device Data type
Read
D1000 Work_No CPU1 D1000 Single
D2000 Parameter CPU1 D2000 Double
D2001 Write

Figure 6.3 Tag function

Point
For the tags for which [Enhance sampling efficiency] is selected, the tag data can
be read out at high speed when they are collected and when handshake operation
is performed.

6-5 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.3 Tag function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
6.1.4 Trigger monitoring function

OVERVIEW
The trigger monitoring function monitors values such as the time and tag values and, when
the trigger condition changes from false to true (when the condition is met), starts a job.
The following setting options are available as conditions for start.
• [Disable]: Does not start the job by a trigger condition. 2
• [Time specification startup]: Starts the job at the specified time.
• [Specified time period startup]: Starts the job at the specified intervals (Unit:

CONFIGURATION
Seconds).
• [Value monitoring startup]:

SYSTEM
Compares the actual tag component value with the condition value (tag component
value or constant value) at every sampling times, and starts the job when the
condition is met. 3
• [Handshake operation]:

SPECIFICATIONS
Starts the job on request from the PLC CPU.
Completion of job execution can be reported to the PLC CPU.
• [At module startup]:
Starts the job only once when the MES interface module starts up.
Two kinds of conditions can be used in combination for starting a job. 4
For the trigger monitoring function setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Tag

Component
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Value monitoring
startup Job

Time specification
1st of every month, 9:00:00 startup Trigger
Specified time Conditions met Job startup
3600 seconds monitoring
period startup
6
Handshake
operation

FUNCTIONS
ON

OFF

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Figure 6.4 Trigger monitoring function

MES INTERFACE

Point
FUNCTION

If [Value monitoring startup] is selected, the tag component value used for trigger
monitoring and the one used in the started job may be collected at different
timings. 8
To collect these tag component values synchronously, use [Handshake
operation].
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Section7.10.2 (8) Handshake operation

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.4 Trigger monitoring function
6-6
 6 FUNCTIONS

6.1.5 Trigger buffering function

When multiple sets of trigger conditions (conditions for data transmission) are met in a
concentrated manner, their data and trigger times are buffered in the module's internal
memory so that actions (data operation/transmission) can be executed later using the
buffered data.
Even if the frequency of data transmission triggers is high, jobs are executed without
missing any trigger.
To utilize the trigger buffering function, enable [Trigger buffering] at each Job settings.

(1) Trigger buffering function

This section explains the operations of the job for which [Trigger buffering] is enabled.

(a) In a normal case (Trigger interval Processing time for action)

• When trigger conditions are met, tag data and trigger time are stored in the
trigger buffer.
• Based on the information in the trigger buffer, an action is executed
immediately.

[MES interface module]

[Normal case]
Trigger buffer Job 1
Sending
Job 1 data
Trigger Action
conditions met execution Database

Time Time

Figure 6.5 In a normal case

6-7 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.5 Trigger buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
(b) In the case of load concentration (Trigger interval Processing time for action)
• Every time a trigger condition is met, tag data and trigger time are stored in

OVERVIEW
the trigger buffer.
• When action processing is not completed in time, up to 128 pieces of trigger
information are stored in the buffer.
2

CONFIGURATION
[MES interface module]
[When loads are concentrated]

SYSTEM
Trigger buffer Job 1-1) Sending
Job 1-1)
Trigger Job 1-2) Trigger information (tag data, time) Action data
conditions met execution Database
Job 1-2)
Job 3-3) Trigger information (tag data, time)
3
Trigger
conditions met

SPECIFICATIONS
Executes action of Job 1-1), and stores
Job 3-3) trigger information of Job 1-2) and 3-3)
Trigger in the trigger buffer.
conditions met

Time Time

The numbers 1) to 3) show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met. 4
Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database.
Figure 6.6 In the case of load concentration

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(c) When loads are reduced (Trigger interval Processing time for action)

OPERATION
• The information in the trigger buffer are read out sequentially, causing actions
to be executed.
• Since the trigger buffer information that was used for action execution is
cleared, free space is reproduced, enabling new trigger buffering.
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
[MES interface module]
[When loads are reduced]
Trigger buffer Job 1-2) Sending
Action data
execution Database 6
Job 3-3)
Action
execution After completing the action of Job 1-1),
executes actions of Job 1-2) and 3-3) FUNCTIONS
in this order based on the trigger buffer
information.
Time Time

The numbers 1) to 3) show the order in which trigger conditions of respective jobs are met.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Job 1 and 3 are assumed to access the same database.

MES INTERFACE

Figure 6.7 When loads are reduced

FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.5 Trigger buffering function
6-8
 6 FUNCTIONS

Point
(1) For job operations performed when [Trigger buffering] is disabled, refer to the
following:
Section6.1.10 (1) Operation behavior of jobs
(2) Whether a trigger condition changed from false to true or not is determined at
the time of sampling.
Section7.10.2 (6) Value monitoring startup

(2) No. of times data can be stored in the trigger buffer

(a) The trigger buffering function allows up to 128 pieces of trigger information (tag
data, time) to be stored concurrently.
Note that there are no restrictions on the number of bufferings per job.

(b) No. of trigger buffer data can be confirmed by the following:

• No. of trigger buffer data (Buffer memory address: 11511)
• [Online] - [Remote operation] ( Section 7.13 Online - Remote operation)

(c) If a trigger occurs with No. of trigger buffer data already reached 128, it is
discarded.
The number of times the trigger buffer data are discarded can be confirmed in the
Trigger buffer overflow count area (Buffer memory address: 11512).

(3) Clearing the trigger buffer

The following clears the contents of the trigger buffer.
• [Update settings] ( Section7.13.2 (3) Update settings)
• Stop of the MES interface function operation by [MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool] - [Online] - [Remote operation]
( Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface
function)
• Turning the PLC power OFF and ON
• Resetting the PLC CPU

6-9 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.5 Trigger buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
6.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)

OVERVIEW
The SQL text transmission function allows automatic creation of SQL texts, enabling
communications with the database.
The following three types of commands can be selected for the SQL text.
• Select 2
• Update
• Insert

CONFIGURATION
For the SQL text transmission setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action

SYSTEM
(1) Select
Select is used to write a database value to a tag component value area or to store it in
3
the temporary variable area by sending a SQL text to the database.

SPECIFICATIONS
When a value is stored in the temporary variable area, it can be used as a variable for
other actions.

(2) Update and Insert

Update and Insert are used to embed a tag component value or a temporary variable 4
in an SQL text and write the value to the database.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Database server computer

Select
SELECT...
Tag Component
Temporary variable Data 5

INSTALLATION AND
Update

UNINSTALLATION
Tag Component UPDATE...
Temporary variable Data Database
Constant

Insert
Tag Component INSERT...
Temporary variable
Constant
Data 6
Figure 6.8 SQL text transmission (Communication action)

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.6 SQL text transmission (Communication action)
6 - 10
 6 FUNCTIONS

6.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)

The arithmetic processing function performs operations for tag component values.
In this function, up to 20 dyadic operations can be processed per operation action.
By storing an operation result in the temporary variable area, complicated operations are
also executable.
For the arithmetic processing function setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action

An operand is selectable from

tag component, constant and
temporary variable.

Temporary Tag component Tag component

variable Constant Constant

Temporary Tag component Up to 20 dyadic operations

Tag component Constant
variable can be performed for one
operation action.

The result can be Four operations and

assigned to a tag remainder can be specified
component or by corresponding operators.
temporary variable.
Executed in order
Figure 6.9 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)

6.1.8 Program execution function

The program execution function is used for executing programs in the application server
computer before execution of the first action and after execution of the last one in a job.
For the program execution function setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
Programs that can be executed from [Command line] are applicable.

Since program execution is set on the server computer as described below, more
sophisticated data linkage can be realized.

(1) Before executing the first action of the job

By executing programs before the first action of the job, data required for the job can
be produced on the database in advance.

(2) After executing the last action of the job

By executing programs after the last action of the job, data written to the database by
the job can be utilized for programs on the server computer.

6 - 11 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.7 Arithmetic processing function (Operation action)
6 FUNCTIONS

1
6.1.9 DB buffering function

OVERVIEW
(1) DB buffering function
The DB buffering function temporarily stores SQL texts into a CompactFlash card
when they cannot be sent due to network disconnection or failure of the database
server computer. 2
After recovery, the buffered SQL texts are automatically sent to the database. (Manual
operation is also possible.)

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Disconnected

Database 3
INSERT...

SPECIFICATIONS
INSERT...
INSERT...
UPDATE...

PROCEDURE TO
CompactFlash card

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Recovered

Resend
Database
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
INSERT...
INSERT...
INSERT...
UPDATE...
6

CompactFlash card
FUNCTIONS
Figure 6.10 DB buffering function

Point 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(1) To automatically send SQL texts after recovery, irrespective of transmission

sequence, select the auto-resend processing.
MES INTERFACE

(5) (c) Automatically resending data after recovery

FUNCTION

(2) To send SQL texts after recovery, without changing the transmission
sequence, select the manual resend processing.
(5) (d) Manually resending data
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 - 12
 6 FUNCTIONS

(2) Factors for starting DB buffering

The DB buffering is conducted when SQL texts cannot be sent to the database by the
following factors:
• Network disconnection
• Failure of the database server computer
• Failure of the database software

Point
(1) If an error occurs when the sent SQL text is executed on the database, by
some reason such as its incorrectness or inconsistency with the database,
buffering is not performed and an SQL failure log is output on the database
server computer.
Section 8.1 DB Connection Service Functions
(2) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection
or failure of the database server computer, DB buffering is not performed until
the timeout is detected (approx. 10 seconds).
(7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database
Even if a trigger condition is met again during timeout detection, the
corresponding job is not executed.
Section 6.1.10 (1) Operation behavior of jobs

(3) Processing for which the DB buffering is available

Table 6.1 Processing for which the DB buffering is available
Processing DB buffering
Update/Insert action Available
Select action
N/A
Program execution

(4) Setting the DB buffering

Start

Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.

Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting

Set whether to enable or disable the DB buffering for

each job.
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

End

Figure 6.11 DB buffering setting procedure

6 - 13 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
(5) DB buffering operation

OVERVIEW
(a) When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer

Start
2
Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

CONFIGURATION
Section 6.1.2 Job execution procedure

SYSTEM
Were the SQL texts sent Sent
to the database? 3
Sent to the database without being stored in the DB
(2) Factors for starting DB buffering buffer.

SPECIFICATIONS
Not sent

Is the [Enable DB buffering] Not checked

box checked?
When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering DB buffering. 4
Section 6.1.10 Precautions
Checked

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
DB buffering is started.

End 5

INSTALLATION AND
Figure 6.12 When no data are currently stored in the DB buffer

UNINSTALLATION
Point
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer. 6
• Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
• Section 7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering
FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 - 14
 6 FUNCTIONS

(b) When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer

Start

Job execution starts when trigger conditions are met.

Section 6.1.2 Job execution procedure

Yes Is "Manual resend" selected

for the job?

Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

No

Were the SQL texts sent Sent

to the database?
(5) (c) Automatically resending data after
(2) Factors for starting DB buffering recovery
Not sent

Is the [Enable DB buffering] Not checked

box checked?
When disabled, the job execution is canceled without
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering DB buffering.

Checked Section 6.1.10 Precautions

DB buffering is started. *1

End

*1 When accumulated job data currently exist in the DB buffer.

Job setting Auto-resend area in DB buffer
Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Stored in the order
Job 3 (Auto) that trigger conditions Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual) are met. Manual resend area in DB buffer
Job 5 (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)

Figure 6.13 When some data are currently stored in the DB buffer

Point
Check the DB buffer status (No. of bufferings, utilization) and prevent the full
status of the DB buffer.
• Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
• Section 7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering

6 - 15 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
(c) Automatically resending data after recovery

Start

OVERVIEW
Execution of the job with Auto resend setting is started.
1) The job with Auto resend setting is sent to the database
without being buffered. *1 2
In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer,

CONFIGURATION
2) the accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend
setting are sent again. *1

SYSTEM
Is there any job for which Yes
Manual resend is selected? 3
Job with Manual resend setting will not be sent even
3) after recovery.
No

SPECIFICATIONS
(5) (d) Manually resending data

End

*1 Automatically resends job data after recovery. 4

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.

Job setting Auto-resend area in DB buffer Database

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 10_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 2 (Auto) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 3 (Auto) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto) 2) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Job 4 (Manual) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto)
Manual resend area in DB buffer 3)
Job 5 (Manual) 5
Job 6 (Manual) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
・ Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
・
・ Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 10 (Auto)
1)
Figure 6.14 Automatically resending data after recovery

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 - 16
 6 FUNCTIONS

(d) Manually resending data

Start

Execute manual resend of the DB buffer data. After line recovery, retry the manual resend of DB
Resend request from [MES interface function buffer data.
configuration tool] - [Remote operation]
Resend request from the specified tag component in
[Resend DB buffer request]
• Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
• Section 7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering

Were SQL texts sent to Not sent

the database?

(2) Factors for starting DB buffering

Sent
In the order of storing the jobs data in the DB buffer, the
1) accumulated data of the jobs with Auto resend setting
are sent again. *1

If a job with manual resend setting is started during

2) manual resending, its SQL texts are stored in the DB
buffer and then sent to the database. *1

Not completed
Has all the manual resend
processing been completed?

Completed
If a job with manual resend setting is started after
3) completion of manual resend processing, its SQL texts
are sent to the database if it is accessible. *1

Is there any job for which Yes

Auto resend is selected?
Data of the job with Auto Resend setting are sent again
No after recovery.
(5) (c) Automatically resending data after recovery
End

*1 Perform manual resend processing.

The numbers 1) to 3) correspond to those shown in the above.

Job setting Auto-resend area in DB buffer Database

Job 1 (Auto) Job 3_SQL TEXT (Auto) 1) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 2 (Auto) Job 1_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 3 (Auto) Job 2_SQL TEXT (Auto) Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 4 (Manual) Job 10_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Manual resend area in DB buffer
Job 5 (Manual) Job 11_SQL TEXT (Manual)
Job 6 (Manual) Job 6_SQL TEXT (Manual)
・ Job 4_SQL TEXT (Manual)
・ Job 5_SQL TEXT (Manual)
・
2)
Job 10 (Manual)
Job 11 (Manual)
3)
Figure 6.15 Manually resending data

6 - 17 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

Point
If any of the jobs for which manual resend is selected exists in the DB buffer, it

OVERVIEW
remains there after recovery until manual resend is executed.

2
(6) Clearing the DB buffer
The DB buffer is cleared by the following:

CONFIGURATION
• After writing the MES interface function setting to the MES interface module,

SYSTEM
performing [Update settings], powering OFF and then ON, or resetting the PLC
CPU
Section 7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings 3
• Clear request from [MES interface function configuration tool] - [Remote
operation]

SPECIFICATIONS
Section 7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering
• Clear request from [Clear DB buffer request] of the specified tag component
Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting

(7) When SQL texts cannot be sent to the database

4
(a) When auto-resend is selected for the job

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
1 If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or
failure of the database server computer, DB buffering will start upon detection of
the timeout (approx. 10 seconds).
5
2 After DB buffering is started, whether SQL texts can be sent to the database or

INSTALLATION AND
not is checked every time each job is activated.

UNINSTALLATION
3 When the network or database server computer has not been recovered from the
failure, DB buffering is executed after detection of the timeout (approx. 10
seconds).
6
Recovery from network
disconnection

Job startup Job startup Job startup FUNCTIONS

After sending
SQL texts,
After sending
SQL texts,
Sending SQL
texts
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

timeout detected timeout detected

(approx. 10s) (approx. 10s)
MES INTERFACE

DB buffering DB buffering Auto-resending

executed executed DB buffer data
FUNCTION

Figure 6.16 When auto-send is selected for the job

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 - 18
 6 FUNCTIONS

(b) When manual resend is selected for the job

1 If SQL texts cannot be sent to the database due to network disconnection or

failure of the database server computer, DB buffering will start upon detection of
the timeout (approx. 10 seconds).

2 After started, DB buffering is performed without checking whether SQL texts can
be sent to the database or not for each job activation.

3 The data stored in the DB buffer are resend when manual resend is executed.

Recovery from network

disconnection

Job startup Job startup Manual resend

operation

After sending
SQL texts,
timeout detected
(approx. 10s) DB buffering DB buffering Resending DB
executed executed buffer data
Figure 6.17 When manual resend is selected for the job

6 - 19 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.9 DB buffering function
6 FUNCTIONS

1
6.1.10 Precautions

OVERVIEW
(1) Operation behavior of jobs
(a) When a trigger condition for a job is met again during execution of the job
1) When [Trigger buffering] is disabled for the job 2
Because the job is being executed, it is not executed again.

CONFIGURATION
Condition value

SYSTEM
Tag component value
Sampling
interval
3
Job startup Job startup Job startup

SPECIFICATIONS
Job execution Job execution Job execution

Another job is not executed during job execution.

Figure 6.18 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to [Value monitoring startup]

4
2) When [Trigger buffering] is enabled for the job
The trigger information is stored in the trigger buffer, and after completion of

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
the current job execution, the job is executed based on the trigger information.

OPERATION
Condition value
5
Tag component value

INSTALLATION AND
Sampling

UNINSTALLATION
interval

Trigger information 2)
3) Trigger buffer
4)
Job Job Job Job Job 6
startup startup startup startup startup
Job execution 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Figure 6.19 When trigger condition is met again during execution of the job set to [Value monitoring startup]
FUNCTIONS

(b) When trigger conditions for multiple jobs are met concurrently
• Up to three jobs can start their executions concurrently in the order in [Job 7
settings].
CONFIGURATION TOOL

• After completion of these jobs, executions of the other jobs are started
MES INTERFACE

sequentially.
FUNCTION

Note that, if a job uses the same item in [Server service settings] that is
currently used for another job, the job is not executed until another job
execution is completed.
8
(c) Monitoring interval timeout
Depending on the number of set jobs or the trigger condition setting, the
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

monitoring interval timeout may occur.

6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.10 Precautions
6 - 20
 6 FUNCTIONS

(2) When an error occurs in job execution

(a) The job execution is canceled when the error cause is the following:
• Failure in device data writing due to network disconnection within the PLC
system
• Failure in device data writing, or an operation error
• Failure in access to database (except for jobs for which DB buffering is
enabled)
Section 6.1.9 DB buffering function
• When statistic processing of [Moving average], [Moving maximum] or [Moving
minimum] is specified for a tag component, sampling for the specified number
of times is not complete.
• Failure in program execution

(b) If a job execution is canceled, the operation processed before the error
occurrence returns to the status before the job execution.

Remark
The following explains access to device data in the PLC CPU and to the data-
base.
(1) Device data in the PLC CPU
Since all of data are written to the device data area in the PLC CPU at a time
upon completion of job execution, any change due to the error is not reflected
in the device data of the PLC CPU.
(2) Database
Rollback is executed assuming the time immediately before job activation as
a commit point.

(c) When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] has been
selected, a value is assigned to the specified tag component.
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

6 - 21 6.1 DB Interface Function

6.1.10 Precautions
6 FUNCTIONS

1
6.2 XML Processing Function

OVERVIEW
The XML processing function is a function by which execution of XML format message
requests from user applications can be processed.
The XML processing function allows the following instructions for job execution.
• One-shot execution of a job 2
• Validating a job (The job is executed when the trigger conditions are met.)
• Invalidating a job (The job is not executed even if the trigger conditions are met.)

CONFIGURATION
For the XML message format, refer to the following:

SYSTEM
Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

Application server computer

3

SPECIFICATIONS
Job
Request message
Job startup XML processing XML User application
function
Response message 4
Figure 6.20 XML processing function

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

6.2 XML Processing Function 6 - 22

 6 FUNCTIONS

6.3 Time Synchronization Function

The time synchronization function adjusts the time of the MES interface module to be
synchronized with the time of the SNTP server computer or a PLC CPU (No.1 CPU in the
multiple CPU system) on the network. Time information is utilized for job start conditions or
in send data to the database.
For the time synchronization function setting, refer to the following:
Section 7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting

6.3.1 Using the SNTP time query result in the PLC CPU

By using the SNTP time query timing (XB) and the SNTP time query result area (buffer
memory address: 11501 to 11507), the time information acquired from the SNTP server
computer can be utilized in the PLC CPU.

(1) Program examples

The following are program examples where, when M0 turns ON, the time of the PLC
CPU is set at the SNTP time query timing (XB: ON).
• When the head I/O No. of the MES interface module is "0000", it indicates that
the module is installed in slot 0 of the main base unit.
• A time error in these programs shall be equal to two scan times or less.

Figure 6.21 Program example (1)

Figure 6.22 Program example (2)

6 - 23 6.3 Time Synchronization Function

6.3.1 Using the SNTP time query result in the PLC CPU
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
CHAPTER 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

OVERVIEW
This chapter explains the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool.

7.1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 2

CONFIGURATION
The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is used to configure various settings
required for the MES interface function in the MES interface module.

SYSTEM
In addition to the configuration, the MES interface function offers features such as the
operation status check, working log check, or stop/restart operation.

3
7.2 Starting the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool

SPECIFICATIONS
1 Select Microsoft Windows [Start] [All Programs] [MELSOFT Application]
[MES interface function configuration tool].

2 The MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is activated. 4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Point

OPERATION
Up to five MES Interface Function Configuration Tools can be started.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.1 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool 7-1

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.3 Screen Structure

This section explains the screen structure of the MES Interface Function Configuration
Tool.

7.3.1 Screen structure

Toolbar
Menu
Section 7.3.3
Section 7.3.2 Menu
Toolbar
configuration configuration
Edit items tree
Section 7.3.4
Operations using
the Edit items tree

Detailed setting
edit screen

Status bar

Figure 7.1 Screen structure

Remark
The column width of the tables can be adjusted in the MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool.
To adjust the width, drag the right boundary line of the column.
When only a part of a long item name is displayed, this adjustment is useful.

Figure 7.2 Table column width adjustment

7-2 7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.1 Screen structure
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.3.2 Menu configuration

OVERVIEW
This section shows each command provided on the menu bar.

(1) Project
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.3 Project menu

Table 7.1 Project menu items

4
Reference
Item Description

PROCEDURE TO
section

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
New Creates a new project. Section 7.4.1
Open Retrieves an existing project. Section 7.4.2
Save Overwrites and saves the current project. Section 7.4.3
Save As Saves the current project under a new file name. Section 7.4.3 5
Project file Imports an existing project. Section 7.4.4

INSTALLATION AND
Import

UNINSTALLATION
CSV Files Imports an existing CSV file. Section 7.4.5
Export CSV Files Exports the current project settings to a CSV file. Section 7.4.6
Recent Files Select a file recently used in MES Interface Function Configuration Tool to open it. —
Exit Terminates the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool. —
6
(2) Edit

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Figure 7.4 Edit menu

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

Table 7.2 Edit menu items

Reference
Item Description
section
Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree. 8
Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree. Section 7.3.4
DB CONNECTION

Replicate item Copies the item selected in the Edit items tree and adds it.
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.2 Menu configuration
7-3
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(3) View

Figure 7.5 View menu

Table 7.3 View menu items

Reference
Item Description
section
Toolbar Select whether to show or hide the toolbar.
—
Status bar Select whether to show or hide the status bar.

(4) Online

Figure 7.6 Online menu

Table 7.4 Online menu items

Reference
Item Description
section
Transfer setup Set the target MES interface module. Section 7.12.1

Write Writes the MES interface function settings (project) to the MES interface module. Section 7.12.2

Reads the MES interface function settings (project) from the MES interface
Read Section 7.12.3
module.
Compares the MES interface function settings in the MES interface module with
Verify Section 7.12.4
those in the current project.
Displays or changes the operation status of the MES interface module, or formats
Remote operation Section 7.13
a CompactFlash card.
View working log Allows users to check the operation logs of the MES interface module. Section 7.12.5
One-shot execution Executes a job as a one-shot task. Section 7.12.6

7-4 7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.2 Menu configuration
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(5) Help

OVERVIEW
2
Figure 7.7 Help menu

CONFIGURATION
Table 7.5 Help menu items

SYSTEM
Reference
Item Description
section
Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration
Product information
Tool. Section 7.14
3
Connection to MELFANSweb Displays the [Connection to MELFANSweb] screen.

SPECIFICATIONS
7.3.3 Toolbar configuration

This section shows each command provided on the toolbar.

4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 7.8 Toolbar

Table 7.6 Toolbar items

Item Description
Reference
section
5

INSTALLATION AND
New Creates a new project. Section 7.4.1

UNINSTALLATION
Open Retrieves an existing project. Section 7.4.2

Save Overwrites and saves the current project. Section 7.4.3

6
Add item Adds the item selected in the Edit items tree. Section 7.3.4

Delete item Deletes the item selected in the Edit items tree. Section 7.3.4
FUNCTIONS
Reads the MES interface function settings (project) from the MES interface
Read Section 7.12.3
module.

Write Writes the MES interface function settings (project) to the MES interface module. Section 7.12.2
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Restart Makes the stopped MES interface function operation restart. Section 7.13.2
MES INTERFACE

Stop Stops the MES interface function operation. Section 7.13.2

FUNCTION

One-shot execution Executes a job as a one-shot task. Section 7.12.6

Product information
Displays the product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration
Section 7.14
8
Tool.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.3 Toolbar configuration
7-5
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree

The Edit items tree shows overall project settings in a tree.

This section explains the operations using the Edit items tree.

Project root
Item

Setting type

Figure 7.9 Edit items tree

(1) Selecting an item

1 When double-clicking the project root or each setting type, some items are
displayed.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.

(2) Adding an item

1 Selecting an item or a setting type to be added and performing either of the

following will add the item.

• Click (Add item).

• Select [Edit] [Add item] from the menu.

2 When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen
is switched to the one for the added item.

Point
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.

7-6 7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(3) Deleting an item

OVERVIEW
1 Selecting an item to be deleted and performing either of the following will delete
the item.

• Click (Delete item). 2

• Select [Edit] [Delete item] from the menu.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Point
When the selected item is currently used for another item, it cannot be deleted.
As the error dialog box appears, identify the location, stop using it for another 3
item, and then delete the item.

SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Replicating an item

1 Selecting an item and choosing [Edit] [Replicate item] from the menu 4
replicates the item.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
2 When the item is added properly, it is automatically selected and the edit screen

OPERATION
is switched to the one for the added item.

Point 5
Since the number of items that can be added is limited depending on the setting

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
type, refer to the relevant section of each item.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.3 Screen Structure

7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
7-7
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.4 Project File Handling

This section explains how to handle project files.

MES Interface Function Configuration Tool treats the MES interface function settings for a
single MES interface module as one project.

7.4.1 Creating a new project

Create a new project.

When a new project is created, the project currently being edited is discarded.

1 Perform either of the following:

• Click (New).
• Select [Project] [New] from the menu.

7.4.2 Opening a project

Retrieve an existing project.

1 Perform either of the following:

• Click (Open).
• Select [Project] [Open] from the menu.

2 The [Open] dialog box is displayed

Set the following items and click the Open button.

Figure 7.10 [Open] dialog box

Table 7.7 Setting items in the [Open] dialog box

Item Description
Look in Select the location where the project is stored.
File name Specify a project file name.
Select a project file type.
Files of type
• MES interface function project file (*.mup)

7-8 7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.1 Creating a new project
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.4.3 Saving a project

OVERVIEW
Save a project.

(1) Save the current project.

2
1 Perform either of the following:

CONFIGURATION
• Click (Save).
• Select [Project] [Save] from the menu.

SYSTEM
(2) Saving a project under a new name
3
1 Select [Project] [Save As] from the menu.

SPECIFICATIONS
2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.
Set the following items and click the Save button.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.11 [Save As] dialog box

Table 7.8 Setting items in the [Save As] dialog box

Save in
Item Description
Select the location where the project is to be saved.
6
File name Specify the name of the project file to be saved.
Select a type of the project file to be saved.
Files of type
• MES interface function project file (*.mup) FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.3 Saving a project
7-9
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.4.4 Importing a project

Import an existing project.

Any setting can be selected from an existing project and can be imported into the current
project setting.
This function is useful when settings of an existing project is utilized for another project.

1 Select [Project] [Import] [Project file] from the menu.

2 As the [Open] dialog box appears, specify the project to be imported.

For the operation for the [Open] dialog box, refer to the following:
Section 7.4.2 Opening a project

3 When the project to be imported is selected, the [Import from project file] dialog box
is displayed.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
After completing the setting, clicking the Import button starts the import.

Existing registration
information
Project root
Setting
Item type

Import information
Selection tree

Figure 7.12 [Import from project file] dialog box

Table 7.9 Setting items in the [Import from project file] dialog box
Item Description
Selection tree In the tree, select the item to be imported.
Existing registration Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into
information which data are imported.
Import information Displays the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type.

7 - 10 7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.4 Importing a project
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(1) Selecting an item to be imported
In the tree, select the item to be imported.

OVERVIEW
Table 7.10 Item to be imported
Checked item Item to be imported 2
Project root All items in the project

CONFIGURATION
*1 All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked
Setting type
Item Each item whose checkbox is checked

SYSTEM
*1 When the setting type shown below is selected, items under any other setting type are
automatically selected if they are used for the selected one.
Note that, if an item of the same name exists in the target project, the item is not automatically
selected. 3
The user must select items to be imported.

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 7.11 Automatically selected item
Setting type Automatically selected item
[Device tag settings] [Access target CPU settings]
[Job settings] [Device tag settings], [Server service settings]
4

PROCEDURE TO
(2) Import precautions

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project.
Check [Existing registration information] and [Import information], and select items of
each setting type to be imported so that each limit is not exceeded.
5
Table 7.12 Number of settings available for each setting type

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Setting type Allowable number of settings*2
[Access target CPU settings] 64
[Device tag settings] 64
[Server service settings] 32
[Job settings] 64
6
*2 If an item of the same name exists, it is overwritten and therefore, excluded from the restriction on
the number of settings for each setting type.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.4 Importing a project
7 - 11
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.4.5 Importing a CSV file

Import an existing CSV file.

Any setting can be selected from a CSV file edited on a personal computer, and it can be
imported into the setting of the current project.
[System setting], [Access target CPU settings] and [Device tag settings] can be imported.

1 Save the following import target CSV files in the same folder.
• SYSTEM.CSV: [System setting] - [Network settings]
: [System setting] - [Time synchronization setting]
• ACCOUNT.CSV: [System setting] - [Account setting]
• CPU.CSV: [Access target CPU settings]
• TAG.CSV: [Device tag settings]
• COMPONENT.CSV: [Device tag settings] - [Component setting]
Note that, to import a CSV file, all the above files must exist in the same folder.
(If any of these files is missing, an error occurs.)

2 Select [Project] [Import] [CSV Files] from the menu.

3 The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

Set the following items and click the Open button.

Figure 7.13 [Open] dialog box

Table 7.13 Setting items in the [Open] dialog box

Item Description
Look in Select the location where the CSV file is stored.
Specify "SYSTEM.CSV".

Files shown in the above 1 and in the same folder as the specified file
File name (SYSTEM.CSV) are the import target CSV files.
For files to be imported, refer to the following:
Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)
Files of type Select [CSV file(SYSTEM.CSV)].

7 - 12 7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.5 Importing a CSV file
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
4 When the CSV file to be imported is selected, the [Import from CSV files] dialog box
is displayed.

OVERVIEW
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
After completing the setting, clicking the Import button starts the import.

Existing registration
2
information
Project root

CONFIGURATION
Setting
Selection tree
Item type

SYSTEM
Import information

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
Figure 7.14 [Import from CSV files] dialog box

UNINSTALLATION
Table 7.14 Setting items in [Import from CSV files] dialog box
Item Description
Selection tree In the tree, select the item to be imported.
Existing registration Displays the number of settings for each setting type in the project into
6
information which data are imported.
Import information Displays the number of the settings to be imported for each setting type.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.5 Importing a CSV file
7 - 13
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(1) Selecting an item to be imported

In the tree, select the item to be imported.

Table 7.15 Item to be imported

Checked item Item to be imported
Project root All items in the project
Setting type*1 All items under the setting type whose checkbox is checked
Item Each item whose checkbox is checked

*1 When the setting type shown below is selected, items under any other setting type are
automatically selected if they are used for the selected one.
Note that, if an item of the same name exists in the target project, the item is not automatically
selected.
The user must select items to be imported.

Table 7.16 Automatically selected item

Setting type Automatically selected item
[Device tag settings] [Access target CPU settings]

(2) Import precautions

There is a limit on the number of settings for each setting type in a project.
Check [Existing registration information] and [Import information], and select items of
each setting type to be imported so that each limit is not exceeded.

Table 7.17 Number of settings available for each setting type

Setting type Allowable number of settings*2
[Access target CPU settings] 64
[Device tag settings] 64

*2 If an item of the same name exists, it is overwritten and therefore, excluded from the restriction on
the number of settings for each setting type.

7 - 14 7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.5 Importing a CSV file
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.4.6 Exporting a CSV file

OVERVIEW
Export the current project settings to a CSV file.
Exported CSV files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing.
[System setting], [Access target CPU settings], [Device tag settings], [Server service
settings], and [Job settings] can be exported. 2

CONFIGURATION
1 Select [Project] [Export] [CSV Files] from the menu.

SYSTEM
2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

Set the following items and click the Save button.

3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 7.15 [Save As] dialog box

5
Table 7.18 Setting items in the [Save As] dialog box

INSTALLATION AND
Item Description

UNINSTALLATION
Save in Select the location where the CSV file is to be saved.
Specify "SYSTEM.CSV".
The respective setting files are exported into the same folder as the
File name specified file (SYSTEM.CSV).
For the files to be exported, refer to the following:
Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)
6
Files of type Select [CSV file(SYSTEM.CSV)].

FUNCTIONS

7.4.7 Printing a setting information file

To print setting details of MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, use a CSV file that
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

includes exported project settings (setting information file).

MES INTERFACE

For exporting CSV files, refer to the following:

Section 7.4.6 Exporting a CSV file
FUNCTION

Print the setting information file with a tool that is capable of printing text files.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.4 Project File Handling

7.4.6 Exporting a CSV file
7 - 15
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.5 Project Setting

Set the information on the project (project name, comments).

1 Click the project root in the Edit items tree.

2 The "project setting" area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
Set the following items.

Figure 7.16 [Project setting]

Table 7.19 Setting items in [Project setting]

Item Description
Project name Enter a project name. (Up to 32 characters)
Enter comments about the project as necessary.
Comment
(Up to 2048 characters)

(1) Project name (Up to 32 characters)

Enter a project name.
For characters that can be used for project names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
names, etc.
The set project name is displayed at the project root.

(2) Comment (Up to 2048 characters)

Enter comments about the project as necessary.
For characters that can be used for comments, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
names, etc.

7 - 16 7.5 Project Setting

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.6 System Setting

OVERVIEW
Configure the initial settings for the MES interface module.

1 Click [System setting] in the Edit items tree.

2
2 The "system setting" area is displayed on the detailed setting edit screen.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.17 [System setting]

Table 7.20 Setting items in [System setting]

Item Description
Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module
6
Network setting to the network.
Section 7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting
Time synchronization Make the time setting for the MES interface module. FUNCTIONS
setting Section 7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting
Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface
Account setting module.
Section 7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.

DB buffering setting
MES INTERFACE

Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting

FUNCTION

Default button Clicking the Default button returns [System setting] to the initial status.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting 7 - 17

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting

Configure the settings necessary for connecting the MES interface module to the network.

Point
The following are set by default.
• IP address : 192.168.3.3
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Figure 7.18 [Network settings]

Table 7.21 Setting items in [Network settings]

Item Description
Set the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation.
IP address (required)
(Example) 192.168.3.3
Set the subnet mask in decimal notation.
Subnet mask (required) All devices on the same network must use the same subnet mask.
(Example) 255.255.255.0
Set the default gateway in decimal notation.
Default gateway
One default gateway can be registered for the MES interface module.

Point
Before entering values in [Network settings], consult your network administrator
(the person who plans networking and manages IP addresses).

7 - 18 7.6 System Setting

7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting

OVERVIEW
Make the time setting for the MES interface module.
The time used in the MES interface module is obtained from the SNTP server computer or
PLC CPU (CPU No.1 in the case of a multiple CPU system).
2
Point

CONFIGURATION
To synchronize the time between the MES interface module and other devices on
the network, using the time on the SNTP server computer is recommended.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.19 [Time synchronization setting]
4

PROCEDURE TO
(1) When [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] is selected

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
When the [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] radio button is selected, the time is
adjusted to the time of CPU No.1.
The timing is as follows:
• When powering ON the PLC from OFF 5
• When resetting the PLC CPU

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
• Once a minute

(2) When [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected

(a) When the [Synchronize with SNTP] radio button is selected, the time is adjusted
to the time of the SNTP server computer on the network. 6
The timing is as follows:
• When powering ON the PLC from OFF
• When resetting the PLC CPU FUNCTIONS
• Once a minute

(b) When [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected, set the following items.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Table 7.22 Setting items when [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected

MES INTERFACE

Item Description
SNTP server address Enter the IP address of the SNTP server or NTP server in decimal
FUNCTION

(required) notation.
Select a time zone used for time synchronization.
Time zone (required)
Japan Standard Time (GMT+09:00) is selected by default.
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting

7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting
7 - 19
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(3) When time information is not obtainable from the SNTP server computer
When the MES interface module cannot obtain time information from the SNTP server
computer due to failure of the network or time synchronization server, it behaves as
follows:

(a) When time information is not obtained at the time of powering ON the PLC from
OFF, or resetting the PLC CPU
1) The operation for the case of selecting [Synchronize with PLC CPU time] is
performed. (Adjusted to the time of CPU No.1.)
2) Error code, 0A06h is output to the error log.
3) One minute later, time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer.

(b) When time information is not obtained in timings of once a minute

1) The module continues its operations based on the information that was
successfully obtained by time query.
2) When the previous time query was successful, error code, 0A07h is output to
the error log.
3) One minute later, time query is executed again to the SNTP server computer.

Point
Whether time query to the SNTP server computer is executed successfully or not
can be confirmed by [Online] - [View working log].
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module

(4) Precautions on the time synchronization function

(a) SNTP server computer
When [Synchronize with SNTP] is selected, an SNTP server computer is required.
Note that the SNTP server computer must have the time synchronization server
function.

(b) Time setting for the PLC CPU

1) Before using the MES interface module, set the time of CPU No.1.
2) Since the MES interface module obtains time data of CPU No.1 in the following
timings, transmission time delay may occur.
• When powering ON the PLC from OFF
• When resetting the PLC CPU
• Once a minute
3) When obtaining the clock data of CPU No.1, an error of up to "scan time of
CPU No.1 plus 1 second" may be observed.

Point
(1) When using the time information, which is obtained from the SNTP server
computer, in the PLC CPU
Section 6.3.1 Using the SNTP time query result in the PLC CPU

7 - 20 7.6 System Setting

7.6.2 Setting items in Time synchronization setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting

OVERVIEW
Set user authentication accounts used for access to the MES interface module.

Point 2
(1) At least one account setting is required, and up to 16 accounts can be set.
(2) An account of User name, "QJ71MES96" and Password, "MITSUBISHI" is set

CONFIGURATION
by default.
To protect from illegal access using the default account, delete the account

SYSTEM
after creating another account.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 7.20 [Account setting]
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting

7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting
7 - 21
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(1) Adding an account

1 Clicking the Add button displays the [Add Account] dialog box.
Set the following items and click the OK button.

Figure 7.21 [Add Account] dialog box

Table 7.23 Setting items in the [Add Account] dialog box

Item Description
Enter a user name. (1 to 20 characters)
Case-sensitive.
For characters that can be used for user names, refer to the
User name
following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string
constants, etc.
Enter a password. (8 to 14 characters)
Case-sensitive.
Password/Confirm
For characters that can be used for passwords, refer to the following:
password
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string
constants, etc.

(2) Modifying an account

1 Selecting an account and clicking the Edit button displays the [Edit Account]
dialog box.
Set the items explained in (1) and click the OK button.

Figure 7.22 [Edit Account] dialog box

(3) Deleting an account

1 Select the account to be deleted and click the Delete button.

7 - 22 7.6 System Setting

7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(4) Precautions on security of the MES interface module
Although the MES interface module supports the basic authentication (account

OVERVIEW
setting) using user names and passwords, it shall not completely protect the system
from illegal access.
When the PLC system security needs to be protected against illegal access, take 2
measures at the user's discretion.

CONFIGURATION
It is recommended to pay attention to the following:

SYSTEM
(a) Set [Account setting] observing the following so that your account (user name,
password) will not be leaked.
1) Prevent any simple setting consisting of alphanumeric characters only, and 3
include some non-alphanumeric character(s) (e.g. $, &, ?) to create
complicated user name and password.

SPECIFICATIONS
2) To protect from illegal access using the default account, delete the account
after creating another account.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting

7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting
7 - 23
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting

Configure the settings for the DB buffering function.

For the DB buffering function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.9 DB buffering function

Figure 7.23 [DB buffering settings]

Point
Tag components can be selected from a list of the tags set to data-write-enabled,
and each status of the DB buffering is stored in the device corresponding to the
component.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

(1) DB buffering status

(a) Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the
DB buffer or not is stored.

(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.

Table 7.24 Values stored in [DB buffering status]

Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF: Not accumulated
Bit
ON: One or more data accumulated
0: Not accumulated
Other than the above
1: One or more data accumulated

(2) No. of DB bufferings

(a) Select a tag component into which whether data are currently accumulated in the
DB buffer or not is stored.

(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.

Table 7.25 Values stored in [No. of DB bufferings]

Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF: Not accumulated
Bit
ON: One or more data accumulated
0: Not accumulated
Other than the above
1 or greater: Number of buffering data that are accumulated

7 - 24 7.6 System Setting

7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(3) Resend DB buffer request

OVERVIEW
(a) Select a tag component used to request for resend processing of the DB buffer.

(b) The following explains the operation of the resend processing using [Resend DB
buffer request]. 2
Table 7.26 Operation of the resend processing using [Resend DB buffer request]

CONFIGURATION
Data type of tag component Description

SYSTEM
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified tag
component is ON.
Normal: Turns OFF after completion of the resend processing.*1
Error: Outputs error code, 0B83h, to the error log, and turns OFF. 3

SPECIFICATIONS
Bit
Resend DB buffer request
Tag component value

DB buffer resend processing Execute resend

4
The resend processing of the DB buffer is performed when "1" is written to the

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
specified tag component.

OPERATION
Other than the above
Normal: "0" is written after completion of the resend processing.*1
Error: Outputs error code, 0B83h, and "0" is written.
*1 Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the resend processing is completed.
Even if the value changes, however, the resend processing is not interrupted. 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting

7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
7 - 25
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(4) Clear DB buffer request

(a) Select a tag component used to request for clear processing of the DB buffer.

(b) The following explains the operation of the clear processing using [Clear DB
buffer request].

Table 7.27 Operation of the clear processing using [Clear DB buffer request]
Data type of tag
Description
component
The clear processing of the DB buffer is performed when the specified
tag component is ON.
Turns OFF after completion of the clear processing.*2

Clear DB buffer request

Bit
Tag component value

DB buffer clear
processing Execute clear

The DB buffer is cleared when "1" is written to the specified tag

Other than the above component.
"0" is written after completion of the clear processing.*2
*2 Do not change the value of the specified tag component until the clear processing is completed.
Even if the value changes, however, the clear processing is not interrupted.

7 - 26 7.6 System Setting

7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(5) DB buffering full

OVERVIEW
(a) Select a tag component into whose device the status of whether the DB buffer
(Auto-resend or Manual resend area) is full or not is stored.

(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type. 2

Table 7.28 Values stored in [DB buffer full]

CONFIGURATION
Data type of tag
Description
component

SYSTEM
OFF: DB buffer is not full.
Bit
ON: DB buffer is full.
0: DB buffer is not full.
Other than the above
1: DB buffer is full. 3
(c) When the DB buffer becomes full, even if a DB-buffering-enabled job is activated,

SPECIFICATIONS
its SQL texts are discarded without being bufferred.
Note that execution of a DB-buffering-enabled job is not canceled.

Point
Check [DB buffer utilization] shown in (6) to prevent the "DB buffer full" status. 4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
(6) DB buffer utilization
(a) Select a tag component into whose device the utilization of the DB buffer area
(Unit: %) is stored.
5
(b) Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Utilizations are compared between the auto-resend and manual resend areas and
data of a greater one is stored.

Table 7.29 Values stored in [DB buffer utilization]

Data type of tag
Description
component 6
OFF: Not accumulated
Bit
ON: One or more data accumulated
0: Not accumulated
FUNCTIONS
Other than the above
Other than 0: Utilization of DB buffer area (Unit: %)*1

*1 Stored as an integer value. (Digits after decimal point are truncated.)

(7) DB buffering capacity (Range: 16MB to 512MB, Default: 64MB) 7

CONFIGURATION TOOL

(a) Set the capacity used for DB buffering out of the entire CompactFlash card
MES INTERFACE

capacity within the following range.

FUNCTION

Maximum capacity CompactFlash card capacity - 32M bytes

Note that a sufficient free space is needed for the CompactFlash card.

(b) A half of the DB buffering capacity is used as the auto resend area and another 8
half as the manual resend area.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.6 System Setting

7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting
7 - 27
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.7 Access Target CPU Setting

Set a connection channel to the access target CPU.

The set CPU name is used in [Device tag settings].

1 Double-clicking [Access target CPU settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant
items.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

Figure 7.24 [Access target CPU settings]

Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New CPU" item is added.

7 - 28 7.7 Access Target CPU Setting

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting

OVERVIEW
Point
(1) Up to 64 items can be set in [Access target CPU settings] within one project.
(2) By default, a control CPU is set as the first item with "ControlCPU" displayed
2
for CPU name.
Deletion or setting modification of the first item is not allowed.

CONFIGURATION
Only the CPU name can be modified.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.25 [Access target CPU settings]

Table 7.30 Setting items in [Access target CPU settings]

6
Item Description
CPU name Set the access target CPU name. (Up to 16 characters)
PLC series Select the PLC series of the access target CPU. FUNCTIONS

Select a CPU No. when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU
Multiple CPU specification
system.
Other station specification Select whether or not to specify any other station.
Network communication
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Set the network type, network No, head I/O address, and station No. used
route, Co-existence network
for access when any other station is specified.
MES INTERFACE

communication route
FUNCTION

(1) CPU name (Up to 16 characters)

Set the access target CPU name.
The set CPU name is used in [Device tag settings]. 8
For characters that can be used for CPU names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

names, etc.

7.7 Access Target CPU Setting

7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting
7 - 29
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(2) PLC series (QCPU (Q mode), QCPU (A mode), QnACPU, ACPU)

Select the PLC series of the access target CPU.

(3) Multiple CPU specification (No specification, No.1 to No.4)

Select a CPU No. when the access target CPU is used in the multiple CPU system.
When "No specification" is selected, access is made to the control CPU.

(4) Other station specification

Select whether or not to specify any other station.

(a) No specification
Select this when accessing the CPU on the host station.

(b) Other station (Single network)

Select this when accessing a CPU on another station via only one kind of network,
such as MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H, or Ethernet, or via a network consisting
of multi-tier systems.
(Because Ethernet is regarded as MELSECNET/10 or MELSECNET/H, when
MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H and/or Ethernet is used in combination, specify it
as a single network.)

(c) Other station (Different network)

Select this when accessing a CPU on another station via two kinds of networks.
Two kinds of networks represent two different networks such as combination of
MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H and CC-Link, or Q series C24 and MELSECNET/
10, MELSECNET/H.

(5) Network communication route, Co-existence network communication route

Set the network type, network No, head I/O address, and station No. used for access.
The setting items vary depending on the specified network type.

Point
To access a CPU on another station, routing parameters must be set in addition to
this setting.
For the routing parameters, refer to the following:
Manual for the network module used

7 - 30 7.7 Access Target CPU Setting

7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(6) Precautions on [Access target CPU settings]

OVERVIEW
(a) The MES interface module prepares for communication with the access target
CPU when executing [Update settings], powering ON the system from OFF, or
resetting the PLC CPU.
Therefore, if a large number of access target CPUs are set, several minutes are 2
required for the preparation.

CONFIGURATION
Confirm that [Update settings] is completed, or the MES interface module is ready
(X0 is ON.) before making access from the personal computer to the MES

SYSTEM
interface module.

(b) Be sure to set a correct series for [PLC series].

If [PLC series] is incorrectly set, either of the following will occur. 3
• At startup of the MES interface module, an error may occur in a PLC CPU or

SPECIFICATIONS
a module on the route to the access target CPU.
• The system may operate within the device range of the incorrect [PLC series]
setting.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.7 Access Target CPU Setting

7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting
7 - 31
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.8 Device Tag Setting

Configure the settings for the tag function.

For the tag function, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.3 Tag function
Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.

1 Double-clicking [Device tag settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

Figure 7.26 [Device tag settings]

Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New Tag" item is added.

7 - 32 7.8 Device Tag Setting

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting

OVERVIEW
Point
Up to 64 items can be set in [Device tag settings] within one project.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Figure 7.27 [Device tag settings]

OPERATION
Table 7.31 Setting items in [Device tag settings]
Item Description
5
Device Tag name Enter a device tag name. (Up to 16 characters)
Set whether to collect tag data at regular intervals or not.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Sampling settings When collecting, set a sampling interval.
Also, set whether to make the sampling more efficient or not.
Prohibit data writing Enable or disable writing data to the tag.
Configure the tag component settings.
Component setting input
Section 7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
Displays a list of the components that have been already set.
6
Component List
Section 7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting

(1) Device Tag name (Up to 16 characters) FUNCTIONS

Enter a device tag name.

Configured tags are used in [Job settings], etc.
For characters that can be used for device tag names, refer to the following: 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
MES INTERFACE

names, etc.
Note that using the name same as the one set in [Server service settings] is not
FUNCTION

allowed.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting
7 - 33
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(2) Sampling settings

(a) Normal sampling
Tag data are collected at the specified intervals.
When [Normal sampling] is selected, the tag sampling interval can be set in units
of seconds within the range from 1 to 32767.

(b) High-speed sampling (up to 96 points)

Tag data are collected at high speed at the specified intervals.
When [High-speed sampling] is selected, the tag sampling interval can be set in
units of 100 milliseconds within the range from 1 to 600 (× 100ms).
1) Precautions when selecting [High-speed sampling]
• Be sure to create a user-specified system area in the program memory of
the control CPU.
REMARKS (1) Creating a user-specified system area
• Registration of [High-speed sampling] is limited to one tag only. (Setting
this to multiple tags is not allowed.)
• The choice of [CPU name] in [Component setting input] is fixed to the first
item in [Access target CPU settings] (Control CPU).
• Devices of tag components can be set within the total of 96 points.
(The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of [Device
tag settings].)
(Example) When [Double word (2 points)] is set for [Data type] of all
components, up to 48 component settings can be registered.

(c) Do not sample

The tag is not sampled.

Point
(1) Select [Do not sample] in the cases shown below.
This setting can reduce the load of the MES interface module.
• Tags that perform writing only
• Tags that use handshaking for sampling device values
For handshaking, refer to the following:
Section 7.10.2 (8) Handshake operation
• When reserving the tag
(2) Tags with [Do not sample] setting cannot be selected in the items provided for
tag read setting. (Except for the case where the trigger condition is set to
[Handshake operation].)
• Tag component value for [Select/Update conditions] of [Select] in
[Communication action], etc.

7 - 34 7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(3) Enhance sampling efficiency
If the [Enhance sampling efficiency] box is checked, sampling and reading of tag data

OVERVIEW
under handshake operation can be executed at high speed.
This can be selected when device numbers of all the devices registered to the tag are
sequential. 2
(4) Prohibit data writing

CONFIGURATION
Set whether to enable or disable writing data to the tag.

SYSTEM
Point 3
Tags for which data writing is prohibited cannot be selected in the setting items
provided for writing to tags.

SPECIFICATIONS
• [Completion notification] of [Handshake operation], substitution tags of
[Select] in [Communication action], etc.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting
7 - 35
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Remark
(1) Creating a user-specified system area
The following explains how to create a user-specified system area in the program
memory of the control CPU.

1 Select [Online] [Format PLC memory] from the menu of GX Developer.

2 As the [Format PLC memory] dialog box appears, select [Create a user setting area]
in [Format Type].

3 Ensure 1K step for [High speed monitor area from other station.] per MES interface
module. *1

4 Clicking the Execute button executes formatting of the PLC memory.

*1 Separately from the areas used by

GX Developer and/or GOT, 1K step
is required per MES interface
module.

Figure 7.28 [Format PLC memory] in GX Developer

Point
Execution of the PLC memory formatting deletes the PLC CPU data.
Read the PLC CPU data into GX Developer before executing the PLC memory
formatting.

7 - 36 7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting

OVERVIEW
Configure the tag component settings.

(Adding a component)
• Set required items in [Component setting input], and click the Add button.
• The component is added in [Component List].
2
(Modifying a component)

CONFIGURATION
• When a component to be modified is selected in [Component List], its settings are

SYSTEM
displayed in [Component setting input].
• Modify the item settings in [Component setting input], and click the Replace
button. 3
(Deleting a component)

SPECIFICATIONS
• Select a component to be deleted in [Component List], and click the Delete button.

(Deleting the settings in [Component setting input])

• Clicking the Clear button deletes the settings in [Component setting input].

4
Point
Up to 256 components can be set for one tag.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Note that the maximum number of components available for one project is 4096.

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
Figure 7.29 [Component setting]
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
7 - 37
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Table 7.32 Setting items in [Component setting]

Item Description
Component name Enter a component name. (Up to 16 characters)
Select one from a list of the access target CPU names set in [Access
CPU name
target CPU settings].
Device Set device data.
Data type Select the data type of sampling data.
Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].
Character string length
(1 to 32 characters)
Perform statistical
Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
processing

Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the button

reverses the order between the selected component and the one
button
immediately above it.

The button cannot be clicked on the first component.

Selecting a component in [Component List] and clicking the button

reverses the order between the selected component and the one
button
immediately below it.

The button cannot be clicked on the last component.

Point
The following are displayed on the status bar of [Device tag settings].
• [No. of tag components in project]
The total number of tag components in the project is displayed.
• [No. of statistical processings in project]
The number of component settings in the project, for which [Perform
statistical processing] is checked, is displayed.
• [No. of device points in tag]
The total number of device points used in [Device tag settings] is
displayed.

(1) Component name (Up to 16 characters)

Enter a component name.
For characters that can be used for component names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
names, etc.

(2) CPU name

Select one from a list of the access target CPU names set in [Access target CPU
settings].
If [High-speed sampling] is selected, the choice is fixed to the first item in [Access
target CPU settings] (Control CPU).

7 - 38 7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(3) Device
• Set a device type and an actual device number.

OVERVIEW
• Indexing, digit specification, and word device specification by bit specification are
not allowed.
• For accessible devices, refer to the following: 2
Section 3.2 Accessible Devices and Ranges
• When [High-speed sampling] is selected, set devices within the total of 96 points.

CONFIGURATION
(The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of [Device tag
settings].)

SYSTEM
(4) Data type
Select the data type of sampling data (device data).
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 7.33 Options of [Data type]
Selectable
Item Description
device
Single word Handles data as single word data (16-bit Integer type). Word
Double word Handles data as double word data (32-bit Integer type). Word 4
Real number Handles data as floating point data. Word
Bit Handles data as bit data (in units of bits (0/1)). Bit

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
String*1 Handles data as character strings. Word

OPERATION
*1 When [Data type] is [String], device values are processed as follows:
• When the device value neither an ASCII code nor shifted JIS code
It is replaced with "." (period: 2Eh).
• When the device value is model-dependent characters 5
The character code may be converted during action execution.

INSTALLATION AND
• When the device value is a termination character (NULL code: 00h)

UNINSTALLATION
The character data following it are ignored. (The character string is regarded as terminated.)

(5) Character string length (1 to 32 characters)

(a) Set a character string length when [String] is selected for [Data type].
6
(b) When [String] is selected, data are stored as follows:
1) When the value length is shorter than the character string length
NULL codes (00h) are stored after the stored values. FUNCTIONS
Example: "ABCD" is stored in the device of the tag component, whose
character length is 8.
A B C D 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

41h 42h 43h 44h 00h 00h 00h 00h

MES INTERFACE

2) When the value length is longer than the character string length
FUNCTION

The values whose quantity is equal to the character string length are stored.
Example: "ABCD" is attempted to be stored in the device of the tag
component, whose character length is 2.
"AB" is stored. 8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
7 - 39
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(6) Perform statistical processing

(a) Set whether to perform statistical processing or not.
When the [Perform statistical processing] box is checked, statistical processing is
performed for tag component values.
Statistically processed values can be used by specifying the tag component
values, for which [Perform statistical processing] is selected, in [Job settings].

Point
Up to 64 components that have [Perform statistical processing] setting can be set
in all projects. (The number of the set points can be checked on the status bar of
[Device tag settings].)

(b) When [Perform statistical processing] is selected, set the following items.
Table 7.34 Setting items for [Perform statistical processing]
Item Description
Statistical type Select a type of the statistical processing.
Specify the number of samples (2 to 20) when [Moving average],
No. of samples
[Moving maximum], or [Moving minimum] is selected.

1) Statistical type
Select a type of the statistical processing.
Table 7.35 Options of [Statistical type]
Item Description
Average*1 An average value after starting sampling is stored.
Maximum*1 The maximum value after starting sampling is stored.
Minimum*1 The minimum value after starting sampling is stored.
Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the
number of times specified by [No. of samples] , and an averaged
Moving average*2 *3 value is stored.
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the
number of times specified by [No. of samples] , and the maximum
*2 *3 value is stored.
Moving maximum
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.
Tag component values are collected at sampling intervals for the
number of times specified by [No. of samples] , and the minimum
Moving minimum*2 *3 value is stored.
Since the processing range moves at each sampling, the latest value
can be obtained.

*1 If a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum] is reset, a value obtained after resetting
will be stored.
• How to reset a statistical value of [Average], [Maximum], or [Minimum]
Perform substitution of some value for the relevant tag component using [Operation action] of a job.
Section 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action
The statistical processing is reset and a value processed after the substitution is stored.
*2 Statistical values of [Moving average], [Moving maximum], and [Moving minimum] cannot be reset.
*3 When [Moving average], [Moving maximum] or [Moving minimum] is specified for a tag
component, a job using the tag component is not able to start its execution until sampling for the
specified number of times is completed.
The job will be canceled.

7 - 40 7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
2) No. of samples (2 to 20)
Specify the number of samples when [Moving average], [Moving maximum], or

OVERVIEW
[Moving minimum] is selected.

(Moving average when [No. of samples] is 4)

Device value Sampling interval

2
3) 4)
2) 5)

CONFIGURATION
1) 6) 8) 9)
7) 12)
10) 11)

SYSTEM
1st Tag component value 3
2nd Moving average
3rd

SPECIFICATIONS
0 Time (seconds)

<Change in tag component values>

1st 2nd 3rd
1)+2)+ 3)+4 ) 2 )+3)+4 )+5) 3 )+4)+5 )+6)
4
4 4 4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Figure 7.30 Moving average

OPERATION
(7) Precautions on [Component setting]
If a wrong device number is set for a component in [Component setting], an error will 5
occur on another component that has the same access target CPU setting.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Correct the device number in [Component setting].

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.8 Device Tag Setting

7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting
7 - 41
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.9 Server Service Setting

Configure the settings for access to a server computer.

The set server service name is used in [Job settings].

1 Double-clicking [Server service settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant
items.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

Figure 7.31 [Server service settings]

Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New server" item is added.

7 - 42 7.9 Server Service Setting

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting

OVERVIEW
Point
Up to 32 items can be set in [Server service settings] within one project.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 7.32 [Server service settings]
5

INSTALLATION AND
Table 7.36 Setting items in [Server service settings]

UNINSTALLATION
Item Description
Sever service name Enter a server service name. (Up to 16 characters)
Server type Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed.
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection
IP address
Service is installed.
Set a port number of the server computer.
6
Port No.
(Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)
Set a user name used to access the server computer.
User name
(Up to 30 characters) FUNCTIONS
Password/Confirm Set a password used to access the server computer.
password (Up to 30 characters)
Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.
Data source name
(Up to 30 characters) 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Database type Select the type of the database server.

Access error notification
MES INTERFACE

Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.

setting
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.9 Server Service Setting

7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting
7 - 43
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(1) Server service name (Up to 16 characters)

Enter a server service name.
The set server service name is used in [Job settings].
For characters that can be used for server service names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
names, etc.
Note that using the name same as the one of the tag set in [Device tag settings] is not
allowed.

(2) Server type

(a) Select the server type of the server computer to be accessed.

Table 7.37 Options of [Server type]

Item Description
Database server Used in [Communication action] of [Job settings].
Application server Used in [Program execution] of [Job settings].

(b) When [Database server] is selected, set the following items.

Table 7.38 Items set for [Database server]

Item Description
Set the name of the ODBC data source to be accessed.
For characters that can be used for data source names, refer to the
Data source name following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component
names, variable names, etc.
Select the type of the database server.
• Oracle 8i
• Oracle 9i
• Oracle 10g
Database type
• SQL Server 2000
• MSDE 2000
• Access 2000
• Access 2003

(3) IP address
Enter a decimal IP address of the server computer where DB Connection Service is
installed.

(4) Port No. (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)

Set a port number of the server computer.*1 *2
*1 Set the same value in [Port No.] as the one set in [Service port] of DB Connection Service.
Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool
*2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application.
Usually, it need not be changed.

7 - 44 7.9 Server Service Setting

7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(5) User name (Up to 30 characters)
Set a user name used to access the server computer.

OVERVIEW
For characters that can be used for user names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.

(a) When [Database server] is selected for [Server type] 2

Set a user name that is required for ODBC access.

CONFIGURATION
(b) When [Application server] is selected for [Server type]
Set the account user name used for the operating system (OS) of the application

SYSTEM
server computer.

(6) Password/Confirm password (Up to 30 characters) 3

Set a password used to access the server computer.

SPECIFICATIONS
For characters that can be used for passwords, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.

(7) Access error notification setting

(a) [Notify the access error status]
4
Set whether to enable or disable notification of the access error status.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
If the [Notify the access error status] box is checked, an error occurred in access

OPERATION
to the server computer is reported to a tag component.

(b) When [Notify the access error status] is selected, choose a tag component into
whose device the access error status data is stored.
Data are stored as follows depending on the data type.
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Table 7.39 Values for [Notify the access error status]
Data type of tag
Description
component
OFF : Normal/Not accessed
Bit
ON : Access error status

Other than the above

0 : Normal/Not accessed 6
1 : Access error status

Point FUNCTIONS
A tag component of [Notify the access error status] can be selected from a list of
the tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.9 Server Service Setting

7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting
7 - 45
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.10 Job Setting

Configure the settings for the DB interface function.

For the DB interface function, refer to the following:
Section 6.1 DB Interface Function

1 Double-clicking [Job settings] in the Edit items tree displays relevant items.

2 Selecting one of the items displays the corresponding edit screen on the detailed
setting edit screen area.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.

Figure 7.33 [Job settings]

Point
(1) How to add, delete, or copy an item
For addition, deletion or copying of items, refer to the following:
Section 7.3.4 Operations using the Edit items tree
(2) When an item is added or copied, a "New job" item is added.

7 - 46 7.10 Job Setting

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting

OVERVIEW
Point
Up to 64 items can be set in [Job settings] within one project.
For job operations, refer to the following:
2
Section 6.1.10 (1) Operation behavior of jobs

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6
Figure 7.34 [Job settings]
FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting
7 - 47
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Table 7.40 Setting items in [Job settings]

Item Description
Job name Enter a job name. (Up to 16 characters)
Enable at module startup Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not.
Trigger buffering Set whether to enable the trigger buffering or not.
Startup logging Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.
Test mode Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not.
Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.
Trigger conditions
Section 7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
Configure the action settings.
Actions
Section 7.11 Job Setting - Actions
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
Program execution
Section 7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not.
DB Buffering
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
Notify errors (job Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that
cancellation) that occur occur during job execution.
during job execution Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

Point
The following are displayed on the status bar of [Job settings].
• [No. of fields in project]
The total number of fields in the project is displayed.
• [No. of fields in job]
The total number of fields used in [Job settings] is displayed.
• [Tag component data length in job]
The total of tag component data lengths in the job is displayed.

(1) Job name (Up to 16 characters)

Enter a job name.
For characters that can be used for job names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable
names, etc.

(2) Enable at module startup

(a) Set whether to enable the job at startup of the MES interface module or not.
If the [Enable at module startup] box is not checked, the job is disabled at startup
of the module. (Even if trigger conditions are met, the job is not executed.)

(b) While the MES interface module is operating, this setting can be changed by the
following:
• "Instruction of job execution" in the XML processing function
Section 6.2 XML Processing Function
• [Online] - [Remote operation] - [Change job status]
Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status

7 - 48 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(3) Trigger buffering

OVERVIEW
(a) Set whether to enable the trigger buffering function or not.
For the trigger buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.5 Trigger buffering function
2
(b) Precautions when selecting [Trigger buffering]
1) [Handshake operation] is not selectable for trigger conditions.

CONFIGURATION
2) No tag component can be selected for Substitution tag of [Operation action].

SYSTEM
3) No tag component can be selected for Substitution tag of [Select] in
[Communication action].

4) Up to 4096 words *1 can be set as the total tag component data length usable
3
in one job. (The setting can be checked on the status bar of [Job settings] or in

SPECIFICATIONS
each action dialog box.)
*1 The total data length of the tag components that are set in [DB-tag link settings] or [Select/Update
conditions] of [Communication action], or in [Operation action].
If two or more identical tag components are set in the same job, respective data lengths are
counted.
4
(4) Startup logging

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
(a) Set whether to output the startup history of the job to the log or not.

OPERATION
When the [Startup logging] box is checked, the startup history of the job (date and
time, job name) is saved on a CompactFlash card.
The startup log can be checked from [Online] - [View working log].
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 5

INSTALLATION AND
(b) When the log capacity becomes full (Log capacity: 1MB × 2)

UNINSTALLATION
The first half of the data are deleted.
The latest log is stored after the remaining data.

(5) Test mode

6
(a) Set whether to operate the job in test mode or not.
When the [Test mode] box is checked, the test mode is activated, and execution
details of the job can be confirmed before operation.
FUNCTIONS
Execution details of the job can be checked by selecting [Online] - [View working
log] - [View details].
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(b) When [Test mode] is selected

The following are performed in the test mode.
MES INTERFACE

Operations other than the following are identical to the actual operations.
FUNCTION

• Startup data are logged.

• Detailed data are logged.
• No data are written to the PLC CPU.
• No data are written to the database.
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting
7 - 49
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
Up to 4 jobs can be set to [Test mode].

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

Configure the settings for startup conditions of the job.

The job is activated when the trigger condition value is changed from false to true.

Figure 7.35 [Trigger conditions]

Table 7.41 Setting items in [Trigger conditions]

Item Description
Combination Selects conjunction of Trigger 1 and 2.
Trigger 1 Selects Trigger 1.
Trigger 2 Selects Trigger 2.

7 - 50 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(1) Combination

OVERVIEW
(a) Selects a combination of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2].
• OR (When either of them is true, the result is true.)
• AND (When both of them are true, the result is true.)
The combination result of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] is changed from false to true, 2
the job is activated.

CONFIGURATION
(b) The following shows the timings at which the combination result of [Trigger 1] and
[Trigger 2] is changed from false to true.

SYSTEM
(In any other cases, because the combination result is not changed from false to
true, the job is not activated.)
3
Table 7.42 Timings at which combination result of [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2] is changed from false to true

SPECIFICATIONS
Combination Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Combination result
(Changed from false to true) (Remained false)

True True

False False 4
(Changed from false to true) (Changed from false to true)

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
OR (When either of them is

OPERATION
true, the result is true.) True True
False False

(Remained false) (Changed from false to true)

5

INSTALLATION AND
True

UNINSTALLATION
True (Changed from false to true)
False False

(Changed from false to true) (Remained true)

True
False
True True
6
False False
(Changed from false to true) (Changed from false to true)
FUNCTIONS

AND (When both of them

are true, the result is true.) True True
False False
7
(Changed from false to true)
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(Remained true)
MES INTERFACE

True True
FUNCTION

False False

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 - 51
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(2) Trigger 1, Trigger 2

Select items for [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2], referring to (3) and subsequent
descriptions.

Table 7.43 Selection items for [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2]

Item Description Trigger 1 Trigger 2
No trigger conditions
Disable
(3) Disable
When the specified date, time and day of the
week match the actual date, time and day of
Time specification startup the week, the condition changes from false to
true, resulting in job startup.
(4) Time specification startup
The condition is alternated between true and
false in the specified cycles (unit: seconds),
Specified time period
and when it changes from false to true, the job
startup
is activated.
(5) Specified time period startup
The actual tag component value is compared
with the condition value (tag component value
or constant value) at every sampling times,
Value monitoring startup
and the job is activated when the condition
changes from false to true.
(6) Value monitoring startup
The job is activated only once when the MES
At module startup interface module is started up.
(7) At module startup
The job is activated when [Handshake startup]
of the PLC CPU turns ON.
Upon completion of the job execution,
Handshake operation
[Completion notification] of the PLC CPU
turns ON.
(8) Handshake operation

: Selectable, : Not selectable

(3) Disable
(a) When [Disable] is selected for [Trigger 1] or [Trigger 2]
Another trigger is regarded as a trigger condition.

(b) When [Disable] is selected for both [Trigger 1] and [Trigger 2]

The job is not activated by trigger conditions.

Point
When [Disable] is selected, the job can be activated by an "instruction of job
execution" of the XML processing function.
Section 6.2 XML Processing Function

7 - 52 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(4) Time specification startup

OVERVIEW
(a) When the specified date, time and day of the week match the actual date, time
and day of the week, the condition changes from false to true, resulting in job
startup.
2
(b) When [Time specification startup] is selected, the date, time, and day of the week
must be set.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Figure 7.36 [Time specification startup]
3
1) Year, Month, Day, Hour, and Minute

SPECIFICATIONS
Directly enter the date and time.
Matching with the actual date and time is not checked for any field that remains
blank.

Table 7.44 Setting items in [Time specification startup]

4
Item Description
Year (4 digits) 1000 to 9999

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Month 1 to 12

OPERATION
Day 1 to 31
Hour 0 to 23
Minute 0 to 59

2) Day:
5
Specify a day of the week.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Check the checkbox of the day to be specified.
If no box is checked, it means "every day".
(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 17:30 on
Monday through Friday.
6

FUNCTIONS
Figure 7.37 [Time specification startup] setting example 1

(Example) The following shows that the job is to be activated at 9:00 on the 1st
day of every month.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

Figure 7.38 [Time specification startup] setting example 2

Point
If [Startup logging] is selected, each job startup can be confirmed with the time to
8
the second in the startup log.
DB CONNECTION

The startup log can be checked from [Online] - [View working log].
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 - 53
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(5) Specified time period startup

(a) The condition is alternated between true and false in the specified cycles
(unit: seconds), and when it changes from false to true, the job is activated.

(b) When [Specified time period startup] is selected, set the cycle.
(Range: 1 to 32767 seconds)

Figure 7.39 [Specified time period startup]

(Example)
The following shows that the job is activated at 60-second intervals for an hour
from 12:00 to 13:00 every day.

Figure 7.40 Example of setting combination of [Time specification startup] and [Specified time period
startup]

7 - 54 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(6) Value monitoring startup

OVERVIEW
(a) The actual tag component value is compared with the condition value (tag
component value or constant value) at every sampling times, and the job is
activated when the condition changes from false to true.
Even if the trigger condition becomes true temporarily between samplings, the job 2
is not activated unless it is true at time of sampling.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Startup point
Startup point
Condition value
3
Not activated here.

SPECIFICATIONS
Tag component value

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Sampling interval
Figure 7.41 Job startup points when [Value monitoring startup] is selected

(b) When [Value monitoring startup] is selected, specify conditions for comparison.
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.42 [Value monitoring startup]

1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to be compared with.
2) Condition 6
Select a condition for comparison.
Table 7.45 Selection items for [Condition]
Item Description FUNCTIONS
The tag component value is equal to the condition value.
The tag component value is not equal to the condition value.
The tag component value is equal to or greater than the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit] or [String]) 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

The tag component value is greater than the condition value.

(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit] or [String])
MES INTERFACE

The tag component value is smaller than the condition value.

FUNCTION

(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit] or [String])
The tag component value is equal to or smaller than the condition value.
(Not selectable when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit] or [String])

3) Tag/Type 8
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.
DB CONNECTION

4) Component
SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

Select or enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for

comparison.

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 - 55
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(Example)
The following shows that the job is activated when the value of the tag
component (Process 1, Temperature) reaches 45 or higher.

Figure 7.43 [Value monitoring startup] setting example 1

(Example)
To activate the job repeatedly while the condition of [Value monitoring startup]
is met, Make settings as follows:

Table 7.46 [Value monitoring startup] setting example 2

Item Description
Combination [AND]
Trigger 1, Trigger 2 [Value monitoring startup], [Specified time period startup]

As the condition alternates between true and false as shown below, job startup
can be repeated while the [Value monitoring startup] condition is met.

Tag component value

[Trigger 1] Timing of [Value monitoring startup]
Condition value

True
Sampling interval
False

[Trigger 2] Timing of [Specified time period startup]

True

False

Fixed cycle

Combined by AND

Timing when AND is used

Startup point

True

False

Figure 7.44 Job startup points when [Value monitoring startup] and [Specified time period startup] are
combined

(7) At module startup

The job is activated only once when the MES interface module is started up.

7 - 56 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(8) Handshake operation

OVERVIEW
(a) The job is activated when [Handshake startup] of the PLC CPU turns ON.
Upon completion of the job execution, [Completion notification] of the PLC CPU
turns ON.
[Handshake operation] is a startup method by which completion of job execution 2
can be notified to a PLC CPU.

CONFIGURATION
Sampling interval

SYSTEM
<PLC CPU operation>
Handshake operation started

ON
[Handshake startup] 3
OFF

SPECIFICATIONS
ON
[Completion notification]
OFF
Handshake operation completed

Device data 4
<MES interface module>

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Job operation

Data
5
Figure 7.45 [Handshake operation]

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
1 When [Handshake startup] turns ON in the sequence program, the MES interface
module collects tag data and executes the job.

2 Upon completion of the job execution, the MES interface module turns ON
[Completion notification].*1
6
3 After confirming that [Completion notification] is ON, turn OFF [Handshake
startup] in the sequence program.

4 When [Handshake startup] turns OFF, the MES interface module turns OFF FUNCTIONS

[Completion notification], causing the handshake operation to be completed.

5 After confirming the completion of the handshake operation, the next job is 7
executed.
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE

*1 If an error occurs during job execution, [Completion notification] does not turn ON.
FUNCTION

To detect such an error, enable [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution].
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 - 57
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(b) [Handshake operation] is selectable only in [Trigger 1].

When [Handshake operation] is selected, selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2].
For selection of [Handshake operation], set the following items.

Figure 7.46 [Handshake operation]

Table 7.47 Setting items when selecting [Handshake operation]

Item Description
Select a tag component used to request for job startup.
Handshake startup
(Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit])
Select a tag component that allows notification of execution
Completion notification *1 completion of the job.
(Selectable only when [Data type] of the tag component is [Bit])

*1 Do not specify the same [Completion notification] to multiple jobs.

Point
A tag component of [Completion notification] can be selected from a list of the
tags that are set to data write enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

7 - 58 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(c) Program example
1) Devices used in the program

OVERVIEW
Table 7.48 Devices used in the program
Device name Device Application
MES interface module Input X5 Information linkage status
2
External input (command) X100 Processing request

CONFIGURATION
M0 In-process
M100 Handshake startup
Internal relay

SYSTEM
M200 Completion notification Specify at [Job settings].
M201 Job cancellation notification

2) Program example
3
The following is a program example in which a job is executed when an

SPECIFICATIONS
execution request (X100) from the outside turns ON.

Sets In-process flag

of job execution. 4
Resets In-process flag
when job execution is normal.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
For XML processing

OPERATION
Send data generation

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Receive data processing
Processing for normal
job execution

Error handling
6
Processing for failed
job execution

FUNCTIONS

Figure 7.47 Program example

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 - 59
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

3) Timing charts
Timing charts for the program example in 2) are shown below.
(When the job is executed normally)

Job execution

Figure 7.48 When the job is executed normally

(When an error occurs during job execution)

Figure 7.49 When an error occurs during job execution

7 - 60 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for the program execution function.
For the program execution function, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.8 Program execution function

1 Click the Setting button of [Before actions] or [After actions].

2
• Before actions:

CONFIGURATION
Set a program to be performed before execution of the first action of the job.
• After actions:

SYSTEM
Set a program to be performed after execution of the last action of the job.

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.50 [Program execution]

2 [Program execution settings (before action execution)] or [Program execution

settings (after action execution)] is displayed.
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions. 4
After completing the setting, click the OK button.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

Figure 7.51 [Program execution settings (before action execution)]

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
7 - 61
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Figure 7.52 [Program execution settings (after action execution)]

Table 7.49 Setting items when selecting [Program execution settings (before action execution)] or
[Program execution settings (after action execution)]
Item Description
Execute program before Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution
(after) action of actions.
Program execution
Select an application server to be accessed.
destination
Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application
Command line
server computer. (Up to 127 characters)
Check return value Set whether to check the return value or not.
Wait for execution Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before
completion executing the next processing.

(1) Execute program before action, or Execute program after action

(a) Set whether or not to enable program execution before or after execution of
actions.

(b) When [Execute program before action] or [Execute program after action] is
enabled, make the setting described in (2) and subsequent sections.

(2) Program execution destination

Select an application server to be accessed.

(3) Command line (Up to 127 characters)

Enter a command line for the program that is executed on the application server
computer.
For characters that can be used for command lines, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.

7 - 62 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(4) Check return value

OVERVIEW
(a) Set whether to check the return value or not.
When the [Check return value] box is checked, the return value (End code) of the
executed program is checked.
If no return value is returned within the [Timeout] time set in DB Connection 2
Service Setting Tool, a timeout error is detected and the job execution is canceled.

CONFIGURATION
For [Timeout], refer to the following:
Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

SYSTEM
(b) When [Check return value] is selected, set the following items.
1) Normal return value (Default: 0)
Set a normal return value.
3
2) Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty

SPECIFICATIONS
When the [Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty] box is checked,
if the return value is not normal, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component.
Set a tag component to which a value is assigned when this is selected.
• Tag, Component 4
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.

PROCEDURE TO
• Substitute value

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Directly enter a substitute value.
The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value.

Table 7.50 Values that can be entered as a substitute value

Data type of tag
5
Values that can be entered as a substitute value
component

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Bit ON/OFF is selectable.
Up to 16 characters
Single-precision integer • Signed decimal notation
Double-precision integer (Example: -521.98)
Floating-point data • Signed exponential notation
(Example: -5.2198E03) 6
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the
Character string following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, FUNCTIONS

etc.

Point 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

A tag component set under [Write the value into the tag when the value is faulty]
can be selected from a list of the tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
MES INTERFACE

Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

FUNCTION

3) Do not execute job when the value is faulty ([Program execution settings
(before action execution)] only) 8
When the [Do not execute job when the value is faulty] box is checked, if the
return value is faulty, the job execution is canceled.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
7 - 63
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(5) Wait for execution completion

Set whether or not to wait for execution completion of the program before executing
the next processing.
When [Check return value] is selected, [Wait for execution completion] is always
selected.

7 - 64 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

OVERVIEW
Set whether to utilize the DB buffering function or not.
For the DB buffering function setting, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.9 DB buffering function
2

CONFIGURATION
Figure 7.53 [DB Buffering]

SYSTEM
Table 7.51 Setting items when selecting [DB Buffering]
Item Description
Enable DB buffering Set whether to enable the DB buffering or not.
3
Set whether or not to automatically resend data after recovery.

SPECIFICATIONS
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is checked,
Automatically resend at
resend processing is automatically performed after recovery.
time of restoration
When the [Automatically resend at time of restoration] box is not checked,
resend processing is manually performed after recovery.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.10 Job Setting

7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
7 - 65
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur during
job execution.
Job execution is canceled when access to the database fails or when type mismatch is
found.
• Section 6.1.10 (2) When an error occurs in job execution
• Section 7.15 (4) Type mismatch

Figure 7.54 Setting example of [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution]

(1) Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution
(a) Set whether to enable or disable notification of errors (job cancellation) that occur
during job execution.
When [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution] box is
checked, if job execution is canceled, a value is assigned to the specified tag
component.

(b) Set a tag component to which the value is assigned when this is selected.
1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
2) Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.
The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value.

Table 7.52 Values that can be entered as a substitute value

Data type of tag
Values that can be entered as a substitute value
component
Bit ON/OFF is selectable.
Up to 16 characters
Single-precision integer • Signed decimal notation
Double-precision integer (Example: -521.98)
Floating-point data • Signed exponential notation
(Example: -5.2198E03)
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the
Character string following:
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants,
etc.

Point
A tag component of [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job
execution] can be selected from a list of the tags that are set to data-write-
enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

7 - 66 7.10 Job Setting

7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.11 Job Setting - Actions

OVERVIEW
Set actions of [Job settings].
There are two types of actions: [Communication action] for communicating with a
database and [Operation action] for operating tag component values.
2
(Adding an action)
• Select [Communication action] or [Operation action] in the combo box next to the

CONFIGURATION
Add button, and click the Add button.

SYSTEM
• The [Communication action] or [Operation action] dialog box is displayed.
Make the setting referring to the following: 3
• Section 7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
• Section 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action

SPECIFICATIONS
(Modifying an action)
• Select an action to be modified in [Action list], and click the Edit button.

4
• The [Communication action] or [Operation action] dialog box is displayed.
Make the setting referring to the following:

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
• Section 7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action

OPERATION
• Section 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action

(Deleting an action)
• Select an action to be deleted in [Action list], and click the Delete button. 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
(Copying an action)
• Select an action to be copied in [Action list], choose [Replicate the selected action]
from the combo box next to the Add button, and click the Add button.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions 7 - 67

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(Copying an action of another job within the project)

1 Select [Replicate actions of other jobs] in the combo box next to the Add button,
and click the Add button.

2 The [Replicate Actions of other Jobs] dialog box is displayed.

Figure 7.55 [Replicate Actions of other Jobs] dialog box

3 By repeating the following steps 4 to 6 , set copy targets in [Selected Actions to

replicate].

4 From [Source Jobs], select a job that includes a desired action.

5 Actions of the job selected in 4 are listed in [Source Actions]. Select an action to
be copied. (Multiple selection is available.)

6 Clicking the > button displays the action(s) selected in 5 in [Selected Actions to
replicate].

Table 7.53 Button operations in the [Replicate Actions of other Jobs] dialog box
Item Description
Puts the action(s) selected in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions
> button to replicate].
Puts all of the actions in [Source Actions] into [Selected Actions to
>> button replicate].
Deletes the action(s) selected in [Selected Actions to replicate] from
< button the box.
Deletes all of the actions in [Selected Actions to replicate] from the
<< button box.

7 Clicking the Run button executes copying.

8 Copied actions are placed after existing actions.

7 - 68 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
Up to 10 actions can be set for one job.

OVERVIEW
When more than one action are set, they are executed in order, starting from the
top.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.56 [Action list]

Table 7.54 Setting items in [Action list]

Item Description
4
Type Displays the type of the action registered.

PROCEDURE TO
Summary Displays the description of the action registered.

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the button reverses the
button order between the selected one and the one immediately above it.
The button cannot be clicked on the first action.

Selecting an action in [Action list] and clicking the button reverses the 5
button order between the selected one and the one immediately below it.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
The button cannot be clicked on the last action.

(1) Type
The types of the existing actions are displayed. 6
Table 7.55 Displays in [Type]
Item Description
Select [Select] of [Communication action] FUNCTIONS

Update [Update] of [Communication action]

Insert [Insert] of [Communication action]
Operation [Operation action]
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions 7 - 69

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(2) Summary
Details of the existing actions are displayed.

(a) In the case of [Communication action]

Table 7.56 Display for [Communication action]

Item Description
[Database: Table name] {DB-Tag link setting No.1} ... {DB-Tag link setting No.n}

Display format*1
• Select: {DB-Tag link setting} = {Field name Tag component/constant value}
• Update/Insert: {DB-Tag link setting} = {Field name Tag component/constant value}

(b) In the case of [Operation action]

Table 7.57 Display for [Operation action]

Item Description
{Operation action No.1} ... {Operation action No.n}

• With substitution setting:

{Operation action} =
Display format*1 *2 {Substitution tag component/constant value Operation tag component/constant value Operator
Operation tag component/constant value}
• Without substitution setting:
{Operation action} =
{Substitution tag component/constant value Operation tag component/constant value}

*1 Display format of the tag component/constant value

Table 7.58 Display format of the tag component/constant value

Item Description
Tag component Device tag name, component name
Number Numerical value
String "Character string"
Unit time: Date [Module time]
Date
Server time: Date [Server time]
Date String "Date [String]"
Variable (Variable name)

*2 Display format of the operator

Table 7.59 Display format of the operator

Item Description
+ (Addition) +
- (Subtraction) -
× (Multiplication) ×
÷ (Division) ÷
% (Remainder) %

7 - 70 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for communications with a database.

1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the

[Communication action] dialog box.
2
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.

CONFIGURATION
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:

SYSTEM
Section 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.57 [Communication action] dialog box

Table 7.60 Setting items in the [Communication action] dialog box 6

Item Description
Action type Select an action type.

FUNCTIONS
Database Select a database to be accessed.
Table name Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or
DB-tag link settings
constant values).

Select/Update conditions
When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set conditions for 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

the records to be selected or updated.

Exception processing: No When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set processing for
MES INTERFACE

applicable record the case where there is no record to be selected or updated.

FUNCTION

Exception processing: When [Select] or is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case
Multiple applicable records where there are more than one record to be selected.
The SQL text generated by the currently editing [Communication action] is
Generated SQL text
displayed.
8
No. of fields in project The total number of fields in the project is displayed.

(To the next page)

DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 71
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(From the previous page)

Table 7.60 Setting items in the [Communication action] dialog box

Item Description
Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately above it.
The button cannot be clicked on the first row.

Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately below it.
The button cannot be clicked on the last row.

Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.
• All of the tag set in [Device tag settings] are inserted into [Tag] and
[Component].
• Select a row into which data are inserted and choose a tag in a list box

Insert a whole tag next to the Insert a whole tag button. Clicking the

button Insert a whole tag button inserts all of the tag components into
contiguous rows starting from the selected one.
• The existing data set in the rows starting from the selected one are
moved down.

Point
(1) Up to 8192 fields can be set in [DB-tag link settings] and [Select/Update
conditions] for each project.
(The setting can be checked on the status bar of [Job settings] or in the
[Communication action] dialog box.)
(2) Entry of [Component]
When data are entered in [Component] by [Insert a whole tag] or with the
[Field name] space blank, the data are copied to the [Field name] space.
(Characters not allowed for [Field name] are not entered.)
Because of this, setting the same name to each of the field name and tag
component name is useful.

7 - 72 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(1) Action type
Select an action type.

OVERVIEW
Table 7.61 Selection items for [Action type]
Item Description

Select
Substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are met, for 2
a substitute value (tag component value/variable).
Substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/variable) for a

CONFIGURATION
Update
field value of the record whose conditions are met.
Inserts an insert value (tag component value/constant value/variable)

SYSTEM
Insert
to a field value of a record.

(2) Database 3
Select a database to be accessed.

SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Table name
Set a table name of the database to be accessed.
For characters that can be used for table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4 4
(4) DB-tag link settings

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Set assignments between field values and tag component values (or constant

OPERATION
values).

Point 5
Up to 256 rows can be set in [DB-tag link settings] for each communication action.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
(a) When [Select] is selected for [Action type]
[Select] substitutes a field value of the record, whose conditions are met, for a
substitute value (tag component value/variable).
6
Set conditions of the record to be selected in [Select/Update conditions].
(5) Select/Update conditions
1) Field name (Up to 16 characters)
FUNCTIONS
Set a field name for the field value to be selected.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4
7
2) Tag
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Select a tag or variable for which a value is substituted.

MES INTERFACE

3) Component
FUNCTION

Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution

target.

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 73
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
A tag component of [DB-tag link settings] in [Select] can be selected from a list of
the tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

Figure 7.58 Setting example of [Select]

Database: DB1, Table name: RecipeData

Work_No RECIPE1 RECIPE2 RECIPE3

536 5 32 1

Matched Selected Selected Selected

Tag component
Process1.Work_No Process1.RECIPE1 Process1.RECIPE2 Process1.RECIPE3
536 5 32 1
Figure 7.59 Operation example of [Select]

7 - 74 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(b) When [Update] is selected for [Action type]*1
[Update] substitutes a substitute value (tag component value/variable) for a field

OVERVIEW
value of the record whose conditions are met.
Set conditions of the record to be updated in [Select/Update conditions].
(5) Select/Update conditions
2
1) Field name (Up to 16 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be updated.

CONFIGURATION
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4

SYSTEM
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.
3
3) Component
Select or directly enter a Component value or a variable that is to be

SPECIFICATIONS
substituted.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.60 Setting example of [Update]
6

FUNCTIONS
Database: DB1, Table name: CompletionReport
Work_No Completed Rejected Date
: : : :
536 496 32 2005.07.01 15:12:00 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE

Matched Updated Updated Updated

FUNCTION

Tag component
Process1.Work_No Process1.Complete Process1.Rejected Constant: Server time
536 496 32 2005.07.01 15:12:00 8
Figure 7.61 Operation example of [Update]
DB CONNECTION

*1 When the database is Microsoft Access 2000/2003

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

• Up to 127 fields can be updated by one communication action.

• Do not access a file from multiple MES interface modules at the same time.

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 75
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(c) When [Insert] is selected for [Action type]

[Insert] inserts a value (tag component value/constant value/variable) to a field
value of a record.
1) Field name (Up to 16 characters)
Set a field name for the field value to be inserted.
For characters that can be used for field names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4
2) Tag
Select a tag, constant, or variable which is substituted.
3) Component
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable that is to be
substituted.

Figure 7.62 Setting example of [Insert]

Database: DB1, Table name: ERRORLOG

Date Process No Work_No Parameter
: : : :
2005.07.01 15:12:00 1 536 8

Inserted Inserted Inserted Inserted

Tag component
Constant: Unit time Constant: 1 Process1.Work_No Process1.Parameter
2005.07.01 15:12:00 1 536 8

Figure 7.63 Operation example of [Insert]

7 - 76 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(d) About tag components
Tag components can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select], [Update] or

OVERVIEW
[Insert], or as condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists data types of tag components and those of assignable
fields.
If the data type of a tag component does not match the one of its substitution 2
target field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
Point
The data type of a tag component will change through operation processing of a
job. 3
Section 7.15 (4) Type mismatch

SPECIFICATIONS
Table 7.62 Data types of tag components and those of assignable fields
Data type of assignable field

Data type of tag Oracle 8i 4

SQL Server 2000 Access 2000
component Oracle 9i
MSDE 2000 Access 2003

PROCEDURE TO
Oracle 10g

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Yes/No type
bit
Byte type
int
Integer type
smallint
(Numeric type: Integer) Long Integer type
Bit type
NUMBER tinyint
float
Single type 5
CHAR Double type
Single-precision type
VARCHAR real

INSTALLATION AND
Double-precision type AutoNumber type

UNINSTALLATION
char
Currency type
varchar
Text type *1
text*1
Memo type *1
float
Single type
(Numeric type: Floating NUMBER real
Double type 6
point) CHAR char *1
Text type
Floating-point type VARCHAR varchar
Memo type *1
text*1
char FUNCTIONS
CHAR Text type
Character string varchar
VARCHAR Memo type
text*1

*1 Not available for [Select/Update conditions]. 7

CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 77
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(e) About constants

Constants can be used as substitute/insert values for [Update] or [Insert], or as
condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists constant types and the data types of assignable fields.
If the type of a constant does not match the data type of its substitution target
field, an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution.

Table 7.63 Constant types and the data types of assignable fields

Data type of assignable field

Oracle 8i
Constant type Values that can be entered in [Component] SQL Server 2000 Access 2000
Oracle 9i
MSDE 2000 Access 2003
Oracle 10g
Yes/No type
bit *1 Byte type
Up to 16 characters
int *1 Integer type
• Signed decimal notation
smallint *1 Long Integer type
[Number] (Example: -521.98) NUMBER
Single type
• Signed exponential notation tinyint *1
Double type
(Example: -5.2198E03) float
AutoNumber type
real
Currency type
Up to 32 characters
char
For characters that can be used for character CHAR Text type
[String] varchar
strings, refer to the following: VARCHAR Memo type
text*3
Appendix 1.3
• When using the date and time of the
database server:
[Server time] datetime
[Date] *2 DATE Date/Time type
• When using the date and time of the MES smalldatetime
interface module:
[Module time]
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character
strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3
Specify the date and time of the MES interface
module in the following format.
Year (4 digits): YYYY char
CHAR Text type
[Date String] Year (2 digits): YY varchar
VARCHAR Memo type
Month (2 digits): MM text*3
Day (2 digits): DD
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example:"YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss"
"2005-07-01 15:12:00"

*1 Signed integer notation only

*2 Clock precision:
[Module time]: In units of seconds
[Server time]: Depends on the database server.
*3 Not available for [Select/Update conditions.]

7 - 78 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(f) About variables
Variables can be used as substitute/insert values for [Select], [Update] or [Insert],

OVERVIEW
or as condition values of [Select/Update conditions].
The following table lists data types of variables and those of assignable fields.
If the type of a variable does not match the data type of its substitution target field,
an error occurs, resulting in cancellation of job execution. 2

CONFIGURATION
Point

SYSTEM
(1) Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
(2) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(3) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value 3
of zero.
(4) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.

SPECIFICATIONS
Section 7.15 (4) Type mismatch

Table 7.64 Data types of variables and those of assignable fields 4

Data type of assignable field

PROCEDURE TO
Values (variable names) that can be Oracle 8i

SETTINGS AND
Data type of variable SQL Server 2000 Access 2000
entered in [Component]

OPERATION
Oracle 9i
MSDE 2000 Access 2003
Oracle 10g
Yes/No type
bit
Byte type
int
Integer type
5
smallint
(Numeric type: Integer) Long Integer type

INSTALLATION AND
NUMBER tinyint

UNINSTALLATION
Bit type Single type
CHAR float
Single-precision type Double type
VARCHAR real
Double-precision type AutoNumber type
char
Up to 16 characters Currency type
varchar
For characters that can be used for Text type *1
text*1
variables, refer to the following: Memo type *1 6
Appendix 1.2 float
Single type
(Numeric type: Floating NUMBER real
Double type
point) CHAR char
Text type *1 FUNCTIONS
Floating-point type VARCHAR varchar
Memo type *1
text*1
char
CHAR Text type
Character string
VARCHAR
varchar
Memo type
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

text*1
MES INTERFACE

*1 Not available for [Select/Update conditions].

FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 79
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(5) Select/Update conditions

When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set conditions for the records
to be selected or updated.
When a field value of a record matches a condition value, the record is selected or
updated.

Point
(1) Up to 8 rows can be set for one communication action in [Select/Update
conditions].
(2) If there is no record to be selected or updated, exception processing is
executed.
(6) Exception processing: No applicable record
(3) When there are multiple records to be selected or updated, exception
processing is executed.
(7) Exception processing: Multiple applicable records

(a) Field name (Up to 16 characters)

Set a field name that is used for comparison.
For characters that can be used for field and table names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.4

(b) Condition
Select a condition for comparison.

Table 7.65 Selection items for [Condition]

Item Description
= The field value is equal to the condition value.
The field value is not equal to the condition value.
The field value is equal to or greater than the condition value.
> The field value is greater than the condition value.
< The field value is smaller than the condition value.
The field value is equal to or smaller than the condition value.

(c) Tag
Select a tag or constant that is used as a condition for comparison.
When [Update] is selected for [Action type], [Variable] can be also selected.

(d) Component
Select or directly enter a component/constant value that is used as a condition for
comparison.
If [Variable] is selected for [Tag], select or directly enter a variable.

Point
For tag components, constants or variables, refer to the following:
• (4) (d) About tag components
• (4) (e) About constants
• (4) (f) About variables

7 - 80 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(6) Exception processing: No applicable record
When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case

OVERVIEW
where there is no record to be selected or updated.

CONFIGURATION
Figure 7.64 Setting example of [Exception processing: No applicable record]

SYSTEM
(a) Send notification of this exception
When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if there is no record 3
to be selected or updated, assign a value to the specified tag component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to

SPECIFICATIONS
which the value is assigned.
1) Tag, Component
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.
2) Substitute value 4
Directly enter a substitute value.
The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Table 7.66 Values that can be entered as a substitute value
Data type of tag
Values that can be entered as a substitute value
component
Bit type ON/OFF is selectable. 5
Up to 16 characters

INSTALLATION AND
Single-precision integer • Signed decimal notation

UNINSTALLATION
Double-precision integer (Example: -521.98)
Floating-point type • Signed exponential notation
(Example: -5.2198E03)
Up to 32 characters

Character string
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the
following:
6
Appendix 1.3

FUNCTIONS
Point
A tag component of [Send notification of this exception] can be selected from a list
of the tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed. 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE

(b) Forcibly stop job

FUNCTION

When the [Forcibly stop job] box is checked, after execution of exception
processing described in the above (a), the job is forcibly terminated without
executing remaining actions.
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
8
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 81
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing, an error
occurred during job execution (job cancellation) is not notified.
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

(7) Exception processing: Multiple applicable records

When [Select] or [Update] is selected for [Action type], set processing for the case
where there are multiple records to be selected or updated.

Figure 7.65 Setting example of [Exception processing: Multiple applicable records]

(a) Select from any record (Default: Checked)

When [Select] is selected for [Action type], checking the [Select from any record]
box allows extraction of any record from multiple applicable records.

Point
When [Update] is selected for [Action type], if multiple records to be updated exist,
all of them are updated.

7 - 82 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(b) Send notification of this exception
When the [Send notification of this exception] box is checked, if multiple records

OVERVIEW
to be selected or updated exist, assign a value to the specified tag component.
When [Send notification of this exception] is selected, set a tag component to
which the value is assigned.
1) Tag, Component
2
Select a tag component to which a value is assigned.

CONFIGURATION
2) Substitute value
Directly enter a substitute value.

SYSTEM
The following lists values that can be entered as a substitute value.

Table 7.67 Values that can be entered as a substitute value

3
Data type of tag
Values that can be entered as a substitute value
component

SPECIFICATIONS
Bit type ON/OFF is selectable.
Up to 16 characters
Single-precision integer • Signed decimal notation
Double-precision integer (Example: -521.98)
Floating-point type • Signed exponential notation
(Example: -5.2198E03) 4
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Character string
following:

OPERATION
Appendix 1.3

5
Point

INSTALLATION AND
A tag component of [Send notification of this exception] can be selected from a list

UNINSTALLATION
of the tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

(c) Forcibly stop job 6

When the [Forcibly stop job] box is checked, after execution of exception
processing described in (a) and (b), the job is forcibly terminated without
executing remaining actions. FUNCTIONS
At this time, substitute/insert values before exception processing execution are
committed, and they are written to relevant tag components.

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 - 83
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
(1) When a job is forcibly terminated due to exception processing, an error
occurred during job execution (job cancellation) is not notified.
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation
(2) If [Enable DB buffering] is selected for a job, its exception processing setting
is disabled.
Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering

(8) Generated SQL text

The SQL text generated by the currently editing [Communication action] is displayed.
It indicates the display format of the tag component/constant value.
Note that data of Tag component, Unit time, Date String, and Variable are generated
at job execution, and displayed in the format shown in Table 7.68. (It is different from
the actual SQL text.)

Table 7.68 Display format of the tag component/constant value

Item Description
Tag component '(Device tag name, component name)'
Numerical value 'Number'
String 'String'
Unit time:
TO_DATE('(Date[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Oracle 8i
'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: sysdate
Unit time:
Oracle 9i TO_DATE('(Date[YYYYMMDDhhmmss])',
Date
Oracle 10g 'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS')
Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
SQL Server 2000 Unit time: '(Date[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
MSDE 2000 Server time: CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
Access 2000 Unit time: '(Date[YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss])'
Access 2003 Server time: NOW()
Date String '(Date[String])'
Variable '(Variable name)'

7 - 84 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.1 Setting items in Communication action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action

OVERVIEW
Configure the settings for operation of tag component values.

1 Performing the operation for adding or modifying an action displays the [Operation
action] dialog box.
2
Make the setting referring to the following descriptions.
Clicking the OK button after setting adds or modifies the action.

CONFIGURATION
For the operation for adding or modifying an action, refer to the following:

SYSTEM
Section 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.66 [Operation action] dialog box

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action
7 - 85
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Table 7.69 Setting items in the [Operation action] dialog box

Item Description
Substitution tag Select a tag or variable to which a value is assigned.
Select or directly enter a component value or a variable of the substitution
Component (left side)
target.
Operation tag Select a tag, constant, or variable which is computed.
Select or directly enter a component/constant value or a variable that is to
Component (right side)
be computed.
Select an operator.
Operator [+] (Addition), [-] (Subtraction), [*] (Multiplication), [/] (Division), [%]
(Remainder)
Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately above it.
The button cannot be clicked on the first row.

Selecting a row and clicking the button reverses the order between the
button selected row and the one immediately below it.
The button cannot be clicked on the last row.

Delete row button Selecting a row and clicking the Delete row button deletes the row.

Point
(1) Up to 20 dyadic operations can be set for one operation action.
Operation actions are executed in order, from the top to the bottom.
(2) A tag component of the substitution target can be selected from a list of the
tags that are set to data-write-enabled.
Tags set to data-write-disabled are not displayed.

7 - 86 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(1) About constants
Constants can be used for [Operation tag] and [Component] that are operands.

OVERVIEW
The following shows the constant types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column.
2
Table 7.70 Constant types and values available for [Component]

CONFIGURATION
Constant type Values that can be entered in [Component]
Up to 16 characters

SYSTEM
[Number] • Signed decimal notation (Example: -521.98)
• Signed exponential notation (Example: -5.2198E03)
Up to 32 characters
[String] For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following: 3
Appendix 1.3

SPECIFICATIONS
Up to 32 characters
For characters that can be used for character strings, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.3
Specify the date and time of the MES interface module in the following
format.
Year (4 digits): YYYY 4
[Date String] Year (2 digits): YY
Month (2 digits): MM

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Day (2 digits): DD

OPERATION
Hour (2 digits): hh
Minute (2 digits): mm
Second (2 digits): ss
Example: "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss" "2005-07-01 15:12:00"
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
(2) About variables
Variables can be used for [Component] of [Substitution tag] or [Component] of
[Operation tag].
By using a variable, a value computed in [Operation action] can be assigned to a
database, or to a tag component (In the latter case, operation is performed based on
6
a value extracted from the database).
The following table shows the variable types and values that can be entered in the
[Component] column. FUNCTIONS

Point
(1) Up to 64 variables can be set for one job. 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(2) A variable is valid only in a single job execution and is not held.
(3) The initial variable value before substitution processing is the numerical value
MES INTERFACE

of zero.
FUNCTION

(4) The data type of a variable will change through operation processing of a job.
Section 7.15 (4) Type mismatch
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action
7 - 87
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Table 7.71 Variable types and values available for [Component]

Variable type Values (variable names) that can be entered in [Component]
Up to 16 characters
[Variable] For the characters that can be used for variables, refer to the following.
Appendix 1.2

(3) Setting example of [Operation action]

The following is a case in which correction power is calculated using a correction
voltage and it is assigned to a tag component (Process 1. Correction power).
The tag component value (Process 1. Correction power) obtained from the following
[Operation action] is:
(Process 1. Voltage × 100 + 50) × Current

Figure 7.67 Setting example of [Operation action]

7 - 88 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.12 Online

OVERVIEW
Online operations can be performed to the MES interface module connected to the
network.

7.12.1 Setting the target MES interface module 2

CONFIGURATION
Set the target MES interface module.
Specify the IP address, user name and password that were set in [System setting].

SYSTEM
Section 7.6 System Setting

1 Select [Online] [Transfer setup] from the menu.

3
2 The [Transfer setup] dialog box is displayed.

SPECIFICATIONS
Set the following items and click the OK button.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 7.68 [Transfer setup] dialog box

5
Table 7.72 Setting items in the [Transfer setup] dialog box

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Item Description
Specify the IP address of the MES interface module in decimal notation.
IP address
(Example) 192.168.3.3
Specify a user name. (1 to 20 characters)
User name Case-sensitive.
(Example) QJ71MES96 6
Specify a password. (8 to 14 characters)
Password Case-sensitive.
(Example) MITSUBISHI
Checks if the device of the specified IP address is connectable to the MES FUNCTIONS
Connection test
interface module.

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.12 Online
7.12.1 Setting the target MES interface module
7 - 89
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings

Write the MES interface function settings (project) to the MES interface module.

1 Perform either of the following:

• Click (Write).
• Select [Online] [Write] from the menu.

2 A dialog box asking for confirmation is

displayed. Clicking the OK button starts
writing.

3 Upon completion of writing, a dialog box

appears, asking for confirmation of the setting
update.

(When Yes button is clicked)

4 Clicking Yes refreshes the setting data to the
MES interface module.

(When No button is clicked)

5 Clicking No does not refresh the setting data to
the MES interface module.
6 Execute [Update settings] later, turn OFF the
power and then ON, or reset the PLC CPU.
7 For [Update settings], refer to the following:
8 Section 7.13.2 (3) Update settings

Figure 7.69 Writing the MES interface function settings

7 - 90 7.12 Online
7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
(1) Setting data are refreshed to the MES interface module when executing

OVERVIEW
[Update settings], turning OFF the power and then ON, or resetting the PLC
CPU.
For [Update settings], refer to the following: 2
Section 7.13.2 (3) Update settings
(2) The [System setting] data are not updated by [Update settings].

CONFIGURATION
They are refreshed to the MES interface module when the power is turned
OFF and then ON, or when the PLC CPU is reset.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.70 Confirmation dialog box displayed after writing [System setting] changes

(3) After writing the data, executing [Update settings], turning the power OFF and
then ON, or resetting the PLC CPU clears all the DB buffer.
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.12 Online
7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings
7 - 91
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.12.3 Reading the MES interface function settings

Read the MES interface function settings (project) from the MES interface module.

1 Perform either of the following:

• Click (Read).
• Select [Online] [Read] from the menu.

2 A dialog box asking for confirmation is

displayed. Clicking the OK button starts
reading.

3 Upon completion of reading, the confirmation

dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 7.71 Reading the MES interface function settings

7.12.4 Verifying the MES interface function settings

The MES interface function settings in the MES interface module are compared with those
in the currently editing project.

Point
Data of [Project name] and [Comment] in [Project setting] are not verified.

1 Selecting [Online] [Verify] from the menu

starts verification.

2 Upon completion of verification, the

confirmation dialog box appears. Click the
OK button.

Figure 7.72 Verifying the MES interface function settings

7 - 92 7.12 Online
7.12.3 Reading the MES interface function settings
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module

OVERVIEW
The working log of the MES interface module can be checked.
In [Working log], error log data of the MES interface module and job event log data can be
checked.

1 Select [Online] [View working log] from the menu.

2

CONFIGURATION
2 The [Working log] dialog box is displayed.
Operate it referring to the following descriptions.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6
Figure 7.73 [Working log] dialog box

(1) Error log

FUNCTIONS

(a) Error log data of the MES interface module are displayed.
The following explains the display of the Error log.

Table 7.73 Displays in [Error log]

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Item Description
MES INTERFACE

*1 *2 Displays the date and time on which an error (information) occurred.

Date
FUNCTION

Displays an error code of the error occurred.

Error code*3 For error codes, refer to the following:
Section 10.2 Error Code List
Summary Displays error messages and system information.
8
*1 In the case of time synchronization using SNTP, the clock time of CPU No.1 is displayed for the
time from when the module starts up until it succeeds in time query to the SNTP server.
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

*2 The date and time of an error (information) that occurred before obtaining the clock time from CPU
SERVICE AND

No.1 is not displayed.

*3 For system information, no error code is displayed.

7.12 Online
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7 - 93
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(b) Updating the error log

1 Clicking the Update button updates the error log.

(c) Clearing the error log history

1 Clicking the Clear button clears the error log history.

(2) Event log

This area displays event log data of the jobs whose executions have been completed.
There are two kinds of [Event log] data: [Startup log] and [Detailed log], by which the
job startup history and job execution details can be checked respectively.

(a) Startup log

Startup log data of the jobs, each of which has [Startup logging] setting in [Job
settings], are displayed.
Section 7.10.1 (4) Startup logging
The following explains the display of the Startup log.

1) Icons
Each of icons represents the completion status of a job.

Table 7.74 Icons and their meanings

Icon Meaning

The job was completed normally. (No detailed log)

The job was completed normally. (With detailed log)

Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays
the [View details] dialog box.

The job was canceled. (No detailed log)

The job was canceled. (With detailed log)

Selecting the job and clicking the View details button displays
the [View details] dialog box.

2) Date
Displays the date and time on which a job is activated.
3) Job
Displays a job that was activated.
4) Summary
Displays trigger conditions.

Table 7.75 Displays in [Summary]

Display Description
Startup Shows that any job other than handshake operation was activated.
Handshake start Shows that job execution of handshake operation was activated.
Handshake end Shows that job execution of handshake operation was completed.

7 - 94 7.12 Online
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(b) Detailed log
Detailed log data of the jobs, each of which has [Test mode] setting in [Job

OVERVIEW
settings], are displayed.
Section 7.10.1 (5) Test mode

1 Selecting a job of or icon and clicking the View details button displays 2
the [View details] dialog box.
The following explains the display of the [View details] dialog box.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.74 [View details] dialog box

Table 7.76 Items in the [View details] dialog box

6
Item Description
Displays a list of executed job actions.
Action list
FUNCTIONS
Selecting an action displays its action details.
Program execution result Displays a program execution result before execution of the first
(before action) action.
Program execution result
(after action)
Displays a program execution result after execution of the last action.
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Action details *1 *2 Displays the action details.

MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.12 Online
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7 - 95
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

*1 In the case of Communication action

1)

3)

2)

4)

Figure 7.75 [Action details] in the case of [Communication action]

Table 7.77 Items displayed for [Communication action]

Display Description
Type, Database, Table Displays data of [Action type], [Database], and [Table name], which
1)
name were set in [Communication action].
Displays the execution result of the SQL text.
• When succeeded
Displays [Success records].
* The following value is displayed in .
Select: No. of records that meet the Select/Update conditions
2) Execution result
Update: No. of updated records
Insert: 1 or 0
If 0 is displayed, it can be violating the database constraint.
• When failed
Displays [Failed].
Displays data of [DB-tag link settings], which were set in
3) DB-tag link settings
[Communication action].
4) SQL text The SQL text executed in [Communication action] is displayed.

*2 In the case of Operation action

1)
2)

Figure 7.76 [Action details] in the case of [Operation action]

Table 7.78 Items displayed for [Operation action]

Display Description
1) Upper row Displays the settings of [Operation action].
2) Lower row Displays values calculated in [Operation action].

7 - 96 7.12 Online
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

Point
If a job is canceled, information on how the cancellation has occurred is displayed

OVERVIEW
in the detailed log.
In the case of job cancellation due to failed tag data acquisition, however, the
detailed log information is not displayed. 2

CONFIGURATION
(c) Updating the event log

SYSTEM
1 Clicking the Update button updates the event log.

(d) Clearing the event log history 3

1 Clicking the Clear button clears the event log history.

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.12 Online
7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
7 - 97
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.12.6 Executing a job as a one-shot task

Execute a job as a one-shot task.

Doing so allows the user to check the execution result of the currently editing [Job
settings].

Point
In [One-shot execution of a job], settings of [Startup logging] and [DB Buffering]
are not executed.

1 With the edit screen of [Job settings] displayed, perform either of the following:

• Click (One-shot execution).

• Select [Online] [One-shot execution] from the menu.

2 Selecting [One-shot execution] updates the setting and perform one-shot execution
of the job, ignoring the trigger conditions.
For [Update settings], refer to the following:
Section 7.13.2 (3) Update settings

Point
All of job operations running in the MES interface module are temporarily disabled
during one-shot execution.

3 Check the execution result shown in the [View details] dialog box, which is displayed
after the execution.
For the display of the [View details] dialog box, refer to the following:
Section 7.12.5 (2) (b) Detailed log

4 After the one-shot execution, [Update settings] is performed.

Section 7.13.2 (3) Update settings

7 - 98 7.12 Online
7.12.6 Executing a job as a one-shot task
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.13 Online - Remote operation

OVERVIEW
Perform the remote operation for the MES interface module.

1 Select [Online] [Remote operation] from the menu.

2
2 The [Remote operation] dialog box is displayed.
3 Operate it referring to the following descriptions.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Figure 7.77 [Remote operation] dialog box
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.13 Online - Remote operation 7 - 99

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.13.1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function

The operation status of the MES interface function and the error status of the MES
interface module can be checked.
The following explains the display of [Module status].
The display of [Module status] is updated every 3 seconds.

Figure 7.78 [Module status]

(1) [Operation status]

Table 7.79 Items displayed for [Operation status]
Display Description
Running Displayed when the MES interface function is running.
Displayed when the MES interface function is stopped.
Stop (Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during stop of
the function.)
Displayed during operation of [Update settings], turning the power OFF
and ON, or resetting the PLC CPU.
Initializing
(Even if trigger conditions are met, no job will be executed during
initialization.)
Displayed when the operation status of the MES interface function is
Stopping
changing to the [Stop] status.
Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool is acquiring
Getting status
the status data from the MES interface module.
Displayed when MES Interface Function Configuration Tool has failed in
Acquirement failed
connection for acquiring the status data from the MES interface module.

(2) [Error status]

Table 7.80 Items displayed for [Error status]
Display Meaning
None Displayed when the MES interface module is operating normally.
Displayed when a module continuation error has occurred in the MES
Continuation error interface module.
Section 10.1.2 Error types
Displayed when a module stop error has occurred in the MES interface
Stop error module.
Section 10.1.2 Error types

7 - 100 7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.1 Checking the operation status of the MES interface function
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function

OVERVIEW
Manipulate the operation status of the MES interface function.

CONFIGURATION
Figure 7.79 [Operation]

SYSTEM
(1) Stop

1 Selecting the [Stop] radio button and clicking the Execute button stops the 3
operation of the MES interface function.

SPECIFICATIONS
Point
(1) The following operation also stops the operation of the MES interface
function.

• Click (Stop). 4
(2) If some job is being executed, the job is canceled.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

OPERATION
(2) Restart
5
1 Selecting the [Restart] radio button and clicking the Execute button restarts the

INSTALLATION AND
operation of the stopped MES interface function.

UNINSTALLATION
Point
The following operation also restarts the operation of the stopped MES interface
function.
6
• Click (Restart).
FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function
7 - 101
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(3) Update settings

1 After writing the MES interface function settings, select the [Update settings]
radio button.
Clicking the Execute button restarts the MES interface module and updates the
settings.
For writing the MES interface function settings, refer to the following:
Section 7.12.2 Writing the MES interface function settings

When [Update settings] is performed, the operation behavior is as follows:

1) During the setting update, the MES interface function is temporarily stopped.
No job is executed during the stop.
2) After the setting update, the MES interface function is operated.
3) The data changed in [Change job status] are cleared.
Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status
4) The written MES interface function settings are updated.
5) The trigger buffer area and the DB buffer area are cleared.

Point
(1) [Update settings] may change the PLC CPU control.
Ensure the safety before executing it.
(2) If [Update settings] is executed before writing the MES interface function
settings (before change), 1) and 2) in the above are performed.

(4) Clear error

1 When [Error status] is [Continuation error], take corrective actions to remove the
error cause. Then, select the [Clear error] radio button and click the Execute
button. Doing so clears the error status.
• The ERR. LED on the MES interface module turns off.
• The Current error area (buffer memory address: 140 to 145) is cleared.
• The latest error code displayed in [System monitor] of GX Developer is
cleared. ( Section 10.1.3 System monitor)

7 - 102 7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES interface function
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.13.3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution

OVERVIEW
Connection with the server computer set in [Server service settings], which is made at the
time of the previous job execution, can be checked.
The following explains the display of [Connection result of previous job execution].
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.80 [Connection result of previous job execution]

Table 7.81 Items displayed for [Result] of [Connection result at the time of
4
previous job execution]

PROCEDURE TO
Display Description

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Normally connected to the server computer at the time of the
Connected
previous job execution.
Not connected to the database server computer. This is displayed
Disconnected when normal connection could not be established at the previous job
execution and thereby the line is disconnected. 5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Point
• The display of the connection result is not changed until the next job is executed
to communicate the database server computer.
• The result of the one-shot communication with the database server computer is 6
not reflected.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.3 Checking the connection of the previous job execution
7 - 103
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.13.4 Changing the job status

The job status can be changed.

Point
The job status changed by this operation returns to the status set in [Job settings]
by the operation of [Update settings], turning the power ON and then OFF, or
resetting the PLC CPU. For [Update settings], refer to the following:
Section 7.13.2 (3) Update settings

Figure 7.81 [Change job status]

1 From [Job List], select the job whose status is to be changed.

2 Select a checkbox of the status to be changed.

Table 7.82 Selection items of [Change job status]

Item Description
• Checked
The job is enabled and thereby it is executed when the trigger
conditions are met.
Enable job
• Not checked
The job is disabled, and thereby it is not executed even if the
trigger conditions are met.
• Checked
The startup logging is enabled, and thereby startup records are
logged.
Enable startup logging *1 • Not checked
The startup logging is disabled, and thereby startup records are
not logged.
• Checked
The detailed logging is enabled, and thereby detailed records are
logged.
Enable detailed logging *2 • Not checked
The detailed logging is disabled, and thereby detailed records are
not logged.
• Checked
Disable writing to PLC Writing to PLC devices is disabled.
device • Not checked
Writing to PLC devices is enabled.
• Checked
Writing to the database is disabled.
Disable writing to database
• Not checked
Writing to the database is enabled.

7 - 104 7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.4 Changing the job status
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
*1 The startup log can be checked from [Online] - [View working log].
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module
*2 [Enable detailed logging] is selectable only when [Test mode] is selected in [Job settings].

OVERVIEW
Section 7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting
When [Enable detailed logging] is checked, [Enable startup logging] is also selected.
The detailed log can be checked from [Online] - [View working log] - [View details].
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module 2
3 Clicking the Execute button changes the job status.

CONFIGURATION
4
7.13.5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering

SYSTEM
The current and past maximum values of No. of DB buffering data and buffer utilization
can be viewed. 3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.82 [DB buffering status] 4
Table 7.83 Items displayed in [DB buffering status]

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Description

OPERATION
Display
Now Maximum*2
Displays the current number of Displays a past maximum value in the
No. of bufferings *3 buffered data (jobs that have been number of buffered data (jobs that
buffered). have been buffered). 5
Displays a past maximum value in the
Buffer utilization *1 *3 Displays the current buffer utilization.

INSTALLATION AND
buffer utilization.

UNINSTALLATION
*1 The buffer utilization is stored as an integer. (Digits after decimal point is truncated.)
Utilizations are compared between the auto-resend and manual resend areas and data of a
greater one is displayed.
*2 The maximum values are cleared when the MES interface module power is turned OFF.
When power is reapplied, No. of bufferings and Buffer utilization at the time are displayed as
maximum values. 6
*3 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition.

Point FUNCTIONS
When the buffer utilization is high, ensure the capacity of the CompactFlash card.
Section 7.6.4 (7) DB buffering capacity (Range: 16MB to 512MB, Default:
64MB)
7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.5 Checking the operation status of DB buffering
7 - 105
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering

Operate the DB buffering.

For the DB buffering function, refer to the following:
Section 6.1.9 DB buffering function

Figure 7.83 [DB buffering operation]

(1) Resending data stored in the DB buffer

1 Selecting the [Resend] radio button and clicking the Execute button executes the
resend processing of the SQL texts stored in the DB buffer, when manual resend
is selected for the jobs of the SQL texts.
If the resend processing fails, the error code, 0B83h, is output to the error log.

(2) Clearing the DB buffer

1 Selecting the [Clear] radio button and clicking the Execute button clears all of the
SQL texts that are stored in the DB buffer.

Point
If clear processing is executed during resend processing, error code 0B44h may
be output.
Section 10.2 Error Code List
If this error occurs, execute the Clear error and turn off the ERR. LED.
Section 7.13.2 (4) Clear error

7 - 106 7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.6 Operating the DB buffering
7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.13.7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering

OVERVIEW
The current and past maximum values of No. of trigger buffering data can be viewed.

CONFIGURATION
Figure 7.84 [Trigger buffering status]

SYSTEM
Table 7.84 Item displayed in [Trigger buffering status]
Description 3
Display
Now Maximum

SPECIFICATIONS
Displays a past maximum value in the
Displays the current number of
No. of bufferings *1 number of buffering data (buffered
buffering data (buffered jobs).
jobs).
*1 The space is displayed as blank during data acquisition or in the case of failure of data acquisition.

Point 4
When the number of buffering data is large, check the number of jobs and the

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
trigger condition setting.

OPERATION
1
7.13.8 Formatting the CompactFlash card
5
Format the CompactFlash card installed in the MES interface module.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6
Figure 7.85 [CompactFlash card operation]

1 Check the [Format] box and click the Execute button. FUNCTIONS

2 Executing the formatting deletes all of the CompactFlash card data.

7
Point
CONFIGURATION TOOL

When the CompactFlash card is formatted after the system operation, the MES
MES INTERFACE

interface function settings are cleared.

FUNCTION

Read out the MES interface function settings to MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool before formatting the card.
Section 7.12.3 Reading the MES interface function settings
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.13 Online - Remote operation

7.13.7 Checking the operation status of the trigger buffering
7 - 107
 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

7.14 Help

The product information of the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool and the
Connection to MELFANSweb screen can be displayed.

(1) Product information

1 Select [Help] [Product information] from the menu.

Point
The following operation also displays the product information of the MES interface
Function Configuration Tool.

• Click (Product information).

2 The [Product information] dialog box of the MES Interface Function Configuration
Tool is displayed.

Figure 7.86 [Product information] dialog box

(2) Connection to MELFANSweb

1 Select [Help] [Connection to MELFANSweb] from the menu.

2 The MELFANSweb page is displayed.

Online manuals and other information can be viewed.

7 - 108 7.14 Help

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
7.15 Precautions

OVERVIEW
This section provides precautions for using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool.

(1) When deleting an item

Deleting an item such as [Access target CPU settings] or [Device tag settings] is not 2
allowed when the selected item is used for another item such as [Job settings].

CONFIGURATION
As the error dialog box appears, identify the location, stop using it for another item,
and then delete the item.

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 7.87 Error dialog box

(2) Changing [PLC series] in [Access target CPU settings] 4

The CPU type set for [PLC series] of [Access target CPU settings] cannot be changed

PROCEDURE TO
if the change may generate illegal character strings of the devices for the tag

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
components for which [Access target CPU settings] is selected.

(3) Changing the [Prohibit data writing] setting in [Device tag settings]
The enabled data write setting cannot be changed to "Prohibit" if the tag is used for 5
the setting items provided for tag writing.

INSTALLATION AND
• [Completion notification] of [Handshake operation], substitution tags of [Select] in

UNINSTALLATION
[Communication action], etc.

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.15 Precautions 7 - 109

 7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

(4) Type mismatch

(a) Value substitution
A value is assigned to a tag component after the type of the source is converted
into the type of the tag component.
A value is assigned to a variable after the type of the variable is converted into the
type of the substitution source.
(Example) Type conversion of tag components and variables

Because the operation result is out of the range for the

integer type, the variable Temp1 is the floating-point type.

A value is assigned after being converted to the type for the tag component.
For example, when the tag component, Data1, is double-precision type data,
the type of the variable, Temp1, is converted from floating-point to
double-precision first, and then the converted value is assigned.
Figure 7.88 Type conversion of tag components and variables
If a type that cannot be converted is assigned to a tag component, the job
execution is canceled.
At this time, "Type conversion to tag component error" is displayed in the error log.

(b) Operation of numerical values

There are two kinds of numerical values: Integer type and Floating-point type.
• Integer type: Represents the bit type, single-precision type, and double-
precision type of tag components.
• Floating-point type: Represents the floating-point type of tag components.
The following table lists operation items and types of the results.

Table 7.85 Operation items and types of the results

Item Operation result
Operation of floating-point
Floating-point type in all cases
type
Addition, subtraction, In the range from -2147483648 to 2147483647: Integer type
multiplication of integer type Exceeding the above range: Floating-point type
Divisible: Integer type
Not divisible: Floating-point type
Division of integer type
When zero divide is executed, the job execution is canceled.
At this time, "zero devide error" is displayed in the error log.

7 - 110 7.15 Precautions

7 MES INTERFACE FUNCTION CONFIGURATION TOOL

1
(c) Operation between character string type values
1) + operator

OVERVIEW
Combines character strings.
Example: "ABCDEFG" + "HIJ" "ABCDEFGHIJ"
2) Other operators 2
When both of the operands can be converted to numerical values, the
operation is performed using the numerical values.

CONFIGURATION
Both or either of them cannot be converted to numerical values, the job
execution is canceled.

SYSTEM
At this time, "Operation error" is displayed in the error log.
Example: "312" × "4" "1248"
"31AH" × "4" Cancellation of job execution
3
3) Operation between a character string type value and a numerical type value

SPECIFICATIONS
Same as the case of the operation between character string type values

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

7.15 Precautions 7 - 111

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

CHAPTER 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

This section explains DB Connection Service and DB Connection Service Setting Tool.

8.1 DB Connection Service Functions

Installing DB Connection Service on the server computer allows to use the MES interface
function of the MES interface module.
The following shows the functions of the DB Connection Service.

Point
(1) It is necessary to install DB Connection Service on all the database server
computers and application server computers to be accessed from the MES
interface module.
(2) When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the
ODBC setting for the database used must be made beforehand.
Section 8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database
(3) When installing DB Connection Service on an application server computer, an
account for user program execution must be created beforehand.
(4) Changes to the DB Connection Service settings are made with DB
Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8-1 8.1 DB Connection Service Functions

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(1) ODBC connection function
The OBDC connection function connects the MES interface module and the ODBC

OVERVIEW
interface for database.
The following shows operation on the database server computer.
2
Database server
Database computer

CONFIGURATION
ODBC

SYSTEM
3
MES interface function DB Connection Service

SPECIFICATIONS
When an When SQL
access text execution
is made is failed

Access
log
SQL
failure
4
log

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Figure 8.1 ODBCconnection function

OPERATION
1 Receives SQL text from the MES interface function on the MES interface module.

2 Accesses the database via ODBC interface and executes the SQL text.
5
3 Sends the SQL text execution results to the MES interface module.

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.1 DB Connection Service Functions 8-2

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

(2) Program execution function

The program execution function executes a program on the application server
computer upon request from the MES interface module.
The following shows operation on the application server computer.

Application server
Program computer

DB Connection
MES interface function
Service

When an
access
is made

Access
log

Figure 8.2 Program execution function

1 Receives program execution requests from the MES interface function operating
on the MES interface module.

2 Executes programs on the application server computer.

3 Sends the program execution results to the MES interface module.

(3) IP filter function ( Section 8.5 (3) Limit IP addresses permit to connect)
The IP filter function can specify the IP address of the MES interface module that can
connect to the DB Connection Service to ensure the security of the server computer.
Batch specification using the mask bit length specification is possible.
If the IP filter function is not used, any MES interface module can connect to the DB
Connection Service.

8-3 8.1 DB Connection Service Functions

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(4) Log output function
DB Connection Service outputs an access log and an SQL failure log.

OVERVIEW
(a) Access log ( Section 8.5 (4) Output access log)
The communication contents between the MES interface module and DB
Connection Service are output to the access log.
2
For access log specifications, refer to the following.

CONFIGURATION
Section 8.8.1 Access log

SYSTEM
(b) SQL failure log ( Section 8.5 (5) Output SQL failed log)
If data cannot be updated/inserted normally due to no table, etc. at SQL text
execution, the error contents are output to the SQL failure log. 3
For SQL failure log specifications, refer to the following.
Section 8.8.2 SQL failure log

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.1 DB Connection Service Functions 8-4

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database

When installing DB Connection Service on a database server computer, the ODBC setting
for the database used must be made beforehand.
For ODBC setting, refer to the following.
Manuals and online help for the database software and basic software (OS) used

(1) For Oracle 8i, 9i, 10g

(The following shows a setting example using Oracle 9i with Microsoft Windows
XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• TNS service name*2: SAMPLETNS
• OracleHome: OraHome92
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The TNS service name is the name for accessing an Oracle database.
The name is entered when installing Oracle and creating a database instance.
This can be checked with [Configuration and Migration Tools] - [Net Manager] - [Service naming] of
Oracle .
(Start)

1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the

Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].

2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays

[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

(To the next page)

8-5 8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(From the previous page)

OVERVIEW
3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays
[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the <<System DSN >> tag, then click the
Add button.
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3
4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is

SPECIFICATIONS
displayed, then select [Oracle in OraHome92].

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5 The [Oracle ODBC Driver Configuration] dialog
box is displayed, then set the following.
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS 5
• [TNS Service Name]: SAMPLETNS

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6 Clicking the Connection test button displays the
6
[Oracle ODBC Driver Connect] dialog box. Enter
the user name and password, then click the
FUNCTIONS
OK button.

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE

7 If the connection is normal, the confirmation dialog

box appears.
FUNCTION

8 Click the OK button in the [Oracle ODBC

Driver Configuration] dialog box. 8
9 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL

Source Administrator] dialog box.

SERVICE AND

(End)

8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8-6

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

(2) For Microsoft SQL Server 2000 and MSDE 2000

(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft SQL Server 2000 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• Server name*2: SAMPLESRV
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The server name is the name for accessing a Microsoft SQL Server 2000 database.
This name is entered when installing Microsoft SQL Server 2000.
This can be checked with the SQL Server service manager server.

(Start)

1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the

Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].

2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays

[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays

[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the <<System DSN >> tag, then click the
Add button.

(To the next page)

8-7 8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(From the previous page)

OVERVIEW
4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is
displayed, then select [SQL Server].

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
5 The [Create a New Data Source to SQL Server]
dialog box is displayed, then set the following.
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS 3
• [Server name]: SAMPLESRV

SPECIFICATIONS
6 Select the [With SQL Server authentication using 4
a login ID and password entered by the user.]
radio button, then enter [Login ID] and [Password].

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
5

INSTALLATION AND
7 In the [ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup] dialog

UNINSTALLATION
box, click the [Test Data Source] button to check
that the connection is normal.

FUNCTIONS
8 Click the OK button in the [SQL Server ODBC
Data Source Test] dialog box.

9 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Microsoft 7

CONFIGURATION TOOL

SQL Server Setup] dialog box.

MES INTERFACE

10 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data

FUNCTION

Source Administrator] dialog box.

(End)
8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8-8

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

(3) For Microsoft Access 2000 and Microsoft Access 2003

(The following shows a setting example using Microsoft Access 2003 with
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System.)
Set the following conditions.
• Data source name*1: SAMPLEDS
• Database name*2: C \ mes \ sampledb.mdb
*1 Data source name can be set as desired.
For [Data source name] in [Server service settings], use the name set with this setting.
*2 The database name is the name for accessing a Microsoft Access 2003 database.
Specify a database file path created with Microsoft Access 2003.

(Start)

1 Clicking [Performance and Maintenance] on the

Control Panel displays the [Performance and
Maintenance] dialog box.
To display the Control Panel, select [Start]
[Control Panel].

2 Clicking [Administrative Tools] displays

[Administrative Tools] dialog box.

3 Double clicking [Data Sources (ODBC)] displays

[ODBC Data Source Administrator] dialog box.
Select the <<System DSN >> tag, then click the
Add button.

(To the next page)

8-9 8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(From the previous page)

OVERVIEW
4 The [Create New Data Source] dialog box is
displayed, then select [Microsoft Access
Driver(*.mdb)].
2

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
5 The [ODBC Microsoft Access Setup] dialog box is 3
displayed. Set the following and click the
[Database] selection button.

SPECIFICATIONS
• [Data source name]: SAMPLEDS

4
6 The [Select Database] dialog box is displayed.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Select the following and click the OK button.
• [Folder]: C \ mes
• [Database Name]: sampledb.mdb

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
7 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Microsoft
Access Setup] dialog box.

8 Click the OK button in the [ODBC Data 6

Source Administrator] dialog box.
(End)
FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.2 Setting ODBC to the Database 8 - 10

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool

1 Select [Start] [All Programs] [MELSOFT Application] [MES Interface] DB

Connection Service Setting Tool of Microsoft Windows .

2 DB Connection Service Setting Tool starts.

Point
Only one DB Connection Service Setting Tool can be activated.

8 - 11 8.3 Starting DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
8.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

OVERVIEW
This section explains the screen structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool.

8.4.1 Screen structure

2

CONFIGURATION
Menu
Section 8.4.2 Menu configuration

SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
4

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
Figure 8.3 Screen structure

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8.4.1 Screen structure
8 - 12
 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.4.2 Menu configuration

This section shows each command provided on the menu bar.

(1) File

Figure 8.4 File menu

Table 8.1 File menu items

Reference
Item Description
section
Import Imports an existing file.
Section 8.6
Export Exports the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file.
Exit Exits the DB Connection Service Setting Tool. —

(2) Help

Figure 8.5 Help menu

Table 8.2 Help menu items

Reference
Item Description
section
Product information Displays product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
Section 8.7
Connect to MELFANSweb Displays the [Connect to MELFANSweb] screen.

8 - 13 8.4 Screen Structure of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8.4.2 Menu configuration
8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

OVERVIEW
The following shows how to change the DB Connection Service settings.

1 Set the following items, then click the Reflect settings button.
2
2 After updating the settings, check for an error by selecting [Administrative Tools] -
[Event Viewer] in Windows .

CONFIGURATION
3 Section 10.1 Error Codes

SYSTEM
Point
(1) Change the DB Connection Service settings when a job using the DB 3
Connection Service is not operating.
The status is as follows:

SPECIFICATIONS
• The PLC is powered OFF.
• The MES interface function operation is stopped with [Online] - [Remote
operation] of [MES Interface Function Configuration Tool].
Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the operation status of the MES
interface function
4
(2) When reflecting the settings with a job using DB Connection Service is

PROCEDURE TO
running, the execution of the connected job is canceled and a communication

SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
error occurs.
Also, for a job to which [Enable DB buffering] is selected, any SQL text is
buffered in the DB buffer.
5

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 - 14

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

Figure 8.6 DB Connection Service Setting Tool

Table 8.3 DB Setting items of Connection Service Setting Tool

Item Description
Service port (required) Set the port number where the DB Connection Service operates.
Set timeout time (Unit: second) when no response is returned for writing/
Timeout (required) reading the database values on server computer from the MES interface
module and after program execution.
Limit IP addresses which
Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect.
permit to connect
Output access log Set whether or not to output the access log.
Output SQL failed log Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.

(1) Service port (required) (Range: 1024 to 65535, Default: 5112)

Set the port number where the DB Connection Service operates.*1 *2
The set port number is used for communications with the MES interface module.
*1 Set the same value in [Service port] as the one set in [Server service settings] - [Port No.] of MES
Interface Function Configuration Tool.
Section 7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting
*2 Specify the number of the port that is not being used by any database or another application.
Usually, it need not be changed.

(2) Timeout (required) (Range: 1 to 3600, Default: 30)

Set timeout time (Unit: second) when no response is returned for writing/reading the
database values on server computer from the MES interface module and after
program execution.
When a timeout occurs, the connection with the MES interface module is
disconnected and job execution is canceled.

8 - 15 8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(3) Limit IP addresses permit to connect

OVERVIEW
(a) Specify whether or not to set the IP addresses permitted to connect.
By checking the [Limit IP addresses permit to connect] box, connection is only
permitted from the MES interface module with the set IP address.
When not checking the box, connection is permitted from any MES interface 2
module.

CONFIGURATION
Point

SYSTEM
When selecting [Limit IP addresses permit to connect], setting at least one IP
address with connection permission is required and up to 64 can be set.
3
(b) When selecting [Limit IP addresses permit to connect], set the IP addresses with

SPECIFICATIONS
connection permission.

1) Adding an IP address with connection permission

4
1 Set the following items, then click the Add button.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Table 8.4 Setting items when [Limit IP addresses permit to connect] is selected

OPERATION
Item Description
IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation.
Mask bit length (Blank)

5
2 The IP address is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].

INSTALLATION AND
(Example) 192.168.0.64

UNINSTALLATION
3 Set the following items, then click the Add button.

Table 8.5 Setting items when [Limit IP addresses permit to connect] is selected 6
Item Description
IP address Set IP addresses permitted to connect in decimal notation.
Set the enabled bit length of the set IP address.
Mask bit length FUNCTIONS
(Range: 1 to 32)

4 The IP address/mask bit length is added to the [Permitted IP addresses list].

(Example) 192.168.0.64/26 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 - 16

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

(Example) When specifying IP addresses in a batch

If the [IP address] is set to [192.168.0.64] and [Mask bit length] is set to [26], the
IP addresses with permission connection are [192.168.0.64] to [192.168.0.127],
whose logical product is [192.168.0.64].

IP address permitted 192 168 0 ?

to connect 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ? ? ? ? ? ?

255 255 255 192

Mask bit length (26) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Logical product

192 168 0 64
IP address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

The range in which the logical product above is met is between 192.168.0.64 to 127.
192 168 0 64
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

192 168 0 127

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Figure 8.7 Specifying IP addresses in a batch

2) Deleting an IP address with connection permission

1 Select the IP address to be deleted from [Permitted IP addresses list], then click
the Delete button.

(4) Output access log

(Default: Output)

(a) Set whether or not to output the access log.

(b) When selecting [Output access log], set the following items.

Table 8.6 Setting items when [Output access log] is selected

Item Description
Output destination Set the output destination of the log file.
Access log capacity Set the file capacity per access log and number of files.

1) Output destination (Default: "dbConnector.log")

Set the output destination of the log file.
If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder.
If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and [Access log output error]
R
is output to [Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer] of Windows .
2) Access log capacity (Range: 1 to 10 MB × 2 to 100 files, Default: 1 MB × 10
files)
Set the file capacity per access log and number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, a new log file which copies the
original log file name with adding a number is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, the file is deleted
from the oldest one.

8 - 17 8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(Example) When [Output destination] is set to [dbConnector.log] and [Access
capacity] is set to [1MB × 3 files]

OVERVIEW
Capacity over
Ne
w

1 dbConnector.log dbConnector.log
2
Re
na
me

CONFIGURATION
dbConnector.log.001 dbConnector.log.001 Files within the specified

SYSTEM
Re number of files
na
me

dbConnector.log.002 dbConnector.log.002 3
De
let
e

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 8.8 File capacity per access log and number of files

1 When [dbConnector.log] exceeds 1M byte, it is renamed as

[dbConnector.log.001].
4
A new [dbConnector.log] is created and logging resumes.

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND

OPERATION
2 [dbConnector.log.001] is renamed as [dbConnector.log.002].

3 The total number of files exceeds 3 if [dbConnector.log.002] is renamed,

therefore [dbConnector.log.002] is deleted.
5
(5) Output SQL failed log

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
(Default: Output)

(a) Set whether or not to output the SQL failure log.

(b) When selecting [Output SQL failed log], set the following items.

Table 8.7 Setting items when [Output SQL failed log] is selected
6
Item Description
Output destination Set the output destination of the log file.
SQL failed log capacity Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files. FUNCTIONS

1) Output destination (Default: "SQLFailed.log")

Set the output destination of the log file.
If no output destination is set, the log is output to the install folder. 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

If a read-only file is specified, the log is not output and [SQL failure log output
R
MES INTERFACE

error] is output to [Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer] of Windows .

FUNCTION

2) SQL failed log capacity (Range: 1 to 10 MB × 2 to 100 files, Default: 1 MB × 10

files)
Set the file capacity per SQL failure log and number of files.
If the log exceeds the capacity for one file, a new log file which copies the 8
original log file name with adding a number is created.
If the total number of files exceeds the set number of files, the file is deleted
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

from the oldest one.

8.5 Setting Items of DB Connection Service Setting Tool 8 - 18

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.6 Importing/Exporting Files

Import/export files.

(1) Import
Import a saved file.

1 Select [File] [Import] from the menu.

2 The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

Set the following items, then click the Open button.

Figure 8.9 [Open] dialog box

Table 8.8 Setting items in the [Open] dialog box

Item Description
Look in Select the location where the file is stored.
File name Specify the name of the file to be imported.
Select a type of the file to be imported.
Files of type
• DB connection service setting files

Point
3 When importing a file, use the one that was stored by the export function.
4 Do not edit any export file.

8 - 19 8.6 Importing/Exporting Files

8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(2) Export
Export the DB Connection Service Setting Tool to a file.

OVERVIEW
1 Select [File] [Export] from the menu.

2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed. 2

Set the following items, then click the button.

CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM
3

SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 8.10 [Save As] dialog box

Table 8.9 Setting items in the [Save As] dialog box

Save in
Item Description
Select the location where the file is to be saved.
4
File name Specify the name of the file to be saved.

PROCEDURE TO
Select a type of the file to be saved.

SETTINGS AND
Files of type

OPERATION
• DB connection service setting files

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
6

FUNCTIONS

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL
MES INTERFACE
FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.6 Importing/Exporting Files 8 - 20

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.7 Help

The product information of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool and the Connect to
MELFANSweb screen can be displayed.

(1) Product information

1 Select [Help] [Product information] from the menu.

2 The [Product information] dialog box of the DB Connection Service Setting Tool is
displayed.

Figure 8.11 [Product information] dialog box

(2) Connect to MELFANSweb

1 Select [Help] [Connect to MELFANSweb] from the menu.

2 The MELFANSweb page is displayed.

3 Online manuals and other information can be viewed.

8 - 21 8.7 Help
8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
8.8 Output Log Specifications

OVERVIEW
This section explains the output log format for the SQL failure log and access log shown
Section 8.8.1 or later.

[Date] [Error code] Message Line feed 2

Table 8.10 Output log format for the SQL failure log and access log

CONFIGURATION
Item Description
1st to 4th bytes at the head

SYSTEM
Year Four-digit integer for year (Numbers)
of the line
5th byte at the head of the
Year - Month delimiter "/" (Slash: 2Fh)
line
6th and 7th bytes at the
3
Month 2-digit integer (01 to 12) (Numbers)
head of the line

SPECIFICATIONS
8th byte at the head of the
Month - Day delimiter "/" (Slash: 2Fh)
line
9th and 10th bytes at the
Day 2-digit integer (01 to 31) (Numbers)
head of the line
11th byte at the head of the
Day - Hour delimiter
line
" " (Space: 20h)
4
12th and 13th bytes at the
[Date] Hour 2-digit integer (00 to 23) (Numbers)
head of the line

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
14th byte at the head of the

OPERATION
Hour - Minute delimiter ":" (Colon: 3Ah)
line
15th and 16th bytes at the
Output Minute 2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
head of the line
character
Minute - Second delimiter
17th byte at the head of the
":" (Colon: 3Ah) 5
line
18th and 19th bytes at the

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Second 2-digit integer (00 to 59) (Numbers)
head of the line
20th byte at the head of the
Second - Millisecond delimiter "." (Period: 2Eh)
line
21th and 23th bytes at the
Millisecond 3-digit integer (000 to 999) (Numbers)
head of the line
24th byte at the head of the 6
Millisecond - Error code delimiter " " (Space: 20h)
line
25th and 34th bytes at the Alphanumeric character of "0x" + 8-digit
[Error code]*1
head of the line hexadecimal
FUNCTIONS
35th byte at the head of the
Error code - Message delimiter " " (Space: 20h)
line
36th byte at the head of the
Message According to the specifications of each log
line or later 7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

Line feed End of line CR + LF (0Dh, 0Ah)

*1 For error codes, refer to the following:

MES INTERFACE

Section 10.2 Error Code List

FUNCTION

8
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.8 Output Log Specifications 8 - 22

 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

8.8.1 Access log

The communication contents of the MES interface module and DB Connection Service are
output to the access log.
The following explains the access log contents.

(1) Service start/end

(a) Start

Table 8.11 Service start

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] Service Start
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 Service Start

(b) End

Table 8.12 Service end

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] Service Stop
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 Service Stop

(2) Connection/disconnection from the MES interface module

(a) Connection

Table 8.13 Connection from the MES interface module

Item Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Connected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]:
Output log format
[Connection ID]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Connected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID

(b) Disconnection

Table 8.14 Disconnection from the MES interface module

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:MIFWS Connected:[Source IP]:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:MIFWS Disconnected:192.168.3.3:DataSource:ID

(3) Connection/disconnection to a database

(a) Connection

Table 8.15 Connection to a database

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Connect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Connection result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:DB Connect:DataSource:ID:Success

*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed

8 - 23 8.8 Output Log Specifications

8.8.1 Access log
8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

1
(b) Disconnection

Table 8.16 Disconnection to a database

OVERVIEW
Item Description
[Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:DB Disconnect:[Target data source]: [Connection ID]:[Connection
Output log format
result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:DB Disconnect:DataSource:ID:Success
2
*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed

CONFIGURATION
(4) SQL text reception/processing results

SYSTEM
(a) SELECT

Table 8.17 SELECT 3

Item Description

SPECIFICATIONS
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*2]([No. of selected records])
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:SQL<SELECT COL from TABLE;>:Success(1)

*2 When succeeded: Success ([No. of selected records]), when failed: Failed only

(b) UPDATE
4
Table 8.18 UPDATE
Item Description

PROCEDURE TO
SETTINGS AND
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*3]([No. of updated records])

OPERATION
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:SQL<UPDATE TABLE SET COL = '';>:Success(1)

*3 When succeeded: Success ([No. of updated records]), when failed: Failed only

(c) INSERT 5
Table 8.19 INSERT

INSTALLATION AND
UNINSTALLATION
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:SQL<[SQL text]>:[Processing result*4]([No. of inserted records])
2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:SQL<INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('')
Example
;>:Success(1)

*4 When succeeded: Success ([No. of inserted records]), when failed: Failed only 6
(d) COMMIT

Table 8.20 COMMIT

FUNCTIONS
Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:COMMIT:[Processing result*5]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:COMMIT:Success

*5 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed

7
CONFIGURATION TOOL

(e) ROLLBACK
MES INTERFACE

Table 8.21 ROLLBACK

FUNCTION

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:ROLLBACK:[Processing result*6]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:ROLLBACK:Success 8
*6 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed
DB CONNECTION

SETTING TOOL
SERVICE AND

8.8 Output Log Specifications

8.8.1 Access log
8 - 24
 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

(f) GetNext (Request for next record)

Table 8.22 GetNext (Request for next record)

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] SID [Session ID]:GetNext:[Processing result*1]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 SID 0:GetNext:Success

*1 When succeeded: Success, when failed: Failed

(5) Program execution reception/processing results

Table 8.23 Program execution reception/processing results
Item Description
[Date] [Error code] SID ProgramExec:[Source IP]:<[Command line]>[Processing result*2]
Output log format
([Return value])
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 ProgramExec:192.168.3.3:<hoge.exe>:Success(0)

*2 When succeeded: Success ([Return value]), when failed: Failed only

8.8.2 SQL failure log

When an SQL text is executed on a database, if an error occurs, the error contents are
output to the SQL failure log.
The following shows the SQL failure log contents.

Table 8.24 SQL failure log

Item Description
Output log format [Date] [Error code] [Target data source]:[SQL text]
Example 2005/07/01 12:00:00.000 0 × 00000000 DataSource:INSERT INTO TABLE ( COL ) VALUES ('') ;

8 - 25 8.8 Output Log Specifications

8.8.2 SQL failure log
 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

9
CHAPTER 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

XML MESSAGE
FORMAT
This section explains the XML message format used with the XML processing function.
Refer to the following for the XML processing function.
Section 6.2 XML Processing Function
This section explains the functions of the XML message format.
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Instruction of job execution
Table 9.1 Instruction of job execution
Function Description
• Executes the specified job only one time regardless of whether the
One-shot execution trigger conditions and jobs are enabled or not.
• If the specified job is being executed, the job is not carried out again.
• Puts the job into the status in which the specified job is executed when

APPENDICES
the trigger conditions are met (Job enabled status).
Validate • This is the same operation as that of enabling the MES Interface
Function Configuration Tool job.
Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status
• Puts the job into the status in which the job is not executed even if the
trigger conditions are met (Job disabled status).
Invalidate • This is the same operation as that of disabling the MES Interface
Function Configuration Tool job.
Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status

INDEX

9-1
 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

9.1 XML Message Format Definition

The XML message format is comprised of request messages and response messages.
This section explains the XML message format definition.

Point
1. The maximum size of request message after applying URL encoding that the
MES interface module can process is 128K bytes.
If the size exceeds 128K bytes, an error code is returned as the response
message.
Section 10.2.3 Error codes returned in XML response messages

(1) Request message (REQUEST tag)

Table 9.2 Request message (REQUEST tag)
Item Description
Omission Not possible
<REQUEST type = "[Instruction of job execution]" jobname = "[Job
Format
name]"/>
Specifies the instruction of job execution. (required)
"oneshot": One-shot execution
type
Attribute "validate": Validate
"invalidate": Invalidate
jobname Specifies the job name to be executed.
Contents None
Sub-component None

(a) One-shot execution (An example for one-shot execution of the job named
Pro01)*1
<?xml version = "1.0"?>
<REQUEST type = "oneshot" jobname = "Pro01"/>

(b) Validate (An example enabling the job named Pro01)

<?xml version = "1.0"?>
<REQUEST type = "validate" jobname = "Pro01"/>

(c) Invalidate (An example disabling the job named Pro01)

<?xml version = "1.0"?>
<REQUEST type = "invalidate" jobname = "Pro01"/>
*1 When one-shot execution is performed in the job for which [Handshake operation] is specified as a
trigger condition, [Completion notification] is turned ON.
Turn OFF [Completion notification] in the sequence program.

9-2 9.1 XML Message Format Definition

9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

9
(2) Response message (RESPONSE tag)

XML MESSAGE
Table 9.3 Response message (RESPONSE tag)

FORMAT
Item Description
Omission Not possible
Format <RESPONSE status = "[Job execution result]" code = "[Error code]"/> 10
The request message reception result is returned.

TROUBLESHOOTING
status "accepted": Succeeded
"failed": Failed
Attribute
If an error occurs, the error code is returned.
code Section 10.2.3 Error codes returned in XML
response messages
Contents None
Sub-component None

(a) Succeeded

APPENDICES
<?xml version = "1.0"?>
<RESPONSE status = "accepted"/>

(b) Failed
<?xml version = "1.0"?>
<RESPONSE status = "failed" code = "0x4117XXXX"/>

INDEX

9.1 XML Message Format Definition 9-3

 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

9.2 XML Message Format Sending Method

This section explains the sending method and sample program of the XML message
format.

9.2.1 XML message format sending method

(1) Send destination URL

When the basic authentication information and the XML request message for a
function are sent to the URL below with the HTTP POST method, the function is
executed and the XML response message is returned by HTTP.

[http://[MES interface module IP address]/MESXML.CGI]

(2) HTTP basic authentication

Accessing the URL shown in (1) requires HTTP basic authentication of the MES
interface module.
The HTTP basic authentication uses the account information set with [Account
setting].
Section 7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting

(3) URL encoding

To use HTTP, it is necessary to use URL encoding to convert special characters in the
XML request message (Escape).
The following shows the URL encoding rules and an example of URL encoding
application.

(a) URL encoding rules

Table 9.4 URL encoding rules

Characters before conversion Character string after conversion
[A-Z] [a-z] [0-9] * - . @ _ Same (not converted)
Space "+" (Plus sign)
Others "%" +2-digit hexadecimal character code

(b) URL encoding application example

Table 9.5 URL encoding application example

Characters before conversion Character string after conversion
% "%25"
& "%26"
+ "%2B"
= "%3D"
? "%3F"

9-4 9.2 XML Message Format Sending Method

9.2.1 XML message format sending method
9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

9
9.2.2 Sample program

XML MESSAGE
This section shows a sample program written in Java.

FORMAT
import java.io.*;

import java.net.*;
10
class JobStart {

TROUBLESHOOTING
public static void main(String[] args) {

try{

// Storage of request message

String requestMessage = "<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>";

requestMessage += "<REQUEST type=\"oneshot\" jobname=\"Pro01\"/>";

System.err.println(requestMessage );// Send contents display

// Conversion with URL encording

APPENDICES
requestMessage = URLEncoder.encode(requestMessage, "UTF-8");
// POST
URL url = new URL("http://192.168.3.3/MESXML.cgi");

URLConnection conn = url.openConnection();

conn.setDoOutput(true);
conn.setUseCaches(false);

INDEX
conn.setRequestProperty("Content-type", "text/xml");
conn.setRequestProperty("Content-length", String.valueOf(requestMessage.length()));

// BASIC authentication
String account = "QJ71MES96:MITSUBISHI";

String enc_account = new String(encodeBase64(account));

conn.setRequepstProperty("Authorization", "Basic " + enc_account);
OutputStream outStream = conn.getOutputStream();

PrintStream printStream = new PrintStream(outStream);

printStream.print(requestMessage);

printStream.close();

InputStream inputStream = conn.getInputStream();

BufferedReader reader = new BufferedReader(new InputStreamReader(inputStream));

String STr;

while ((str = reader.readLine()) != null){

System.out.println(str);// Receive contents display

reader.close();

}catch(Exception e){
System.err.println("Errorn\n" + e);

(To the next page)

9.2 XML Message Format Sending Method

9.2.2 Sample program
9-5
 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

(From the previous page)

//Base64 encode
static String encodeBase64(String inStr) {
String refTable = "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789+/";
int rest = inStr.length()%3;
if ( rest != 0)
inStr += new String(new byte[] {0, 0, 0}).substring(rest);
byte[] inBuf = inStr.getBytes();
StringBuffer outStr = new StringBuffer();
for (int i = 0; i < inBuf.length; i+= 3) {
int tempBuf = inBuf[i]<<16 | inBuf[i+1]<<8 | inBuf[i+2];
for (int j = 18; j >= 0; j -= 6)
outStr.append(refTable.charAt((tempBuf >> j) & 0x3f));
}
if (rest != 0) {
outStr.delete(outStr.length() - 3 + rest, outStr.length());
outStr.append("===".substring(rest));
}
return new String(outStr);
}
}

9-6 9.2 XML Message Format Sending Method

9.2.2 Sample program
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

XML MESSAGE
FORMAT
The following flowchart shows the troubleshooting procedure for errors that might occur
during operation of the MES interface module.
10
Start

TROUBLESHOOTING
No
Is the RUN LED ON? Identify the error and take corrective actions.
Section 10.3.3 (1) Troubleshooting about LED
Yes indication and I/O signals

Is the ERR. LED ON Yes By the error code, identify the error and take corrective
or flashing? actions.

APPENDICES
• Section 10.1 Error Codes
No • Section 10.2 Error Code List

Is the MES interface No

Activate the MES interface function.
function working?
• Section 7.13.1 Checking the operation status of
Yes the MES interface function
• Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the operation
status of the MES interface function

INDEX
No
Is the job enabled? Enable the job.
• Section 7.13.4 Changing the job status
Yes • Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT

Is there any problem on No Check the log output to the server computer, identify
the server computer? the error and take corrective actions.
• Section 10.1 Error Codes
Yes • Section 10.2 Error Code List

Is there an error code in No By the error code, identify the error and take corrective
the response message returned by the
actions.
XML processing function?
• Chapter 9 XML MESSAGE FORMAT
Yes • Section 10.2 Error Code List

According to each of the following, identify the error

and take corrective actions.

• Section 10.3.3 (1) Troubleshooting about LED indication and I/O signals
• Section 10.3.3 (2) Troubleshooting about network connection
• Section 10.3.3 (3) Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and
access target CPU
• Section 10.3.3 (4) Troubleshooting about the DB interface function

Figure 10.1 Troubleshooting flowchart for operation of the MES interface module

10 - 1
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.1 Error Codes

This section explains how to find an error code.

10.1.1 Finding an error code

By an error code, check the error details and take corrective actions.
Section 10.2 Error Code List

(1) Check an error of the MES interface module

An error (error code) of the MES interface module can be checked by any of the
following:
• [System monitor] of GX Developer ( Section 10.1.3 System monitor)
• Current error area and Error log area in the buffer memory
Section 3.6.4 Current error area
Section 3.6.5 Error log area
• [MES interface function configuration tool] - [Working log] (Error log)
Section 7.12.5 Checking the working log of the MES interface module

(2) Checking an error of the server computer

An error can be checked by log data output to the server computer.
• Access log of DB Connection Service ( Section 8.8.1 Access log)
• SQL failure log of DB Connection Service ( Section 8.8.2 SQL failure log)
• Event log of Windows
An error of DB Connection Service is output.
It can be checked by selecting [Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer] in
Windows .

Point
If more than one error are displayed in Error log of [Working log] or by error dialog
boxes, take corrective actions in chronological order.

10 - 2 10.1 Error Codes

10.1.1 Finding an error code
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
10.1.2 Error types

XML MESSAGE
Errors are divided into the following two types.

FORMAT
(1) Module stop error
(a) The ERR. LED flashes.
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
(b) When a module stop error occurs, the MES interface function of the MES
interface module is stopped.
Correct the error according to the error code, and turn the power OFF and then
ON or reset the PLC CPU.

(c) An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the
error location.
For how to find an error code, refer to the following:

APPENDICES
Section 10.1.1 Finding an error code

(2) Module continuation error

(a) The ERR. LED turns on.

(b) When a module continuation error occurs, the MES interface module continues
operation of the MES interface function.
By correcting the error according to the error code, the correction can be reflected

INDEX
in the operation.
Since the ERR. LED stays ON, turn it off by the following:
• Error clear request (Y10)
• [Online] - [Remote operation] - [Clear error]
Section 7.13.2 (4) Clear error

(c) An error code is stored in the buffer memory area that is corresponding to the
error location.
For how to find an error code, refer to the following:
Section 10.1.1 Finding an error code

10.1 Error Codes

10.1.2 Error types
10 - 3
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.1.3 System monitor

The module status of the MES interface module can be checked from [System monitor].

(1) Checking the module status and error code in [Module's Detailed Information]
of the diagnostics function.
(a) Operation procedure

1 Select [Diagnostics] [System monitor] from the menu of GX Developer.

2 The [Module's Detailed Information] dialog box is displayed.

Operate it referring to the following descriptions.

Figure 10.2 [Module's Detailed Information] dialog box

(b) Display items

The following shows the detailed information of the MES interface module.

Table 10.1 Displayed items

Item Description
Module name Displays the name of the mounted module.
I/O Address Displays the head I/O signal number of the module.
Module
Implementation Position Displays the slot position where the module is installed.
Product information Displays the product information. *1
Module access Displays that it is accessible when the Watchdog timer error (X1F) is OFF.
Module
Status of I/O Address Displays whether or not the module set with parameters by the user matches the
Information
Verify module that is actually mounted.
Displays the latest error code.
Present Error For error codes, refer to the following:
Error Display
Section 10.2 Error Code List
Error History Displays the error history recorded from power-ON to the present time with error codes.

*1 The suffix of the product information code represents the function version of the module.
The function version of the MES interface module is B or later.
(Example) When the suffix is "B", it means the module is of function version B.

10 - 4 10.1 Error Codes

10.1.3 System monitor
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(2) Checking the LED status and the switch setting status in [H/W Information] of

XML MESSAGE
the diagnostics function.

FORMAT
(a) Operation procedure

1 Click the H/W Information button in [Module's Detailed Information]. 10

TROUBLESHOOTING
2 The [H/W Information] dialog box is displayed.
Operate it referring to the following descriptions.

APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 10.3 [H/W Information] dialog box

(b) Displayed items

The MES interface module information that is stored in the following buffer
memory areas is displayed.

Table 10.2 Displayed items

No. Display Buffer memory Address
0000: RUN LED OFF, ERR. LED OFF
H/W LED
1 8000: RUN LED ON, ERR. LED OFF 0, 1
Information
C000: RUN LED ON, ERR. LED ON
1 Switch 1 status (Mode setting) 2
H/W SW
2 Switch 2 status (Default operation setting/Battery error detection setting) 3
Information
3 Switch 3 status (Response monitoring time setting) 4

10.1 Error Codes

10.1.3 System monitor
10 - 5
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.2 Error Code List

The error code list is shown below.

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0001h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Correct [Access target CPU
settings].
No response has been received from
0002h Response time-out error • Check the communication cable
the other station.
status and access target CPU
status.
0041h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0044h description of the problem.
A processing code that is not • Check the CPU(s) on the access
0045h Processing code error
supported was issued. route.
Station No. specification The specified station number is • Check the station number setting in
0046h
error incorrect. [Access target CPU settings].
• Check the CPU(s) on the access
0047h Receive data error Data have not been received.
route.
0048h
0049h
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
004Dh
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
004Eh
description of the problem.
0050h
0051h
The RUN write setting of the Ethernet • Check the Ethernet module setting
0055h Channel No. error
module is disabled. of the access target CPU.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0064h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Set routing parameters to the
0065h Routing parameter error No routing parameter has been set. MELSECNET/H and/or
MELSECNET/10 modules.
0066h Data send error Failed to send the data.
• Check the CPU(s) on the access
0067h Data receive error Failed to receive the data.
route.
0080h Read size error The read size is not correct.
• Correct the device type entered in
0081h Device type error The specified device type is invalid.
[Device tag settings].
The specified device number is out of • Correct the device number entered
0082h Device No. error
range. in [Device tag settings].
The number of device points is
0083h Device point error • Check the CPU(s) on the access
incorrect.
route.
0084h Write size error The write size is not correct.

(To the next page)

10 - 6 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
• Set a correct link parameter for the
0085h Link parameter error The link parameter is corrupted.
PLC CPU(s) on the access route.
0087h
to System error —
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative, explaining a detailed
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
0089h description of the problem.
A request that is not permitted during • Check the CPU(s) on the access
00D2h RUN time disable error
RUN was issued. route.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
00D4h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
The receive data length or the byte
00D7h Receive data length error
length exceeded the limit. • Check the cables on the access
The communication protocol is not route.
00D8h Protocol error
correct.

APPENDICES
00D9h Address error The address is not correct. • Check the CPU(s) on the access
00DBh Write error Writing is not executable. route.
The specified station number does not • Check the station number setting in
00E0h Station No. error
exist. [Access target CPU settings].
The access target CPU is not capable • Check the PLC series in [Access
00E1h Processing mode error
of processing the request. target CPU settings].
• Correct the "U \G " buffer
Intelligent function module The specified intelligent (or special)
00E2h memory data in [Device tag
error function module is faulty.

INDEX
settings].
• Check the CPU(s) on the access
00E3h Other data error The request data has an error.
route.
A link module on the access route
received a request that cannot be • Check the access route referring to
00E4h Link specification error
handled. (The access route is not the accessible range.
supported.)
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
00E8h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
The access target is disconnected • Reconnect the access target on the
00E9h Link timeout
from the link during the processing. access route.
• Examine the hardware of the
The receive buffer of the access target
00EAh Special module BUSY intelligent (or special) function
is full, or is not ready for reception.
module.
The receive buffer of the access target
00ECh Access target BUSY • Check the access target.
is full, or is not ready for reception.
An request was made to a link stop • Restore the link to connect the
00F0h Link error
station. station on the access route.
The specified intelligent (or special)
00F1h Special module bus error function module is not ready for
• Examine the hardware of the
processing.
intelligent (or special) function
No response has been received from
module.
00F2h Special module timeout the specified intelligent (or special)
function module.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 7
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
0100h
to • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0104h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0110h description of the problem.
0112h
• Check the intelligent function
A switch setting error was detected in
0180h Switch setting error module switch setting.
the hardware test.
• Conduct the hardware test again.
A ROM error was detected in the
0181h ROM check sum error
hardware test.
• Conduct the hardware test again.
A RAM error was detected in the
0182h RAM test error
hardware test.
0190h Timeout error • Hardware error
0191h Communication error An error occurred in the self-loopback • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0192h Comparison error test. representative, explaining a detailed
0193h In-frame position error description of the problem.
0200h
to • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0203h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0210h description of the problem.
0300h
No CompactFlash card has been • Install a CompactFlash card.
installed. • Retry writing the setting with MES
0301h Setting file read error
Failed to read out the setting file. (The Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.) Tool.
0400h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0402h description of the problem.
Unable to initialize the CompactFlash
0480h CF card initialization error • Check if the CompactFlash card
card.
was inserted properly.
CF card drive data Unable to read out the drive
0481h • Replace the CompactFlash card.
retrieve error information of the CompactFlash card.
0490h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0493h description of the problem.
• Check if the CompactFlash card
was inserted properly.
Failed to format the CompactFlash
0494h CF card format error • Check the CompactFlash card for
card.
any error. (Perform check disk on
the personal computer.)
• Check the CompactFlash card for
Failed to check the CompactFlash
0495h CF card check error any error. (Perform check disk on
card.
the personal computer.)

(To the next page)

10 - 8 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
The access to the CompactFlash card
timed out while waiting for a response • Replace the CompactFlash card
0496h CF card response error
from the card. (CompactFlash card
failure)
with another.
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
The battery voltage dropped, or the • Replace the battery.
04D0h Battery error
battery connector was disconnected. • Check the battery connection.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0501h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
APS of the request packet does not
• Retry the transmission.
match the one of the response packet.
0502h APS mismatch • Correct [Access target CPU
The Start I/O specified in [Access
settings].
target CPU settings] is incorrect.
0604h • Retry writing the setting with MES

APPENDICES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
Setting file error Interface Function Configuration
0607h setting file is corrupted.)
Tool.
The device name specified in the
• Correct the device specified in the
060Ah Component device error "component setting" is incorrect.
"component setting".
Or, an invalid device was specified.
Information on the network • Initialize the module, and then
Access target CPU setting
0610h communication route set in [Access configure the [Access target CPU
error
target CPU settings] is corrupted. settings] again.
Unable to handle the processing due • Remove the cause of the module

INDEX
0617h Module stop error
to a module stop error. stop error, and reset the PLC CPU.
Because the load applied to the
Setting update time-out • Reexecute the setting update.
0618h module is high, setting update timed
error • Reset the PLC CPU.
out.
The device name specified in [Device • Refer to the accessible device list,
0619h Device name error
tag settings] is erroneous or invalid. and reenter a correct device name.
Invalid multiple CPU settings was
0626h Multiple CPU setting error configured in [Access target CPU
settings].
• Correct [Access target CPU
The network No, head I/O, or station
settings].
Network communication No. of the network route, which was
0627h
route error specified in [Access target CPU
settings], is out of range.
Tag sampling interval The sampling interval set in [Device
0628h • Correct [Device tag settings].
setting error tag settings] is invalid.
0629h • Retry writing the setting with MES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
062Ah Setting file error Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.)
062Ch Tool.
The access target CPU specified in
No CPU specification • Specify an existing CPU as the
062Dh the "component setting" does not
error access target.
exist, or its setting was deleted.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 9
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
There is an inconsistency between the
device and data type that were
specified in the "component setting".
062Eh Data type incorrect error
(Any other than Bit was specified for a
bit device, or Bit was specified for any
other than bit device.)
• Correct the "component setting".
The number of characters specified in
Excessive number of
062Fh the "component setting" is out of
characters error
range.
The decimal or exponential type
Decimal/Exponential form
0630h specification in the "component
setting error
setting" is invalid.
0631h • Retry writing the setting with MES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
Setting file error Interface Function Configuration
0649h setting file is corrupted.)
Tool.
Excessive number of
The total of device points for the high- • Change the setting so that the total
064Bh device points for high
speed sampling tag exceeded 96. device points will not exceed 96.
speed sampling tag
High speed sampling tag • Ensure a system area in the
Failed to register a component device
064Ch component registration program memory of the PLC CPU.
of the high-speed tag to the CPU.
error (Format the PLC memory.)
• Retry writing the setting with MES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
0650h Setting file error Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.)
Tool.
06A0h
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
06AAh
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
06ABh
description of the problem.
06ADh
• Retry writing the setting with MES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
0830h Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.)
Tool.
No CompactFlash card has been • Install a CompactFlash card.
installed. • Retry writing the setting with MES
0831h Setting file error
Failed to read out the setting file. (The Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.) Tool.
• Retry writing the setting with MES
Failed to read out the setting file. (The
0832h Interface Function Configuration
setting file is corrupted.)
Tool.
08A1h
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
08A2h
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
08B0h
description of the problem.
08B1h
0A00h Initialization error
0A01h Start error The CompactFlash card may be
• Replace the CompactFlash card.
0A02h Stop error corrupted.
0A03h Reset error
• Check if the network on the PLC
0A04h Tag related error Tag related error
CPU side is normal.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0A05h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

(To the next page)

10 - 10 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
The initial SNTP server time enquiry
Initial SNTP server time failed, and thereby the module started • Check if the specified SNTP server
0A06h
is operating normally, or if no error
enquiry error the operation synchronizing the time
with CPU No.1. has occurred on the network linked
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
to the specified SNTP server
SNTP server time enquiry Failed in the SNTP server time
0A07h computer.
error enquiry.

0A08h
The CompactFlash card may be
to Setting read error • Replace the CompactFlash card.
corrupted.
0A0Dh
No CompactFlash card has been • Install a CompactFlash card.
0A0Fh CF access stopped error installed. • Turn the power OFF and ON, or
File access is stopped (X2 is ON). reset the PLC CPU.
No CompactFlash card has been

APPENDICES
0A11h No CF card installed
installed.
CF directory operation The CompactFlash card may be
0A12h
error corrupted.
The setting file written to the module is
Transferred setting file invalid. • Install a CompactFlash card.
0A13h
check error The CompactFlash card may be
corrupted.
The setting file is invalid.
0A14h Setting file check error The CompactFlash card may be

INDEX
corrupted.
0A80h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0A83h description of the problem.
• Check the actions in [Job settings].
• In Job List of [Remote operation],
Some action set in the job has an
0A84h Illegal action setting error the job having any illegal action can
illegal part.
be checked. (Such a job is not
displayed.)
0B00h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B0Ah description of the problem.

0B0Bh
The CompactFlash card may be
Setting read error • Replace the CompactFlash card.
corrupted.
0B0Ch

• Check the Ethernet connection.

• Check if [Server service settings] is
DB connection service An Ethernet communication error has
0B0Dh correct.
communication error occurred.
• Check if the ODBC setting is
correct.
0B0Eh • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B1Eh description of the problem.
• Change the setting so that type
The data could not be converted to the
0B1Fh Type conversion error conversion will be available in any
specified type.
case.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 11
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
• Check if data can be written to the
0B20h Tag write error Failed to write data to the tag. device specified for the tag
component.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B21h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Check if [Device tag settings] is
correct.
• Check if the ERR. LED is on or
0B22h Tag access error Failed to read or write the tag. flashing on the MES interface
module.
Section 10.3 Troubleshooting
by symptom
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B23h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Check if [Device tag settings] is
0B24h Tag value read error Failed to read data from the tag.
correct.
0B25h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B28h description of the problem.
Type conversion to tag The data could not be converted to the • Check the tag component type or
0B29h
component error type specified for the tag component. the substitute value.
0B2Ah • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B2Dh description of the problem.

0B2Eh Data stored in the DB buffer are

DB buffer content error invalid. (The CompactFlash card may • Replace the CompactFlash card.
0B2Fh be corrupted.)

A part of invalid data in the DB buffer

has been corrected.
Partial correction of DB
0B30h (A part of the DB buffered data in the —
buffer content
CompactFlash card may have been
corrupted.)
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B31h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
Failed to clear the DB buffer. (The
0B32h DB buffer clear error CompactFlash card may be
corrupted.)
The DB buffer file is invalid. (The
0B33h DB buffer file error CompactFlash card may be • Replace the CompactFlash card.
corrupted.)
Data stored in the DB buffer are
0B34h DB buffer content error invalid. (The CompactFlash card may
be corrupted.)

(To the next page)

10 - 12 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
0B35h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B3Ah
Because the DB buffer became full,
description of the problem.
10
• Check the network status.

TROUBLESHOOTING
0B3Bh DB buffer full error the data could not be stored in the DB
• Ensure a DB buffering capacity.
buffer.

0B3Ch • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B3Dh description of the problem.

• Check the CompactFlash card.

Failed in file operation during DB
0B3Eh DB buffering error • If the CompactFlash card is
buffering operation.
damaged, replace it.

APPENDICES
0B3Fh • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B40h description of the problem.

Data in the DB buffer could not be

0B41h DB buffer read error
read normally. • Check the CompactFlash card.
0B42h DB buffer clear error Failed to clear the DB buffer. • If the CompactFlash card is
Data in the DB buffer could not be damaged, replace it.
0B43h DB buffer read error
read normally.

INDEX
• Do not clear the DB buffer during
resending of DB-buffered data.
0B44h DB buffer empty error The DB buffer is empty. • Check the CompactFlash card.
• If the CompactFlash card is
damaged, replace it.
• Check the CompactFlash card.
Data stored in the DB buffer are
0B45h DB buffer content error • If the CompactFlash card is
invalid.
damaged, replace it.

0B46h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B47h description of the problem.

• Change the setting so that type

Error in conversion from Character strings could not be
0B48h conversion will be available in any
character string to number converted to numerical values.
case.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B49h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Change the setting so that type
Error in conversion from Character strings could not be
0B4Ah conversion will be available in any
character string to number converted to numerical values.
case.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B4Bh System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Change the setting so that type
Error in conversion from Character strings could not be
0B4Ch conversion will be available in any
character string to number converted to numerical values.
case.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 13
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B4Dh System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Change the setting so that type
Error in conversion from Character strings could not be
0B4Eh conversion will be available in any
character string to number converted to numerical values.
case.
0B4Fh • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B52h description of the problem.
• Check the tag component type or
Assignment to the tag component was
Overflow or zero divide the substitute value.
0B53h not possible. (Overflow)
error • Change the setting to avoid division
Division by zero was attempted.
by zero.
• Change the setting so that any
0B54h Operation error Invalid operation was performed.
invalid operation will not performed.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B55h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Reduce the frequency of job
0B56h Trigger buffer full error The trigger buffer became full.
startups and their processing loads.
0B57h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B63h description of the problem.
• Change the setting of the DB
buffering capacity to ensure a
sufficient free space on the
0B64h DB buffering write error Failed to write data to the DB buffer.
CompactFlash card.
• Check if the CompactFlash card is
damaged or not.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B80h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
An error occurred in the Ethernet • Check if [Server service settings] is
0B81h Communication start error communication, and the correct.
communication failed to start. • Check if the ODBC setting is
correct.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B82h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

Communication • Check the Ethernet connection.

0B83h
connection error • Check if [Server service settings] is
An Ethernet communication error has
correct.
occurred.
Communication • Check if the ODBC setting is
0B84h
connection timeout correct.

0B85h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B87h description of the problem.

(To the next page)

10 - 14 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
Message transmission • Check the Ethernet connection.
0B88h
error • Check if [Server service settings] is
An Ethernet communication error has

Message transmission
occurred.
correct. 10
• Check if the ODBC setting is
0B89h

TROUBLESHOOTING
timeout correct.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0B8Ah System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• Check if [Server service settings] is
correct.
• Check if the ODBC setting is
correct.

APPENDICES
• Check if the database has been
restarted or not.
(When the database is Microsoft
Access 2000/2003)
• Check if 128 or more fields are set
0B8Bh Message reception error in Update actions.
• Check the sent SQL text and the
An Ethernet communication error has database contents.
occurred. • Check if the table and field settings

INDEX
are correct.
• Check if the uniqueness constraint
of the database (PRIMARY KEY
constraint) is violated or not.
• Check if multiple MES interface
modules are accessing one file at
the same time.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
• Check if [Server service settings] is
Message reception
0B8Ch correct.
timeout
• Check if the ODBC setting is
correct.
0B8Dh • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B90h description of the problem.
DB transaction status
0B91h The DB transaction status is invalid.
error
DB transaction start status The DB transaction start status is • Check the transaction status of the
0B92h
error invalid. database.
DB transaction end status The DB transaction end status is
0B93h
error invalid.
0B94h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0B9Dh description of the problem.
Database connection • Check the Ethernet connection.
0B9Eh
error • Check if [Server service settings] is
An Ethernet communication error has
0B9Fh Message reception error correct.
occurred.
Received message data • Check if the ODBC setting is
0BA0h
error correct.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 15
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
0BA1h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0BA5h description of the problem.
• Check the Ethernet connection.
Wait for DB access No response has returned from the • Check if [Server service settings] is
0BA6h (program execution) program to be executed. (An Ethernet correct.
completion timed out communication error has occurred.) • Check if the ODBC setting is
correct.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0BA7h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
0BA8h SELECT execution error Failed to execute SELECT.
• Check the sent SQL text and
0BA9h COMMIT execution error Failed to execute COMMIT.
database contents.
ROLLBACK execution
0BAAh Failed to execute ROLLBACK. • Check if the table and field settings
error
are correct.
0BABh DB update error Failed to update the DB.
• Check the sent SQL text and
database contents.
• Check if the table and field settings
0BACh SQL execution error SQL execution caused an error. are correct.
• Check if the uniqueness constraint
of the database (PRIMARY KEY
constraint) is violated or not.
• Check the sent SQL text and
ODBC connection error An error occurred when opening the database contents.
0BADh
during SQL execution ODBC connection by SQL execution. • Check if the table and field settings
are correct.
0BAEh • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0BB5h description of the problem.
Failed to generate an event when
0BB6h
Execution error (Program executing the program.
execution function) Failed to generate a thread when
0BB7h
executing the program. • Check if the program specified with
Specified program file not There is no execution file of the the program execution function is
0BB8h exist (Program execution program that is specified for the executable with the specified
function) program execution function. account.
Specified program file There are more than one execution
0BB9h duplicated (Program file of the program that is specified for
execution function) the program execution function.

(To the next page)

10 - 16 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
An error has occurred in the
0BBAh
CreateProcess function for start EXE. • Check if the program specified with

0BBBh
An SID value NULL error has occurred
in the SidToText function.
the program execution function is
executable with the specified
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
A parameter NULL error has occurred account.
0BBCh
in start XML.
• Check if the program specified with
the program execution function is
executable with the specified
account.
• After creating an account used for
An error has occurred in the
0BBDh the program execution function, be
LogonUser function.
sure to log in once at least.
• A user with an empty password

APPENDICES
cannot be specified.
Set a password for the specified
Execution error (Program user.
execution function) An error has occurred in the
0BBEh
GetSidText function.
An error has occurred in the
0BBFh
GetProfilePath function.
An error has occurred in the
0BC0h
AddPrivilege function.

INDEX
An error has occurred in the
0BC1h • Check if the program specified with
RegLoadKey function.
the program execution function is
An error has occurred in the
executable with the specified
0BC2h SetWindowStationAndDesktopAce
account.
function.
An error has occurred in the
0BC3h
CreateUserProcess function.
An error has occurred in the
0BC4h
QuerySubKey function.
An error has occurred in the
0BC5h
ReleaseMutex function.
0C00h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error — representative, explaining a
0C56h detailed description of the problem.
• Check if the CompactFlash card is
CF card check error Failed to access the CompactFlash damaged.
0C80h
(event log writing) card during event log output. • Turn the power OFF and ON, or
reset the PLC CPU.
Remaining capacity of the
CF card full error (event • Check the capacity of the
0C81h CompactFlash card is not sufficient for
log writing) CompactFlash card.
writing the event log.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 17
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module

Error code Error name Description Action
Setting file out-of-range Access was made to outside the
0D00h
access error setting file range.
New setting file creation
0D01h Failed to create a new setting file.
error
• Turn the power OFF and ON, or
0D02h Setting file open error Failed to open the setting file.
reset the PLC CPU.
0D03h Setting file seek error Failed to seek the setting file.
0D04h Setting file read error Failed to read out the setting file.
0D05h Setting file write error Failed to write the setting file.
0D06h Setting file close error Failed to close the setting file.
0D80h
to
0D82h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
100Eh System error — representative, explaining a detailed
2000h description of the problem.
to
20FFh
4000h
Errors detected by the access target CPU
to
User's Manual for the access target PLC CPU
4FFFh
9000h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
9006h
description of the problem.
There is no available space in the • Check the CPU(s) on the access
9008h Send buffer full
send buffer. route.
9202h
9204h
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
920Ah
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
9920h
description of the problem.
9922h
9923h
The issued processing code cannot • Check the CPU(s) on the access
9E20h Processing code error
be processed on the other end. route.
The device type specified for the • Correct the device type entered in
9E81h Device type error
access target station is invalid. [Device tag settings].
The device number specified for the • Correct the device number entered
9E82h Device No. error
access target station is out of range. in [Device tag settings].
Number of device points The device points specified for the • Correct the device number entered
9E83h
error access target station is out of range. in [Device tag settings].
B000h
Errors detected in the CC-Link system
to
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BFFFh
C000h
Errors detected in the Ethernet interface module
to
Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
CFFFh
F000h
Errors detected in the MELSECNET/H (10) network system
to
MELSECNET/H (10) Network System Reference Manual
FEFFh
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
FFD0h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

(To the next page)

10 - 18 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.3 Error codes for the MES interface module
Error code Error name Description Action

FORMAT
Monitor condition Reading is not possible because the • Delete the monitor condition by GX
FFD1h
dissatisfied error monitor condition is not met. Developer.
FFD2h
to System error —
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative, explaining a detailed
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
FFD4h description of the problem.
Writing a TC setting value was
• Change the TC setting value during
FFD5h ROM operation error attempted to the PLC CPU that was
RAM operation.
running the ROM.
FFD6h
FFD7h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
FFD9h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
to description of the problem.
FFDEh

APPENDICES
Incorrect access target The setting of the access target CPU • Correct [Access target CPU
FFDFh
error is incorrect. settings].
FFE0h
FFE1h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
FFEDh System error — representative, explaining a detailed
to description of the problem.
FFEFh
Station or Network No. The station No. or network No. is out • Check the station No. and network
FFF0h
error of range, or the setting is incorrect. No. in [Access target CPU settings].
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi

INDEX
FFF1h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
No memory cassette or inappropriate
• Check the memory cassette of the
FFF2h Memory cassette error one is attached to the accessed PLC
access target CPU.
CPU.
• Check the block No. of the
The block No. of the specified
extension file register (device type).
extension file register has been
FFF3h Write protect error • Check the write-protect DIP switch
allocated to the write-protect area of
on the memory cassette of the
the memory cassette.
access target CPU.
The block No. of the specified • Check the block No. of the
FFF4h Block error
extension file register is invalid. extension file register (device type).
FFF5h • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
FFF8h System error — representative, explaining a detailed
FFFAh description of the problem.
The device size exceeded the device • Correct the device number entered
FFFBh Size error
range. in [Device tag settings].
• Check the settings of the network
module on the access route.
FFFCh CPU error An invalid station was specified.
• Check the station number setting in
[Access target CPU settings].
• Correct the device type entered in
FFFDh Device type error The device type is incorrect.
[Device tag settings].
• Correct the device number entered
FFFEh Device No. error The device number is incorrect.
in [Device tag settings].
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
FFFFh System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.1 Error codes for the MES interface module
10 - 19
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service

(1) Event log of Windows

Table 10.4 Event log output warning list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
There is no setting file. • Configure the settings again with DB Connection
1
Start the service using the default setting. Service Setting Tool.

Table 10.5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service

Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
Unable to start the service due to insufficient
1
memory. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
Unable to start the service due to insufficient • Add more memory to the personal computer.
2
resources.

3 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
4 of the problem.

• Refer to the actions of error codes 101 to 129.

Failed to read the setting file.
5 • Actions are displayed with error codes 101 to
The service is stopped.
129.
• Refer to the actions of error codes 401 to 403,
Failed to initialize the log file. and 501 to 503.
6
The service is stopped. • Actions are displayed with error codes 401 to
403, and 501 to 503.

7 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
8 of the problem.

The server port has already been opened. • Change the server port No. with DB Connection
9
The service is stopped. Service Setting Tool.

10 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
11 of the problem.

The computer ran out of memory while reading the • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
101
setting file. • Add more memory to the personal computer.
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service to the
102 The setting file path is too long.
directory whose path name is shorter.
103 The setting file name indicates the directory.
• Reinstall the DB Connection Service.
104 The setting file could not be opened.

(To the next page)

10 - 20 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

FORMAT
• Terminate other applications, and make the
105 Description of the setting file is not correct. setting again with DB Connection Service Setting
Tool.
10
Parameter specification of the setting file is not
106

TROUBLESHOOTING
correct.
107 The version of the setting file is not correct.
108 The server port No. setting is not correct.
109 The server port No. setting is out of range.
110 The timeout time setting is not correct.
111 The timeout time setting is out of range.
There are too many connection-permitted IP
112
address settings.
Description of the connection-permitted IP address
113

APPENDICES
setting is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connection-
114
permitted IP address is not correct.
The mask bit length setting of the connection-
115
permitted IP address is out of range.
116 The access log setting is not correct.
The setting of the access log file name is not
117
correct.
118 The access log file name is too long.
• Configure the settings again with DB Connection

INDEX
The maximum file size setting for the access log is
119 Service Setting Tool.
not correct.
The maximum file size setting for the access log is
120
out of range.
The maximum number of access log files is not set
121
correctly.
The maximum number of access log files is out of
122
range.
123 The SQL failure log setting is not correct.
The setting of the SQL failure log file name is not
124
correct.
125 The SQL failure log file name is too long.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
126
log is not correct.
The maximum file size setting for the SQL failure
127
log is out of range.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is not
128
set correctly.
The maximum number of SQL failure log files is out
129
of range.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 - 21
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service

Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
401
the access log file. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
The computer ran out of resources when initializing • Add more memory to the personal computer.
402
the access log file.
• Shorten the path to the access log file with DB
403 The full path name of the access log file is too long.
Connection Service Setting Tool.
• If no directory exists for storing the access log
file, create it.
• When the attribution of the access log file is set
to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the access log file,
404 The access log file could not be opened. enable it in the security setting.
• When the access log file name represents a
directory, rename or delete the directory.
• When the access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
space.
405 The log could not be written to the access log file. • When the access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribution of the oldest access log file
is set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest access log
406 Failed to delete an old access log file. file, enable it in the security setting.
• When the oldest access log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribution of the new and old access
log files is set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old
access log files, enable it in the security setting.
407 Failed to rename the access log file.
• When the new and old access log files have
been open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.

(To the next page)

10 - 22 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.5 Event log output error list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

FORMAT
The computer ran out of memory when initializing
501
the SQL failure log file. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.

502
The computer ran out of resources when initializing • Add more memory to the personal computer.
10
the SQL failure log file.

TROUBLESHOOTING
The full path name of the SQL failure log file is too • Shorten the path to the SQL failure log file with
503
long. DB Connection Service Setting Tool.
• If no directory exists for storing the SQL failure
log file, create it.
• When the attribution of the SQL failure log file is
set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the SQL failure log
504 The SQL failure log file could not be opened. file, enable it in the security setting.
• When the SQL failure log file name represents a
directory, rename or delete the directory.

APPENDICES
• When the SQL failure log file has been open in
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the disk space is full, ensure a free disk
space.
The log could not be written to the SQL failure log
505 • When the SQL failure log file has been open in
file.
another application, terminate the application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribution of the oldest SQL failure log

INDEX
file is set to read-only, cancel the setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the oldest SQL failure
log file, enable it in the security setting.
506 Failed to delete an old SQL failure log file.
• When the oldest SQL failure log file has been
open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.
• When the attribution of the new and old SQL
failure log files is set to read-only, cancel the
setting.
• If read/write is disabled for the new and old SQL
507 Failed to rename the SQL failure log file. failure log files, enable it in the security setting.
• When the new and old SQL failure log files have
been open in another application, terminate the
application.
• Check the disk device for any fault.

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 - 23
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Access log of DB Connection Service

Table 10.6 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
(Service Not Start.)
0x20100001 Failed to start the service due to insufficient
memory. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(Service Not Start.) • Add more memory to the personal computer.
0x20100002 Failed to start the service due to insufficient
resources.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20100010 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(Service Not Start.)
• If firewall software has been installed, set the
0x20100011 Failed to start the service due to failure of the
specified server port operational.
server port initialization.
• Terminate the application that has opened the
(Service Not Start.) server port.
0x20100012
Another application has opened the server port. • Set another server port No. with DB Connection
Service Setting Tool.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20100013 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(Not Initialize a service for each client: [IP address])
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20200001 Failed to initialize a service for each client due to
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
insufficient memory.
(Deny network connection request from [IP
• Using DB Connection Service Setting Tool, add
address])
0x20200002 the IP address to those with connection
Rejected the connection request from the non-
permission.
permitted IP address.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20200003 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20300001 address])
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Failed to receive data due to insufficient memory.

(To the next page)

10 - 24 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.6 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

FORMAT
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300010 address])
Connection disconnected during request reception.
10
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP

TROUBLESHOOTING
0x20300011 address])
• Check if it is connected to the network.
Timed out during request reception.
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
• Check if the power of the module is not turned
address])
0x20300012 off.
Detected failure of the MES interface module while
waiting for or receiving a request.
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300013 address])
Receive I/O error

APPENDICES
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP
0x20300014 address])
Buffer overrun (Request length exceeded) • Check if the source IP address belongs to the
(SID [Session ID]: Request Receive Error: [IP MES interface module.
0x20300015 address])
Received an invalid request.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310010 address])
Failed to transmit a response due to disconnection.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP

INDEX
0x20310011 address])
• Check if it is connected to the network.
Timed out during response transmission
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
• Check if the power of the module is not turned
address])
0x20310012 off.
Detected failure of the MES interface module
during response transmission.
(SID [Session ID]: Response Transmit Error: [IP
0x20310013 address])
Send I/O error
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
0x20400001 [User]: Failed)
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
[User]: Failed)
0x20400002
Failed in DB connection due to insufficient
resources.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20400010 [User]: Failed)
MES interface module.
Invalid DB connection request

0x20400011 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x20400012 of the problem.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 - 25
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.6 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service

Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]:
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20400020 [User]: Failed)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
Failed to create a DB handle.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20400021 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(SID [Session ID]: DB Connect: [Data source]: • Set correct data source name, user name, and
0x20400022 [User]: Failed) password in [Server service settings] of MES
Failed in DB connection. Interface Function Configuration Tool.
0x20400023
0x20500011
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20500012
System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x20500020
of the problem.
to
0x20500022
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600001
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600002 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
resources.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed) • Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20600010
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed) MES interface module.
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Invalid SQL execution request

0x20600011 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x20600012 of the problem.

(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)

(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
• Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20600020 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
MES interface module.
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL
instruction to be executed.

(To the next page)

10 - 26 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.6 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action

FORMAT
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)

0x20600021
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
10
• Set a correct database type in [Server service

TROUBLESHOOTING
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
settings] of MES Interface Function
Failed in preparation before SQL execution.
Configuration Tool.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
• Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
set a correct table name.
0x20600022 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution.
• Set a correct database type in [Server service

APPENDICES
settings] of MES Interface Function
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
Configuration Tool.
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed)
• Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed)
0x20600023 MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
(SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed)
set a correct table name, field names, and
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed)
Select/Update conditions.
Failed in SQL execution.
Also, set a correct data type for the data entered
in the fields.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi

INDEX
0x20600024 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(SID [Session ID]: SQL<...>: Failed)
(SID [Session ID]: COMMIT: Failed) • Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
(SID [Session ID]: ROLLBACK: Failed) MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
0x20600025 (SID [Session ID]: GetNext: Failed) set update conditions correctly.
(SID [Session ID]: Reset: Failed) • Check if the database has been filled with
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL registered data.
execution.
0x20600026 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x2060002A of the problem.
• Check if it is connected to the network.
(SID [Session ID]: *** Transmitting Commit
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
0x2060002B Success Response Failed. ***)
• Check if the power of the module is not turned
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
off.

(To the next page)

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 - 27
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.6 Access log output error list of DB Connection Service

Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
0x20700001 Failed in remote execution due to insufficient
memory. • Terminate any unnecessary applications.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) • Add more memory to the personal computer.
0x20700002 Failed in remote execution due to insufficient
resources.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20700003 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) • Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20700010
Invalid remote execution request MES interface module.

0x20700011 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi

System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x20700012 of the problem.

• Set correct user name and password in [Server

service settings] of MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool.
• Check if the user account is invalid or not by the

(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) administrative tool of Windows .

0x20700020
Failed to log on in remote execution • Check if the setting is forcing the user to enter
password at next logon by the administrative tool
of Windows .
• Check if the user password is expired or not by
the administrative tool of Windows .
• No user profile for Windows has been created.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed) • With the server service setting set in MES
0x20700021
Failed to load user profile during remote execution Interface Function Configuration Tool, log on
Windows once, and reexecute.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20700022 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
• Check if the application to be executed in remote
execution exists or not.
(ProgramExec: [IP address]: <...>: Failed)
• Check if the name of the application to be
0x20700023 Failed to generate process during remote
executed in remote execution is a directory.
execution
• Make a proper security setting for the application
to be executed in remote execution.
(SID [Session ID]: TCPOpen Request Error: [IP
• Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20800010 address])
MES interface module.
Invalid TCPOpen request

0x20800011
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20800012 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
0x2FE00010

10 - 28 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(3) SQL failure log of DB Connection Service

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.7 SQL failure log output error list of DB Connection Service

FORMAT
Error code Error description and cause Corrective action
0x20600001 Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient memory.
• Terminate any unnecessary applications.
0x20600002
Failed in SQL execution due to insufficient
• Add more memory to the personal computer.
10
resources.

TROUBLESHOOTING
DB Connection Service does not support the SQL • Check if the source IP address belongs to the
0x20600020
instruction to be executed. MES interface module.

• Set a correct database type in [Server service

0x20600021 Failed in preparation before SQL execution.
settings] of MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool.
• Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
Failed to obtain the number of fields in the record MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
0x20600022
that is to be obtained by the SQL execution. set a correct table name.

APPENDICES
• Set a correct database type in [Server service
settings] of MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool.
• Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
set a correct table name, field names, and
0x20600023 Failed in SQL execution.
Select/Update conditions.
Also, set a correct data type for the data entered

INDEX
in the fields.
• Check if the uniqueness constraint of the
database (PRIMARY KEY constraint) is violated
or not.
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x20600024 System error representative, explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
• Select [Job settings] - [Communication action] in
MES Interface Function Configuration Tool, and
No record was updated or inserted by the SQL
0x20600025 set update conditions correctly.
execution.
• Check if the database has been filled with
registered data.
0x20600026 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
to System error representative, explaining a detailed description
0x20600028 of the problem.
• Check if it is connected to the network.
(Data source name: *** Transmitting Commit
• Check if the gateway and/or hub is operating.
0x2060002B Success Response Failed. ***)
• Check if the power of the module is not turned
Failed to transmit the COMMIT success response.
off.

10.2 Error Code List

10.2.2 Error codes of DB Connection Service
10 - 29
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.2.3 Error codes returned in XML response messages

Table 10.8 Error codes returned in XML response messages

Error code Error name Description Action
• Please consult your local Mitsubishi
0x41170101 System error — representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
XML message length The length of the received XML
0x41170103
error message is invalid.
The received XML request message is
XML request message invalid.
0x41171101
interpretation error Data are not properly formatted as an
XML message.
The XML request message route is
Duplicated XML request
0x41171111 duplicated.
message route
Multiple (Request) tags exist.
There is an invalid route for XML
XML request message
0x41171201 request message transmission.
route error
Any tag other than (Request) exists. • Check the content of the sent XML
The attribute in the received XML message.
request message is invalid.
Failed to identify the message type is
XML request message, oneshot, validate, or invalidate.
0x41171205
attribute error Attribute "type" does not exist.
Attribute "type" value is invalid.
Attribute "jobname" does not exist.
The XML declaration is incorrect.
The jobname in the received XML
XML request message, request message is invalid.
0x41171301
jobname error The job of the specified jobname does
not exist.
• Check if the job is already in
execution.
• Check if the MES interface module
Failed in one-shot execution of the job is operating.
0x41173101 Job execution error which is requested by the XML • Check CompactFlash card status
processing function. (X1) and File access status (X2).
• Execute the job after starting the
module and sampling tag data.
Section 3.6.7 Tag status area
0x41173103 • Please consult your local Mitsubishi
System error — representative, explaining a detailed
0x41173105
description of the problem.

10 - 30 10.2 Error Code List

10.2.3 Error codes returned in XML response messages
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

XML MESSAGE
FORMAT
10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool

This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of MES Interface Function
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
Configuration Tool.

(1) Common to all settings

Table 10.9 Common to all settings
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is there any disconnection in the
• Connect the cables properly.
connection route?
• Correct the IP address setting.

APPENDICES
Is the IP address setting correct? Section 7.6.1 Setting items in
Network setting
• Correct the user name and password
Is the user name and password setting setting.
correct? Section 7.6.3 Setting items in
Account setting
Unable to connect MES Interface Function
• Correct the IP address setting.
Configuration Tool to the MES interface
module. Is the IP address duplicated? Section 7.6.1 Setting items in
Network setting

INDEX
Is there a firewall and/or a proxy server in • Ask your network administrator about the
the connection route? firewall and proxy server settings.
Is the MES interface module connected to
• Connect the MES interface module to the
the network?
network.
(Network connection status (X4) = ON)
Is it in "Online" mode? • Change the mode to "Online".
Is there any problem on the personal
• Replace it with another computer.
computer?
• Terminate any of the MES Interface
Function Configuration Tools and then
MES Interface Function Configuration Tool Have five MES Interface Function
start another.
will not start. Configuration Tools already started?
• Up to five MES Interface Function
Configuration Tools can be started.
The specified project file is incorrect or
• Specify a correct project file.
corrupted.
Unable to import a project file. Is there any inconsistency in the setting? • Check the setting and correct it if any.
Did the number of settings exceed the • Check the number of settings.
upper limit? Section 7.4.4 Importing a project
Is the CSV file description correct? • Correct the CSV file description.
Is there any inconsistency in the setting? • Check the setting and correct it if any.
Unable to import a CSV file.
Did the number of settings exceed the • Check the number of settings.
upper limit? Section 7.4.5 Importing a CSV file
[Device tag name] is not displayed for the • Set the tag to data-write-enabled.
setting item by which data are written to a Is the tag set to data-write-disabled? Section 7.8.1 Setting items in
tag. Device Tag setting
All the text is not displayed in a table. • Adjust the column width of the table.
Isn't the column width narrow?
(The text display is truncated.) Section 7.3.1 Screen structure

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
10 - 31
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) [System setting] ( Section 7.6 System Setting)

Table 10.10 [System setting]
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Set the tag to data-write-enabled.
A desired device tag name is not displayed
Is the tag set to data-write-disabled? Section 7.8.1 Setting items in
in [DB buffering settings].
Device Tag setting

(3) [Access target CPU settings] ( Section 7.7 Access Target CPU Setting)
Table 10.11 [Access target CPU settings]
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• If it is any item other than the first one,
change the item or add an item.
• Since the control CPU is set as the first
Is it the first item?
item, deletion or setting change is not
allowed for it. (Only the CPU name can
Unable to change or delete an item in
be changed.)
[Access target CPU settings].
• As the error dialog box appears, identify
the location, stop using it for another
Is the selected item used in [Device tag
item, and then delete the item.
settings]?
• An item used for another item is unable
to be deleted.

10 - 32 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(4) [Device tag settings] ( Section 7.8 Device Tag Setting)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.12 [Device tag settings]

FORMAT
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is the selected item used in [Job settings]?
Is the selected item used in [DB buffering
• As the error dialog box appears, identify
the location, stop using it for another
10
Unable to change or delete an item in settings] of [System setting]?

TROUBLESHOOTING
item, and then delete the item.
[Device tag settings]. Is the selected item used in [Access error
• An item used for another item is unable
notification setting] of [Server service
to be deleted.
settings]?
• Because a unique name must be used
Is the same name used for [Server service
Unable to set or change [Device tag name]. for [Server service name] and [Device tag
name] or another [Device tag name]?
name], use a different name.
• Uncheck the [High-speed sampling]
Is [High-speed sampling] selected in checkbox in the [Device tag settings].
another [Device tag settings]? • Registration of [High-speed sampling] is

APPENDICES
limited to one tag only.
• Delete the component setting with
selection of any other than the first item,
Is any other than the first item (Control or change the setting so that the first item
CPU) in [Access target CPU settings] will be used for it.
Unable to select [High-speed sampling]. selected in [CPU name] in [Component • If [High-speed sampling] is selected, only
setting input]? the first item in [Access target CPU
settings] (Control CPU) can be selected
for the tag component.

INDEX
• Reduce the number of device points in
the tag setting to 96 or less.
Is the number of device points set in the tag
• When [High-speed sampling] is selected,
setting more than 96?
set tag component devices within the
total of 96 points.
• Stop using the tag for the setting item by
Is the tag used for a setting item by which which data are written to the tag, before
data are written to the tag? changing the setting.
Unable to change the [Prohibit data writing]
• [Completion notification] of [Handshake • If the tag is used for a setting item by
setting.
operation], substitution tags of [Select] in which data are written to the tag,
[Communication action], etc. unchecking the [Prohibit data writing] box
is not allowed.

(5) [Server service settings] ( Section 7.9 Server Service Setting)

Table 10.13 [Server service settings]
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Because a unique name must be used
Unable to set or change [Server service Is the same name used for another [Server
for [Server service name] and [Device tag
name]. service name] or [Device tag name]?
name], use a different name.
Is the [Server service name] same as the
Unable to change [Server type]. • Correct the [Server service name].
existing one?
• Set the tag to data-write-enabled.
A desired device tag name is not displayed
Is the tag set to data-write-disabled? Section 7.8.1 Setting items in
in [Access error notification setting].
Device Tag setting

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
10 - 33
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(6) [Job settings]

• Section 7.10 Job Setting
• Section 7.11 Job Setting - Actions
Table 10.14 [Job settings]
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Do not use Select actions in the job
where DB buffering is enabled.
Unable to set [DB buffering settings]. Is there any Select action set for the job?
• The DB buffering is not available for jobs
performing Select actions.
• Delete any unnecessary variable settings
Are there 64 variables that were already
Unable to set a new variable. of the job.
defined in the job?
• Up to 64 variables can be set for one job.
• Select any other than [Handshake
Unable to select [Trigger 2] in [Trigger Is [Handshake operation] selected for operation] for [Trigger 1].
conditions]. [Trigger 1]? • When [Handshake operation] is selected,
selection is not allowed for [Trigger 2].
A desired device tag name is not displayed
in [Completion notification] of [Handshake
operation].
A desired device tag name is not displayed
in the field of Substitution tag for [Select] in
[Communication action].
A desired device tag name is not displayed • Set the tag to data-write-enabled.
in the field of Substitution tag in [Exception Is the tag set to data-write-disabled? Section 7.8.1 Setting items in
processing] of [Communication action]. Device Tag setting
A desired device tag name is not displayed
in the field of Substitution tag in [Operation
action].
A desired device tag name is not displayed
under [Notify errors (job cancellation) that
occur during job execution].
Is the DB buffering enabled? • Disable the DB buffering.
Unable to set [Exception processing] in
• Set any other than [Insert] for [Action
[Communication action]. Is [Insert] set for [Action type]?
type].

10 - 34 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(7) [Online]

XML MESSAGE
• Section 7.12 Online

FORMAT
• Section 7.13 Online - Remote operation
Table 10.15 [Online]
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
• Delete any unnecessary field settings.
Section 7.11.1 Setting items in
Unable to write a project to the MES Is the total number of fields in the project
Communication action
interface module. more than 8192?
• Up to 8192 fields can be set within one
project.
• Select [Online] - [Transfer setup] and
correct the setting.
Is the IP address set in [Transfer setup] of
• Perform the online operation for the MES
[Online] correct?
interface module selected from [Online] -

APPENDICES
[Transfer setup].
Send a PING request from the
• If no response is returned, check if the
Failed in online operation. configuration computer to the IP address of
module is powered up or if the network is
the MES interface module. Is there a
properly connected.
response?
• Select [Online] - [Transfer setup] and
Has the account set in [Transfer setup] of
correct the setting.
[Online] been registered to the MES
• Specify the account that is registered in
interface module?
the MES interface module.
• Select the job for one-shot execution,

INDEX
Unable to select [One-shot execution] from Was the job for one-shot execution
and then select [Online] [One-shot
[Online]. selected?
execution] from the menu.
• By the error code, check the error details
Check for an error code in [System monitor] and take corrective actions.
of GX Developer. • Re-execute formatting of the
CompactFlash card.
Failed to format the CompactFlash card.
• Stop the MES interface module
Is the MES interface module operation operation, and then execute formatting.
stopped? Section 7.13.8 Formatting the
CompactFlash card
It takes time to write the settings to the Is the MES interface module operation in • Stop the MES interface module
MES interface module. the [Stop] state? operation, and then write the settings.

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.1 When using MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
10 - 35
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10.3.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool

This section explains troubleshooting information on the setting of DB Connection Service

Setting Tool.
Chapter 8 DB CONNECTION SERVICE AND SETTING TOOL

Table 10.16 [DB Connection Service Setting Tool]

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Terminate the already started DB
Unable to start DB Connection Service Has another DB Connection Service Connection Service Setting Tool.
Setting Tool. Setting Tool been already started? • Only one DB Connection Service Setting
Tool can be activated.
Was a user ID having the administrator • Log in again with a user ID having the
authority used for the login? administrator authority.
• Uncheck the [Limit IP addresses permit
Unable to reflect the setting.
to connect] checkbox, or add an IP
Is there no permitted IP address?
address for which connection is
permitted
• Uncheck the [Limit IP addresses permit
to connect] checkbox, or add an IP
Unable to export a file. Is there no permitted IP address?
address for which connection is
permitted.
Is the file set in [Output destination] read-
• Correct the file specification.
only?
An access log output error is recorded in
Is the access to the folder containing the
[Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] in • Check the right of access to the folder.
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
Windows .
Is the drive space of the server computer
• Check the free space on the drive.
full?
Is the file set in [Output destination] read-
• Correct the file specification.
only?
An SQL failure log output error is recorded
Is the access to the folder containing the
in [Event Viewer] of [Administrative Tools] • Check the right of access to the folder.
file set in [Output destination] authorized?
in Windows .
Is the drive space of the server computer
• Check the free space on the drive.
full?

10 - 36 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.2 When using DB Connection Service Setting Tool
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module

XML MESSAGE
This section shows the troubleshooting of problems that may arise during operation of the

FORMAT
MES interface module.

(1) Troubleshooting about LED indication and I/O signals 10

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 10.17 Troubleshooting about LED indication and I/O signals
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is the module in preparation? • Wait for startup of the module.
• If a watchdog timer error is identified,
The RUN LED does not turn on. please consult your local Mitsubishi
Is the Watchdog timer error (X1F) ON?
representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
Is the battery connected? Or, has the • Check the battery connection.
battery voltage dropped? • Replace the battery.

APPENDICES
Is any of the error detection signals (X11,
X12, X16 and X1C) ON? • According to the error code obtained by
X11: Sampling error the error detection shown on the left,
The ERR. LED is on or flashing.
X12: Information linkage error identify the error cause and take
X16: Access target CPU error corrective actions.
X1C: Another error
Check the error code in [System monitor] of • By the error code, identify the error and
GX Developer. take corrective actions.
• Depending on the number of items set in

INDEX
Is the module in preparation? [Access target CPU settings], it may take
several minutes until X0 turns ON.
Module READY (X0) does not turn ON, or it • If many files are stored in the
takes time to turn ON. CompactFlash card, it takes time to turn
Are there many files in the installed
X0 ON.
CompactFlash card?
• Delete unnecessary files from the
CompactFlash card.
Is file access stopped? (X2 is ON?) • Cancel the file access stop.
• If many files are stored in the
CompactFlash card status (X1) does not CompactFlash card, it takes time to turn
Are there many files in the installed
turn ON, or it takes time to turn ON. X1 ON.
CompactFlash card?
• Delete unnecessary files from the
CompactFlash card.

(2) Troubleshooting about network connection

Table 10.18 Troubleshooting about network connection
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is it in "Online" mode? • Change the mode to "Online".
Is the MES interface module connected to • Connect the MES interface module to the
the network? (X4 = ON) network.
Is there any disconnection in the
• Connect the cables properly.
connection route?
Unable to access the MES interface • Correct the IP address setting.
module. Is the IP address duplicated? Section 7.6.1 Setting items in
Network setting
Is there a firewall and/or a proxy server in • Ask your network administrator about the
the connection route? firewall and proxy server settings.
Is there any problem on the personal
• Replace it with another computer.
computer?

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 - 37
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module

and access target CPU
Table 10.19 Troubleshooting about communication between the MES interface module and access target CPU
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
Is a remote password set for the GX • Remove the remote password set for the
Unable to access another station via Q Developer communication port (UDP/IP) of GX Developer communication port (UDP/
series E71. the Q series E71 on the target or relay IP) of the Q series E71 on the target or
station? relay station.

(4) Troubleshooting about the DB interface function

Table 10.20 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• If "Stopped" is displayed, execute
Is "Running" displayed in the status [Restart] from [Remote operation], turn
indication area of [Remote operation]? the power OFF and ON, or reset the PLC
The DB interface function does not work. Section 7.13.1 Checking the CPU.
operation status of the MES Section 7.13.2 Manipulating the
interface function operation status of the MES
interface function
• Set the same value.
Is the port No. set in [Service port] of DB Communication is not available if
Connection Service Setting Tool the same different port numbers are set.
as the port No. set in [Port No.] of [Server Section 7.9.1 Setting items in
service settings] of MES Interface Function Server Service setting
Configuration Tool? Section 8.5 Setting Items of DB
Connection Service Setting Tool
• Disable the firewall setting. Or, enable
Is the firewall function of the operating
the communication of the port number for
system (OS) or security software enabled
No communication has been made with the the TCP/IP port to be used (Default:
on the server computer?
server computer. 5112).
• Change the port number to another that
Is the port specified in [Service port] of DB is not being used for the database or any
Connection Service Setting Tool being used other application.
for the database or any other application? Section 7.9.1 Setting items in
Server Service setting
Has any Check Point software been
• Uninstall the Check Point software.
installed in the server computer?
Is the ODBC setting of the database • Correct the ODBC setting of the
correct? database.

(To the next page)

10 - 38 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.20 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function
Symptom Checked item Corrective action

FORMAT
• Disable the write setting.
In the tag component where statistical Is there any setting that enables data
• Writing data to the tag component where
processing is set, the average, maximum or writing to the tag component where
minimum value to be calculated is reset. statistical processing is set?
statistical processing is set will reset the
statistical values.
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
Has an error occurred in [Error log] of
[Working log]? • If an error has occurred, identify the error
Section 7.12.5 Checking the cause and take corrective actions.
working log of the MES interface Section 10.2 Error Code List
module
When trigger conditions of a job with
[Startup logging] setting are met, is the
startup logged in [Event log] of [Working • If no startup data is logged, refer to the
log]? following:

APPENDICES
Section 7.12.5 Checking the Job will not start up.
working log of the MES interface
module
If the startup log is identified in the above
case, is there an error in [Error log] of
• If an error has occurred, identify the error
[Working log]?
cause and take corrective actions.
Section 7.12.5 Checking the
Section 10.2 Error Code List
working log of the MES interface
module

INDEX
In [Change job status] of [Remote • Enable writing to the database.
Values will not be stored in the database. operation], is [Disable writing to database] Section 7.13.4 Changing the job
set? status
• If an error has occurred, identify the error
Has an error occurred in the access log of
cause and take corrective actions.
DB Connection Service?
Section 10.2 Error Code List
• Unlock them on the database and
Are the relevant records or table locked on
execute it.
the database when inserting or updating
If they are locked, the execution is
data?
delayed until they are unlocked.
In [Connection result of previous job • If "Disconnected" is displayed, correct
execution] of [Remote operation], is the setting of [Server service settings].
"Connected" displayed under [Result]? Section 7.9.1 Setting items in
Section 7.13.3 Checking the Server Service setting
connection of the previous job • Check the network connection route to
execution the database server computer.
Is the [Database type] setting in [Server
service settings] of MES Interface Function
Configuration Tool correct? • Set the database being used.
Section 7.9.1 Setting items in
Server Service setting

(To the next page)

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 - 39
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.20 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Check if [Select/Update conditions] are
met.
• Check if there is any missing field into
which a value is to be inserted.
Is No. of updated or inserted records
• Check if the uniqueness constraint of the
Values will not be stored in the database. indicated as 0 in the access log of DB
database (PRIMARY KEY constraint) is
Connection Service?
violated.
• Check if the value to be stored exceeds
the number of characters defined for the
field.
Has an error occurred in [Error log] of
[Working log]? • If an error has occurred, identify the error
Section 7.12.5 Checking the cause and take corrective actions.
working log of the MES interface Section 10.2 Error Code List
module
When trigger conditions of a job with
[Startup logging] setting are met, is the
startup logged in [Event log] of [Working • If no startup data is logged, refer to the
log]? following:
Section 7.12.5 Checking the Job will not start up.
working log of the MES interface
module
In [Change job status] of [Remote • Enable writing to PLC devices.
operation], is [Disable writing to PLC Section 7.13.4 Changing the job
Database values will not be stored in PLC device] set? status
devices. • If an error has occurred, identify the error
Has an error occurred in the access log of
cause and take corrective actions.
DB Connection Service?
Section 10.2 Error Code List
Is No. of selected records indicated as 0 in • Check if [Select/Update conditions] are
the access log of DB Connection Service? met.
• Do not manipulate the device value in the
Was the relevant device value manipulated
PLC CPU at the time of writing from the
in the PLC CPU?
MES interface module.
• Correct the set number of databases, or
change the number of [Server service
settings] items to the set number of
Is the number of databases set for the
databases.
database server computer sufficient?
Section 7.9 Server Service Setting
• One database connection must be used
for one item of [Server service settings].

(To the next page)

10 - 40 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.20 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function
Symptom Checked item Corrective action

FORMAT
Has an error occurred in [Error log] of
[Working log]? • If an error has occurred, identify the error
Section 7.12.5 Checking the cause and take corrective actions.
10
working log of the MES interface Section 10.2 Error Code List

TROUBLESHOOTING
module
• Correct the [Trigger conditions].
Section 7.10.2 Setting items in
Did the [Trigger conditions] change from
Trigger conditions
false to true completely?
• Start the job when the [Trigger
conditions] change from false to true.
• Correct the [Trigger conditions].
Section 7.10.2 Setting items in
Did the [Combination] of [Trigger
Trigger conditions
conditions] change from false to true

APPENDICES
• Start the job when the [Combination] of
completely?
[Trigger conditions] change from false to
true.
When [Value monitoring startup] is set for • Increase the time for the monitoring
[Trigger conditions], is the time for the target device value change. (Latch it in
monitoring target device value change long the sequence program.)
enough for the sampling interval of the • Shorten the sampling interval of the
device tag? device tag.
Section 7.10.2 (6) Value monitoring Section 7.8.1 Setting items in

INDEX
startup Device Tag setting
Job will not start up. • Enable the job.
Section 7.13.4 Changing the job
status
In [Change job status] of [Remote • To enable the job at startup of the
operation], is the job set to be disabled? module, select [Job settings] - [Enable at
module startup].
Section 7.10.1 Setting items in Job
setting
• Terminate the job that is in execution, or
use another [Server service settings]
item.
Is there any other job that is being Section 7.9 Server Service Setting
executed? • If a job uses the same [Server service
settings] item that is currently used for
another job, the job is not executed until
another job execution is completed.
• If an error has occurred, identify the error
cause and take corrective actions.
Section 10.2 Error Code List
Has an error or job cancellation occurred • When the job uses a tag component for
during job execution? which [Moving average], [Moving
maximum] or [Moving minimum] is
specified, check if sampling for the
specified number of times is completed.

(To the next page)

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 - 41
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

Table 10.20 Troubleshooting about the DB interface function

Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• If an error has occurred, identify the error
Has an error occurred in [Error log] of
cause and take corrective actions.
[Working log]?
Section 10.2 Error Code List
• Use the account that has been used to
Was the Windows account specified in
log on once or more.
The program specified by the program [Server service settings] used to log on the • An account that has not been used
execution function is not executed. application server computer once or more? before cannot be used.
• Set a password of the account, or use
Was the password of the Windows another account that does not have an
account specified in [Server service empty password.
settings] set empty? • An account that has an empty password
cannot be used.
• If the trigger conditions for multiple jobs
are met concurrently, startup of some job
Were the trigger conditions for multiple jobs
may be delayed.
met concurrently?
Section 6.1.10 (1) Operation
behavior of jobs
• If the job execution time is prolonged,
Job startup is delayed.
startup of the next job may be delayed.
Was the job execution time prolonged?
Section 6.1.10 (1) Operation
behavior of jobs
Was the value in the Monitoring interval
• Check and correct the number of job
timeout count area (buffer memory
settings or trigger condition settings.
address: 11510) increased?
• Check the connections with all of the
database server computers.
Is there any problem on the connection • When buffered SQL texts are to be sent
routes to all of the database server to more than one destination, unless the
computers. communication with all the database
Clicking the Resend button in [DB
server computers is recovered,
buffering operation] of [Remote operation] resending is not started.
will not resend buffered SQL texts of the job
• Check each of the DB Connection
for which manual resend is selected.
Services in all the database server
Section 7.13.6 Operating the DB computers.
buffering Are the DB Connection Services in all the
• When buffered SQL texts are to be sent
database server computers operating
to more than one destination, unless DB
normally?
Connection Services in all the database
server computers are operating,
resending is not started.
Data such as DB buffering status, No. of • Select another tag component, or check
Was the setting that enables data writing to
DB bufferings, DB buffer full, or DB buffer the [Job settings] and disable data writing
the tag component made in [Job settings]?
utilization will not be stored in the tag to the relevant tag component.
component which is selected in [DB
buffering settings] of [System setting]. • Specify another device. Or do not
Was the device value of the relevant tag
manipulate the relevant device value in
Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB component manipulated in the PLC CPU?
the PLC CPU.
buffering setting
Was the PLC powered ON immediately • Turn OFF the PLC, and after several
Failed to communicate with the server
after OFF? minutes, turn it ON.
computer several times after module
Is there any problem on the server
startup. • Restart the server computer.
computer?

10 - 42 10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 TROUBLESHOOTING

9
(5) Troubleshooting about the XML processing function

XML MESSAGE
Table 10.21 Troubleshooting about the XML processing function

FORMAT
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• When "Stopped" is displayed, execute
The XML processing function does not Is "Running" displayed in the status [Restart] from [Remote operation]. 10
work. indication area of [Remote operation]? Alternatively, turn the power OFF and

TROUBLESHOOTING
then ON, or reset the PLC CPU.

(6) Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function

Table 10.22 Troubleshooting about the time synchronization function
Symptom Checked item Corrective action
• Correct the [SNTP server address]
Time is not synchronized with the SNTP Is the [SNTP server address] setting setting.
server computer. correct? Section 7.6.2 Setting items in Time

APPENDICES
synchronization setting

INDEX

10.3 Troubleshooting by symptom

10.3.3 When operating the MES interface module
10 - 43
 APPENDICES

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables

Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table

Table App.1 ASCII code table

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 NUL (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 “ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

App - 1 Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables

Appendix 1.1 ASCII code table
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names,
variable names, etc.

XML MESSAGE
FORMAT
(1) ASCII characters
The shaded sections can be used.
(However, neither a number nor an underscore ( _ ) can be used as the first 10
character.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table App.2 ASCII characters
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 NUL (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 “ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u

APPENDICES
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~

INDEX
F / ? O _ o

(2) Reserved terms

The following words are reserved terms and therefore cannot be used.

Table App.3 Reserved terms

Reserved terms
A abstract
B boolean, break, byte
C case, catch, char, class, const, continue
D DATETIME, debugger, default, delete, do, double
E else, enum, event, exit, export, extends
F false, final, finally, float, for, function
G goto
I if, implements, import, in, include, Infinity, instanceof, int, interface, invoke
L long
N NaN, native, new, null
O oneshot
P package, private, protected, public
R return
S short, static, super, switch, synchronized, SYSTEM
T this, throw, throws, trace, transient, true, try, typeof
U undefined
V var, void, volatile
W while, with

Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables

Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable names, etc.
App - 2
 APPENDICES

Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.

The shaded sections can be used.

(Note that use of ":" (colon) is not allowed for [User name] of [Account setting].)

Table App.4 Characters can be used in character string constants, etc.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 NUL (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 “ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

Appendix 1.4 Characters available for field names, table names, etc.

The shaded sections can be used.

(However, a number cannot be used as the first character.)

Table App.5 Characters can be used in field names, table names, etc.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 NUL (SP) 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 “ 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y I y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

App - 3 Appendix 1 Usable Characters and ASCII Code Tables

Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

XML MESSAGE
This section explains the format of CSV files (Setting information files) created by

FORMAT
exporting the project settings with the MES Interface Function Configuration Tool.
Section 7.4.6 Exporting a CSV file
Exported setting information files can be utilized for creating setting sheets or printing. 10

TROUBLESHOOTING
Appendix 2.1 Setting information files list

This section lists the exported setting information files.

Table App.6 List of exported setting information files

Reference
File name Setting contents
section
[System setting] - [Network settings]
SYSTEM.CSV *1 Appendix 2.3

APPENDICES
[System setting] - [Time synchronization setting]
ACCOUNT.CSV *1 [System setting] - [Account setting] Appendix 2.4
DBBUF.CSV [System setting] - [DB buffering settings] Appendix 2.5
CPU.CSV *1 [Access target CPU settings] Appendix 2.6
*1 [Device tag settings] Appendix 2.7
TAG.CSV
*1 [Device tag settings] - [Component setting] Appendix 2.8
COMPONENT.CSV
SERVER.CSV [Server service settings] Appendix 2.9
[Job settings]
JOB.CSV Appendix 2.10

INDEX
[Job settings] - [DB buffering settings]
CONDITION.CSV [Job settings] - [Trigger conditions] Appendix 2.11
ACTION.CSV [Job settings] - [Action] Appendix 2.12
ACFIELD.CSV [Communication action] - [DB-tag link settings] Appendix 2.13
ACCONDITION.CSV [Communication action] - [Select/Update conditions] Appendix 2.14
ACEXCEPTION.CSV [Communication action] - [Exception processing] Appendix 2.15
ACOPERATION.CSV [Operation action] Appendix 2.16
REMOTE.CSV [Job settings] - [Program execution] Appendix 2.17
*1 Saved information setting file can be imported.
Section 7.4.5 Importing a CSV file

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.1 Setting information files list
App - 4
 APPENDICES

Appendix 2.2 Setting information file format and editing precautions

This section explains the setting information file format and editing precautions.
This section shows with an example in which the setting information file is displayed with
spreadsheet software.

(1) Setting information file format

The setting information file format has the type made up of label columns and setting
areas and the type made up of label columns, item rows, and setting areas.

(a) Type made up of label columns and setting areas

Table App.7 Type made up of label columns and setting areas

Item Description

NWTYPE LAN
IPTYPE SPECIFY
IPADDRESS
SUBNET
GATEWAY
File format
SNTPADDRESS
TIMEZONE

Setting area : Displays setting values.

Label column : Displays setting items.

Available file SYSTEM.CSV

(b) Type made up of label columns, item columns, and setting areas

Table App.8 Type made up of label columns, item columns, and setting areas
Item Description

Item row: Displays setting items.

ITEM TAGNAME SAMPLING INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING WRITE COMPNUM

TAG1 Line A EXECUTE 10 NO ENABLE 64
File format Line B
TAG2 HIGHSPEED 1 NO ENABLE 20
TAG5 Line C EXECUTE 5 NO ENABLE 48
TAG64 Line D EXECUTE 1 NO DISABLE 10

Setting area : Displays setting values.

Label column : Displays item numbers or setting items.

ACCOUNT.CSV, DBBUF.CSV, CPU.CSV, TAG.CSV, COMPONENT.CSV, SERVER.CSV,

Available file JOB.CSV, CONDITION.CSV, ACTION.CSV, ACFIELD.CSV, ACCONDITION.CSV,
ACEXCEPTION.CSV, ACOPERATION.CSV, REMOTE.CSV

App - 5 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.2 Setting information file format and editing precautions
APPENDICES

9
(2) Precautions for editing setting information files

XML MESSAGE
For details on how to edit setting information files and setting information files that can

FORMAT
be imported, refer to *1 below.
Appendix 2.1 Setting information files list
10
Point

TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) When editing a setting information file using such as spreadsheet software,
change the setting items to match the setting information file formats,
explained starting from the following descriptions.
(2) When editing a setting information file, make sure to use the exported setting
information file.
A setting information file must not be created by the user.

APPENDICES
(a) Space
All spaces are treated as a part of the item.
If a space is used with a setting item in which a space cannot be used, an error
will occur.

(b) Uppercase/lowercase characters

Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished.

(c) Special characters

INDEX
1) "Line feed"
To input a "Line feed", enter "\n".
(Example) An error occurred in Line A. \n Execute recovery processing.
2) "\" mark
To input "\", enter "\\".
3) "," comma
When inputting a ",", enclose the entire item in double quotation marks.
(However, at the use of Excel, double quotations do not need to be entered
since they are added automatically when the data is saved in CSV format.)
(Example) "As the temperature was abnormal, the machine stopped"

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.2 Setting information file format and editing precautions
App - 6
 APPENDICES

(3) How to see the setting information file formats

The following shows how to see the setting information file formats explained starting
from the subsequent descriptions.
The figure below is for explanation, and therefore differs from the actual pages.

Indicates a file name.

Indicates the
corresponding setting.
Shows settings
corresponding to the label
columns and item rows in
the file format and
explanations for them.

Shows setting item name

and a condition in
entering a setting value.
Figure App.1 How to see the setting information file formats

(a) Setting values

1) Setting values in [ ] ((Example) [YES])
Enter alphabetic characters in uppercase.
2) (Blank)
Unnecessary to enter setting values.
3) Settings other than 1) and 2) above
Enter any value according to the setting range for the setting value column.

App - 7 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.2 Setting information file format and editing precautions
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.3 SYSTEM.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.9 File format
Item Description
File name SYSTEM.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
• [System setting] - [Network settings] Section 7.6.1 Setting items in Network setting
File contents • [System setting] - [Time synchronization setting] Section 7.6.2 Setting items in Time
synchronization setting

NWTYPE LAN
IPTYPE SPECIFY
1 IPADDRESS 192.168.3.3
2 SUBNET 255.255.255.0
3 GATEWAY
DNSTYPE SPECIFY

APPENDICES
DNS1
DNS2
HTTPTYPE DEFAULT
HTTPPORT
HTTPNAT NO
FTPTYPE DEFAULT
FTPPORT
FTPNAT NO
SYSTEMNAME QJ71MES96
DIAGNOSIS NO
INTERVAL

INDEX
DESTINATION
EDEVICE
STARTUP YES
4 SNTP PLC
5 SNTPADDRESS
6 TIMEZONE
7 DBBUFSIZE 64

File format Label column : Change disabled.

Setting area : Can be changed by the user.

[System setting]

5 6

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.3 SYSTEM.CSV
App - 8
 APPENDICES

(2) Label
Table App.10 Label
Label Description Setting value
— NWTYPE (Fixed value) [LAN]
— IPTYPE (Fixed value) [SPECIFY]

1 IPADDRESS IP address IP address (Decimal)

2 SUBNET Subnet mask Subnet mask (Decimal)

3 GATEWAY Default gateway Default gateway (Decimal) or (Blank)

— DNSTYPE (Fixed value) [SPECIFY]
— DNS1 (Fixed value) (Blank)
— DNS2 (Fixed value) (Blank)
— HTTPTYPE (Fixed value) [DEFAULT]
— HTTPPORT (Fixed value) (Blank)
— HTTPNAT (Fixed value) [NO]
— FTPTYPE (Fixed value) [DEFAULT]
— FTPPORT (Fixed value) (Blank)
— FTPNAT (Fixed value) [NO]
— SYSTEMNAME (Fixed value) [QJ71MES96]
— DIAGNOSIS (Fixed value) [NO]
— INTERVAL (Fixed value) (Blank)
— DESTINATION (Fixed value) (Blank)
— EDEVICE (Fixed value) (Blank)
— STARTUP (Fixed value) [YES]
Time Synchronize with PLC CPU time [PLC]
4 SNTP synchronization
Synchronize with SNTP [SNTP]
setting
SNTP server When [PLC] is selected with SNTP (Blank)
5 SNTPADDRESS
address When [SNTP] is selected with SNTP SNTP server address (Decimal)
When [PLC] is selected with SNTP (Blank)
6 TIMEZONE SNTP time zone
When [SNTP] is selected with SNTP Time zone character strings

7 DB BUFSIZE DB buffering capacity 16 to 512

App - 9 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.3 SYSTEM.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.4 ACCOUNT.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.11 File format
Item Description
File name ACCOUNT.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [System setting] - [Account setting] Section 7.6.3 Setting items in Account setting

2 3

ITEM USERNAME PASSWORD DWRITE TWRITE ADMINISTRATOR

ACCOUNT1 QJ71MES96 MITSUBISHI YES YES YES
ACCOUNT2 USER1 USERUSER1 YES YES YES
1)
ACCOUNT12 USER2 USERUSER2 YES YES YES
ACCOUNT16 USER3 USERUSER3 YES YES YES

APPENDICES
INITIAL FILENAME
TOP
TOP
1)
TOP
File format TOP
Item row : Change disabled.
Label column, setting area : Can be changed by the user.

INDEX
[System setting]

1
2
3

(2) Label
Table App.12 Label
Label Description
ACCOUNT1 to Set [Account setting] items No. 1 to 16.
1 ACCOUNT16 Enter only the labels desired to be set. (Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set.)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.4 ACCOUNT.CSV
App - 10
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.13 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
*1 *2
2 USERNAME User name 1 to 20 characters

*1
3 PASSWORD Password 8 to 14 characters
— DWRITE (Fixed value) [YES]
— TWRITE (Fixed value) [YES]
— ADMINISTRATOR (Fixed value) [YES]
— INITIAL (Fixed value) [TOP]
— FILENAME (Fixed value) (Blank)

*1 For characters can be used in user names and passwords, refer to the following.
Appendix 1.3 Characters available for character string constants, etc.
*2 If the same user name already exists, the existing name is overwritten.
If the same user name is set multiple times, the setting of the label with the higher number is
overwritten.

App - 11 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.4 ACCOUNT.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.5 DBBUF.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.14 File format
Item Description
File name DBBUF.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [System setting] - [DB buffering settings] Section 7.6.4 Setting items in DB buffering setting

7 8

ITEM TAG ELEMENT

1 STATUS 1 3
2 RECORDSIZE 2 1
3 FULL
4 USERATE
5 RESENDING
6 CLEARING

APPENDICES
Item row
File format Label column, setting area

[System setting] 7 8
1
2
5

INDEX
6
3
4

(2) Label
Table App.15 Label
Label Description

1 STATUS [DB buffering status]

2 RECORDSIZE [No. of DB bufferings]

3 FULL [DB buffer full]

4 USERATE [DB buffer utilization]

5 RESENDING [Resend DB buffer request]

6 CLEARING [Clear DB buffer request]

(3) Setting item

Table App.16 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
When set 1 to 64
7 TAG Tag
When not set (Blank)
When set 1 to 256
8 ELEMENT Component When the TAG is blank (Blank)
When not set (Blank)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.5 DBBUF.CSV
App - 12
 APPENDICES

Appendix 2.6 CPU.CSV

(1) File format

Table App.17 File format
Item Description
File name CPU.CSV
File contents [Access target CPU settings] Section 7.7.1 Setting items in Access target CPU setting

2 3 4 5 6

ITEM CPUNAME SERIES MULTI CPU OTHER STATION NET1

CPU1 Contorol CPU QCPU NO NO
CPU2 Assembly equipment QCPU 1 SINGLE ETHERNET
1)
CPU5 Painting equipment QNACPU DIFFERENT NET10
CPU60 Welding equipment ACPU SINGLE CCLINK

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

NETNO1 IO1 STATION1 NET2 NETNO2 IO2 STATION2

2 3
1)
3 1 CCLINK 20 2
40 4
Item row : Change disabled.
Label column, setting area : Can be changed by the user.

[Access target CPU setting]

File format
2

1 3
4
5

6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13

App - 13 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.6 CPU.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
(2) Label

XML MESSAGE
Table App.18 Label

FORMAT
Label Description
Set [Access target CPU settings] items No. 1. (Setting required)
CPU1
Only [CPUNAME] can be set. (Other setting items are disabled.)
1 Set [Access target CPU settings] items No. 2 to 64.
10
CPU2 to CPU64
Enter only the labels desired to be set. (Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Setting item
Table App.19 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
*1 *2
2 CPUNAME CPU name Up to 16 characters
QCPU (Q mode) [QCPU]
QCPU (A mode) [QCPUA]
3 SERIES PLC series
QnACPU [QNACPU]

APPENDICES
ACPU [ACPU]
No specification [NO]
When [QCPU] is CPU No. 1 [1]
selected with CPU No. 2 [2]
Multiple CPU
4 MULTI CPU
specification
SERIES CPU No. 3 [3]
CPU No. 4 [4]
When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with SERIES
No specification *3 [NO]
Other station

INDEX
5 OTHER STATION
specification
Other station (Single network) [SINGLE]
Other station (Different network) [DIFFERENT]
When [SINGLE] or NET/10(H) [NET10]
[DIFFERENT] is CC-Link [CCLINK]
selected with Ethernet [ETHERNET]

6 NET1 Network OTHER STATION

C24 [C24]
*4 *5

When [NO] is selected with OTHER

(Blank)
STATION
When [SINGLE] or [DIFFERENT] is
selected with OTHER STATION and
1 to 239
7 NETNO1 Network No. [NET10] or [ETHERNET]
is selected with NET1
When other than the above is selected (Blank)
When [SINGLE] or [DIFFERENT] is
selected with OTHER STATION and 0h to FE0h (Hexadecimal)
8 IO1 I/O Address
[CCLINK] or [C24] is selected with NET1
When other than the above is selected (Blank)
When [NET10] or
[ETHERNET]
1 to 64
is selected with
When [SINGLE] or NET1
[DIFFERENT] is When [CCLINK]
selected with is selected with 0 to 63
9 STATION1 Station number
OTHER STATION NET1
When [C24] is
selected with 0 to 31
N+ET1
When [NO] is selected with OTHER
(Blank)
STATION

(To the next page)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.6 CPU.CSV
App - 14
 APPENDICES

(From the previous page)

Table App.19 Setting item

Item Description Setting value
When NET/10(H) [NET10]
[DIFFERENT] is CC-Link [CCLINK]
selected with Ethernet [ETHERNET]
10 NET2 Network OTHER STATION
C24 [C24]
*6 *7 *8
When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with OTHER STATION
When [DIFFERENT] is selected with
OTHER STATION and [NET10] or 1 to 239
11 NETNO2 Network No.
[ETHERNET] is selected with NET2
When other than the above is selected (Blank)
When [DIFFERENT] is selected with
OTHER STATION and [CCLINK] or 0h to FE0h (Hexadecimal)
12 IO2 I/O Address
[C24] is selected with NET2
When other than the above is selected (Blank)
When [NET10] or
[ETHERNET]
1 to 64
is selected with
When NET2
[DIFFERENT] is When [CCLINK]
selected with is selected with 0 to 63
13 STATION2 Station number
OTHER STATION NET2
When [C24] is
selected with 0 to 31
NET2
When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with OTHER STATION

*1 For characters can be used in CPU names, refer to the following.

Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable names, etc.
*2 If the same CPU name already exists, the existing name is overwritten.
If the same CPU name is set multiple times, the setting of the label with the higher number is
overwritten.
*3 [NO] cannot be set when other than [QCPU] is selected with SERIES.
Make the setting causes an error.
*4 [CCLINK] and [C24] cannot be set when [QNACPU] is selected with SERIES and [DIFFERENT] is
selected with OTHER STATION.
Make the settings causes an error.
*5 When [QCPUA] or [ACPU] is selected with SERIES
• [ETHERNET] and [C24] cannot be set when [SINGLE] is selected with OTHER STATION.
Make the settings causes an error.
• [CCLINK] and [C24] cannot be set when [DIFFERENT] is selected with OTHER STATION.
Make the settings causes an error.
*6 [NET10] and [ETHERNET] cannot be set when [NET10] or [ETHERNET] is selected with NET1.
Make the settings causes an error.
*7 [CCLINK] and [C24] cannot be set when [CCLINK] or [C24] is selected with NET1.
Make the settings causes an error.
*8 [NET10], [ETHERNET], and [C24] cannot be set when other than [QCPU] is selected with
SERIES.
Make the settings causes an error.

App - 15 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.6 CPU.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.7 TAG.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.20 File format
Item Description
File name TAG.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Device tag settings] Section 7.8.1 Setting items in Device Tag setting

2 3 4 5 6

ITEM TAGNAME SAMPLING INTERVAL BEFORE LOGGING WRITE BLOCKREAD

TAG1 Line A EXECUTE 10 NO ENABLE NO
TAG2 Line B HIGHSPEED 1 NO ENABLE NO
TAG5 Line C EXECUTE 5 NO ENABLE YES
TAG64 Line D EXECUTE 1 NO DISABLE NO

APPENDICES
COMPNUM
64
20
1)
48
File format 10

Item row : Change disabled.

Label column, setting area : Can be changed by the user.

[Device Tag setting]

INDEX
2 5

1 4 6
3

(2) Label
Table App.21 Label
Label Description
Set [Device tag settings] items No. 1 to 64.
1 TAG1 to TAG64
Enter only the labels desired to be set. (Unnecessary to enter labels not to be set.)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.7 TAG.CSV
App - 16
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.22 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 TAGNAME Device tag name *1 2 3

* * Up to 16 characters
Do not sample [NOT]
Sampling
SAMPLING Normal sampling [EXECUTE]
3 specification
High-speed sampling *4 [HIGHSPEED]
When [NOT] is selected with SAMPLING (Blank)
When [EXECUTE] is selected with
1 to 32767 (Unit: Second)
4 INTERVAL Sampling interval SAMPLING
When [HIGHSPEED] is selected with
1 to 600 (Unit: 100 ms)
SAMPLING
— BEFORE LOGGING (Fixed value) [NO]
Prohibit data Disable [DISABLE]
5 WRITE
writing Enable [ENABLE]
Enhance sampling When enabled [YES]
6 BLOCKREAD
efficiency When disabled [NO]
— COMPNUM No. of components 0 to 256

*1 For characters can be used in device tag names, refer to the following.
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable names, etc.
*2 A name same as a server service name cannot be set.
Make the setting causes an error.
*3 If the same device tag name already exists, the setting of the label with the higher number is
overwritten.
*4 Registration of [High-speed sampling] is limited to one tag only.
Setting multiple tags for high-speed sampling causes an error.

App - 17 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.7 TAG.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.8 COMPONENT.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.23 File format
Item Description
File name COMPONENT.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Device tag settings] - [Component setting] Section 7.8.2 Setting items in Component setting

2 3 4 5

ITEM COMPNAME CPUNO DATATYPE DEVICE FORMAT

COMPONENT1-1 Valve 1 BIT M12 DEC
COMPONENT1-2 Flow 1 SINGLE D1003 DEC
1)
COMPONENT64-1 Pressure 1 DOUBLE D5000 DEC
COMPONENT64-2 Opening degree (%) 2 REAL W100 DEC

APPENDICES
6 7 8

DECIMAL PLACES OPERATOR OPERAND STATISTICS STATTYPE STATSIZE

0 NONE DISABLE
0 NONE ENABLE AVERAGE
1)
File format 0 NONE ENABLE MAXIMUM
0 NONE DISABLE
Item row : Change disabled.
Label column, setting area : Can be changed by the user.

INDEX
[Device Tag setting]

2 3
5 4
6
7 8

(2) Label
Table App.24 Label
Label Description
• Set [Device tag settings] items No. 1 to 64 - [Component setting] items No. 1 to 256.

COMPONENT64-256
Indicates [Component setting] No.1 to 256.
COMPONENT1-1 to Indicates [Device Tag setting] No.1 to 64.
1 COMPONENT64-256
• Necessary to set the number of labels set with TAG.CSV [COMPNUM]
The label setting following it are ignored.
(Example) When TAG.CSV label [TAG5] has [COMPNUM] of 10
COMPONENT.CSV must set labels COMPONENT5-1 to COMPONENT5-10.

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.8 COMPONENT.CSV
App - 18
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.25 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 COMPNAME Component name *1 2

* Up to 16 characters
1 to 64 (However, only one high-speed
3 CPUNO CPU name *3
sampling tag allowed.)
Single precision [SINGLE]
Double precision [DOUBLE]
Floating point [REAL]
4 DATATYPE Data type
Bit [BIT]
Character string (The number shows
[STRING1] to [STRING32]
the number of characters.)

5 DEVICE Device *4 Device

— FORMAT (Fixed value) [DEC]
— DECIMAL PLACES (Fixed value) [0]
— OPERATOR (Fixed value) [NONE]
— OPERAND (Fixed value) (Blank)
Perform When enabled [ENABLE]
6 STATISTICS statistical
When disabled [DISABLE]
processing
When [DISABLE] is selected
(Blank)
with STATISTICS
Average [AVERAGE]
Maximum [MAXIMUM]
7 STATTYPE Statistical type When [ENABLE]
Minimum [MINIMUM]
is selected with
Moving average [MOVINGAVERAGE]
STATISTICS
Moving maximum [MOVINGMAXIMUM]
Moving minimum [MOVINGMINIMUM]
When [DISABLE] is selected
(Blank)
with STATISTICS
Average (Blank)
Maximum (Blank)
8 STATSIZE No. of samples When [ENABLE]
Minimum (Blank)
is selected with
Moving average 2 to 20
STATISTICS
Moving maximum 2 to 20
Moving minimum 2 to 20

*1 For characters can be used for component names, refer to the following:
Appendix 1.2 Characters available for item names, component names, variable names, etc.
*2 If the same component name already exists in the same item (Tag), the existing name is
overwritten.
Also, if the same component name is set multiple times in the same item (Tag), the setting of the
label with the higher number is overwritten.
*3 Specify [Access target CPU settings] No. that is set in the CPU.CSV label.
Specifying [Access target CPU settings] No. that is not set in CPU.CSV causes an error.
*4 Setting a device that does not exist causes an error.
Setting a device that does not match the data type causes an error.
If the total of device points is set greater than 96 at [High-speed sampling] selection, this causes
an error.

App - 19 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.8 COMPONENT.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.9 SERVER.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.26 File format
Item Description
File name SERVER.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Server service settings] Section 7.9.1 Setting items in Server Service setting

2 3 4 5 6

SERVER SERVERNAME SERVERTYPE IPADDRESS PORT USERNAME

SERVER1 Application APP 192.168.3.10 5112 USERNAME1
SERVER2 Oracle9i DB 192.168.3.11 5113 USERNAME2
1)
SERVER3 Oracle10g DB 192.168.3.12 5114 USERNAME3
SERVER4 SQLServer2000 DB 192.168.3.13 5115 USERNAME4

APPENDICES
7 8 9 10 11 12

PASSWORD SORCENAME DBTYPE ERRORWRITE DEVICETAG ELEMENT

PASSWORD1 DISABLE
PASSWORD2 DB1 ORACLE9I ENABLE 32 1
1)
PASSWORD3 DB2 ORACLE10G DISABLE
PASSWORD4 DB3 SQLSERVER ENABLE 64 10

Item row
Label column, setting area

INDEX
File format
[Server Service setting]

1 3
4
5
6
7

8
9
10

11 12

(2) Label
Table App.27 Label
Label Description
SERVER1 to
1 SERVER32
[Server service settings] No. 1 to 32

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.9 SERVER.CSV
App - 20
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.28 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 SERVERNAME Sever service name Up to 16 characters

Database server [DB]
3 SERVERTYPE Server type
Application server [APP]

4 IPADDRESS IP address IP address (Decimal)

5 PORT Port number 1024 to 65535

6 USERNAME User name Up to 30 characters

7 PASSWORD Password Up to 30 characters

When [DB] is selected with
Character string
Data source SERVERTYPE
8 SOURCENAME
name When [APP] is selected with
(Blank)
SERVERTYPE
Oracle 8i [ORACLE8I]
Oracle 9i [ORACLE9I]
When [DB] is Oracle 10g [ORACLE10G]
selected with SQL Server 2000 [SQLSRV2000]
9 DBTYPE Database type SERVERTYPE MSDE2000 [MSDE2000]
Access 2000 [ACCESS2000]
Access 2003 [ACCESS2003]
When [APP] is selected with
(Blank)
SERVERTYPE
Access error When enabled [ENABLE]
10 ERRORWRITE
notification setting When disabled [DISABLE]

11 DEVICETAG Tag 1 to 64

12 ELEMENT Component 1 to 256

App - 21 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.9 SERVER.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.10 JOB.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.29 File format
Item Description
File name JOB.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
• [Job settings] Section 7.10.1 Setting items in Job setting
• [Job settings] - [DB Buffering] Section 7.10.4 Setting items in DB Buffering
File contents
• [Job settings] - [Notify errors (job cancellation) that occur during job execution]
Section 7.10.5 Setting items for job cancellation

2 3 4 5 6

JOB JOBNAME JOBTYPE TRGBUFFERING LOGGING DEBUGMODE

JOB1 Product management 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE
JOB2 Value management DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE

APPENDICES
1)
JOB3 Monitoring status ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE
JOB4 Product management 2 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE

7 8 9

SQLBUFFERING JOINTCONDITION ACTIONNUM CANCELWRITE

AUTORESEND 5 ENABLE
DISABLE OR 3 DISABLE
1) 2)
MANUALRESEND AND 10 DISABLE

INDEX
DISABLE 7 DISABLE

10 11 12

CANCELTAG CANCELELEMENT CANCELVALUE

32 1 1
File format
2)

Item row
Label column, setting area

[Job setting]

2 3
4
8 6
1

10 11 12

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.10 JOB.CSV
App - 22
 APPENDICES

(2) Label
Table App.30 Label
Label Description

1 JOB1 to JOB64 [Job settings] No. 1 to 64

(3) Setting item

Table App.31 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 JOBNAME Job name Up to 16 characters

Enable at module When enabled [ENABLE]
3 JOBTYPE
startup setting When disabled [DISABLE]
When enabled [ENABLE]
4 TRGBUFFRING Trigger buffering
When disabled [DISABLE]
When enabled [ENABLE]
5 LOGGING Startup logging
When disabled [DISABLE]
When enabled [ENABLE]
6 DEBUGMODE Test mode
When disabled [DISABLE]
When disabled [DISABLE]
Manually resending data at recovery [MANUALRESEND]
7 SQLBUFFERING DB buffering
Automatically resending data at
[AUTORESEND]
recovery
When the condition is 0 or 1 (Blank)
8 JOINTCONDITION Combination When there are 2 AND [AND]
conditions OR [OR]
— ACTIONNUM Job action count 1 to 10

Notify errors (job When enabled [ENABLE]

cancellation) that
9 CANCELWRITE
occur during job
execution When disabled [DISABLE]

10 CANCELTAG Tag 1 to 64

11 CANCELELEMENT Component 1 to 256

12 CANCELVALUE Substitute value Optional

App - 23 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.10 JOB.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.32 File format
Item Description
File name CONDITION.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Job settings] - [Trigger conditions] Section 7.10.2 Setting items in Trigger conditions

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ITEM TYPE YEAR MONTH DAY WEEK HOUR MINUTE
CONDITION1-1 SCHEDULING 31 17 30
CONDITION1-2 NONE
1)
CONDITION2-1 TIMER
CONDITION2-2 VALUE
1

APPENDICES
9 10 11 12 13
SECOND TIMER MONITORTAG MONITORELEMENT COMPARECONDITION
0
1) 2)
60
1 5 GREATERTHAN
14 15 16 17
COMPARETYPE COMPARETAG COMPAREELEMENT COMPAREEVAL

INDEX
File format
2) 3)
VALUE 3000
18 19 20
HANDSHAKESTARTTAG HANDSHAKESTARTELEMENT HANDSHAKEENDTAG

3) 4)

21
HANDSHAKEENDELEMENT

4)

Item row
Label column, setting area

(To the next page)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV
App - 24
 APPENDICES

(From the previous page)

Table App.32 File format

Item Description

[Job setting]

3 4 5 7 8

6
File format
(Continued)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18

19 20

(2) Label
Table App.33 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - [Trigger conditions] - 1: [Trigger 1], 2: [Trigger 2]

CONDITION1-1 to CONDITION64-2
1 CONDITION64-2 Indicates 1: [Trigger 1], 2: [Trigger 2].
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

App - 25 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
(3) Setting item

XML MESSAGE
Table App.34 Setting item

FORMAT
Item Description Setting value
Disable [NONE]
Time specification startup [SCHEDULING] 10
Fixed scan interval [TIMER]

TROUBLESHOOTING
2 TYPE Condition type
Value monitoring startup [VALUE]
At module startup [UNITSTART]
Handshake operation [HANDSHAKE]
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 1000 to 9999
3 YEAR Year
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 1 to 12
4 MONTH Month
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 1 to 31
5 DAY Day
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)

APPENDICES
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 0 to 127 (Decimal) *1
6 WEEK Day of the week
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 0 to 23
7 HOUR Hour
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [SCHEDULING] is selected with TYPE 0 to 59
8 MINUTE Minute
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
— SECOND (Fixed value) (Blank)
When [TIMER] is selected with TYPE 1 to 32767
9 TIMER Period
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)

INDEX
When [VALUE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 64
10 MONITORTAG Tag
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [VALUE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 256
11 MONITORELEMENT Component
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
= [EQUAL]
[NOTEQUAL]
When [VALUE] [LESSTHANEQUAL]
12 COMPARECONDITION Condition is selected with TYPE [GREATERTHANEQUAL]
< [LESSTHAN]
> [GREATERTHAN]
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)

Tag [TAG]
When [VALUE]
13 COMPARETYPE Tag/type is selected with TYPE
Constant [VALUE]

When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)

When [VALUE] is selected with TYPE and [TAG] is
1 to 64
14 COMPARETAG Comparison tag selected with COMPARETYPE
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [VALUE] is selected with TYPE and [TAG] is
Comparison 1 to 256
15 COMPAREELEMENT
component value
selected with COMPARETYPE
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)

(To the next page)

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV
App - 26
 APPENDICES

(From the previous page)

Table App.35 Setting item

Item Description Setting value
When [VALUE] is selected with TYPE and Any number or character
Comparison
16 COMPAREEVAL
constant value
[VALUE] is selected with COMPARETYPE string
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
HANDSHAKESTARTTA Handshake When [HANDSHAKE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 64
17 G startup - Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
Handshake When [HANDSHAKE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 256
HANDSHAKESTARTELE
18 MENT
startup -
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
Component
Completion When [HANDSHAKE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 64
19 HANDSHAKEENDTAG
notification - Tag When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
Completion When [HANDSHAKE] is selected with TYPE 1 to 256
HANDSHAKEENDELEM
20 ENT
notification -
When other than the above is selected with TYPE (Blank)
Component

*1 The setting value for the day of the week is expressed in decimal numbers.
For the setting value contents, check with the method below.
1) Convert a decimal number to a binary number.
2) Each binary bit is the setting contents for the day of the week.

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Sunday Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday

Figure App.2 Setting contents for the day of the week

0: Not set
1: Set
(Example) When the WEEK setting value is 85

85 (Decimal number)

Convert decimal number into binary number.

1010101 (Binary number)

Check the corresponding bits.

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Sunday Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday

Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and Sunday are set.

Figure App.3 Setting example for day of the week

App - 27 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.11 CONDITION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.12 ACTION.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.36 File format
Item Description
File name ACTION.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Job settings] - [Action] Section 7.11 Job Setting - Actions

2 3 4

ITEM TYPE DB DBTABLE FILEDSNUM

ACTION1-1 UPDATE 1 KANRYOHOKOKU1 4
ACTION2-1 UPDATE 2 KANRYOHOKOKU2 4
1)
ACTION2-2 INSERT 3 ERRORLOG 4
ACTION3-1 OPERATION

APPENDICES
CONDNUM EXCEPTNUM OPENUM
1 1
1 1
1)

5
Item row
Label column, setting area

INDEX
[Job setting]

File format
1

[Communication action]
3 4

[Operation action]
2

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.12 ACTION.CSV
App - 28
 APPENDICES

(2) Label
Table App.37 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - [Action] No. 1 to 10

ACTION1-1 to
1 ACTION64-10
ACTION64-10
Indicates [Action] No.1 to 10.
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

(3) Setting item

Table App.38 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
Select [SELECT]
Update [UPDATE]
2 TYPE Action type
Insert [INSERT]
Operation [OPERATION]
When [SELECT], [UPDATE], or
1 to 32
[INSERT] is selected with TYPE
3 DB Database
When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE
When [SELECT], [UPDATE], or
Any character string
[INSERT] is selected with TYPE
4 DBTABLE Table name
When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE
When [SELECT], [UPDATE], or
1 to 256
DB-Tag link [INSERT] is selected with TYPE
— FILEDSNUM
setting When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE
When [SELECT], [UPDATE], or
0 to 8
Number of select/ [INSERT] is selected with TYPE
— CONDNUM
update conditions When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE
When [SELECT], [UPDATE], or
0 to 2
Exception [INSERT] is selected with TYPE
— EXCEPTNUM
processing count When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE
When [OPERATION] is selected with
1 to 20
Operation action TYPE
— OPENUM
count When other than the above is
(Blank)
selected with TYPE

App - 29 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.12 ACTION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.13 ACFIELD.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.39 File format
Item Description
File name ACFIELD.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
[Communication action] - [DB-tag link settings] Section 7.11.1 Setting items in Communication
File contents
action

2 3 4 5 6

ITEM FIELDNAME TYPE TAG ELEMENT VALUE

FIELD1-1-1 Completed TAG 1 1
FIELD1-1-2 Rejected TAG 1 2
FIELD1-1-3 Date DATE SERVER

APPENDICES
Item row
File format Label column, setting area

[Communication action]

INDEX
2 3 4 5 6

(2) Label
Table App.40 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - [Action] No. 1 to 10 - [DB-tag link settings] No. 1 to 256

FIELD64-10-256
FIELD1-1-1 to
1 FIELD64-10-256 Indicates [DB-Tag link setting] No.1 to 256.
Indicates [Action] No.1 to 10.
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.13 ACFIELD.CSV
App - 30
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.41 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 FIELDNAME Field name Any character string

Tag [TAG]
Date [DATE]
Date string [DATESTR]
3 TYPE Constant type Numerical value [NUMBER]
Character string [STRING]
Variable [VARIABLE]
None [NONE]
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE 1 to 64
4 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with TYPE
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE 1 to 256
5 ELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with TYPE
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [DATE] is Server time [SERVER]
selected with
Unit time [UNIT]
TYPE
When [DATESTR] is selected with
Character string valid as a date
TYPE
6 VALUE Constant value
When [NUMBER] is selected with
Numerical value
TYPE
When [STRING] is selected with TYPE Any character string
When [VARIABLE] is selected with
Variable name
TYPE
When [NONE] is selected with TYPE (Blank)

App - 31 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.13 ACFIELD.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.14 ACCONDITION.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.42 File format
Item Description
File name ACCONDITION.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Communication action] - [Select/Update conditions] Section 7.11.1 (5) Select/Update conditions

2 3 4 5 6 7

ITEM FIELDNAME TYPE COMPARE TAG ELEMENT VALUE

CONDITION1-1-1 Work_No1 TAG EQUAL 1 1
CONDITION1-2-1 NUMBER NUMBER LESSTHAN 100
CONDITION1-3-1 Work_No2 TAG EQUAL 1 2

1
Item row

APPENDICES
File format Label column, setting area

[Communication action]

2 4 3 5 6 7

INDEX
(2) Label
Table App.43 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - [Action] No. 1 to 10 - [Select/Update conditions] No. 1 to 8

CONDITION1-1-1 to CONDITION64-10-8
1 CONDITION64-10-8 Indicates [Select/Update conditions] No.1 to 8.
Indicates [Action] No.1 to 10.
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.14 ACCONDITION.CSV
App - 32
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.44 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

2 FIELDNAME Field name Any character string

Tag [TAG]
Date [DATE]
Date string [DATESTR]
3 TYPE Constant type Numerical value [NUMBER]
Character string [STRING]
Variable [VARIABLE]
None [NONE]
= [EQUAL]
[NOTEQUAL]
Select/Update [LESSTHANEQUAL]
4 COMPARE
conditions [GREATERTHANEQUAL]
< [LESSTHAN]
> [GREATERTHAN]
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE 1 to 64
5 TAG Tag When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with TYPE
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE 1 to 256
6 ELEMENT Component When other than the above is selected
(Blank)
with TYPE
When [TAG] is selected with TYPE (Blank)
When [DATE] is Server time [SERVER]
selected with
Unit time [UNIT]
TYPE
When [DATESTR] is selected with
Character string valid as a date
TYPE
7 VALUE Constant value
When [NUMBER] is selected with
Numerical value
TYPE
When [STRING] is selected with TYPE Any character string
When [VARIABLE] is selected with
Variable name
TYPE
When [NONE] is selected with TYPE (Blank)

App - 33 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.14 ACCONDITION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.15 ACEXCEPTION.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.45 File format
Item Description
File name ACEXCEPTION.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
[Communication action] - [Exception processing]
File contents • Section 7.11.1 (6) Exception processing: No applicable record
• Section 7.11.1 (7) Exception processing: Multiple applicable records

2 3 4 5 6 7

ITEM EXEC QUIT NOTICE TAG ELEMENT VALUE

EXCEPTION1-1-1 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE
EXCEPTION3-1-1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE 3 1 300
EXCEPTION3-1-2 ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE
EXCEPTION15-2-1 DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 15 5 100

APPENDICES
1
Item row
Label column, setting area

File format

[Communication action]

INDEX
1
2
4
3

5 6 7

(2) Label
Table App.46 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - [Action] No. 1 to 10 - 1: [Exception processing: No applicable record], 2:
[Exception processing: Multiple applicable records]

EXCEPTION1-1-1 to EXCEPTION64-10-2
1 EXCEPTION64-10-2
Indicates 1: [Exception processing: No applicable record],
2: [Exception processing: Multiple applicable records].
Indicates [Action] No.1 to 10.
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.15 ACEXCEPTION.CSV
App - 34
 APPENDICES

(3) Setting item

Table App.47 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
Do not select [DISABLE]
2 EXEC Select from any record
Select [ENABLE]
Do not terminate [DISABLE]
3 QUIT Forcibly stop job
Terminate [ENABLE]
Do not execute exception
[DISABLE]
processing
4 NOTICE Notify this exception
Execute exception
[ENABLE]
processing

5 TAG Tag 1 to 64

6 ELEMENT Component 1 to 256

7 VALUE Substitute value Optional

App - 35 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.15 ACEXCEPTION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 2.16 ACOPERATION.CSV

XML MESSAGE
(1) File format

FORMAT
Table App.48 File format
Item Description
File name ACOPERATION.CSV
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
File contents [Operation action] Section 7.11.2 Setting items in Operation action

2 3 4 5

ITEM OUTCONSTTYPE OUTTAG OUTELEMENT OUTPUT

OPERATION1-3-1 TAG 1 11
OPERATION5-1-1 VARIABLE Correction voltage
1)
OPERATION5-1-2 VARIABLE Correction voltage
OPERATION5-1-3 TAG 15 3

APPENDICES
6 7 8 9 10 11

IN1CONSTTYPE IN1TAG IN1ELEMENT INPUT1 OPERATION IN2CONSTTYPE

TAG 1 1 DEVIDE TAG
TAG 15 1 MULTIPLY NUMBER
1) 2)
VARIABLE Correction voltage ADD NUMBER
VARIABLE Correction voltage MULTIPLY TAG

12 13 14
File format IN2TAG IN2ELEMENT INPUT2
1 2

INDEX
100
2)
50
15 2
Item row
Label column, setting area

[Operation action]
1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14

10

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.16 ACOPERATION.CSV
App - 36
 APPENDICES

(2) Label
Table App.49 Label
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 10 - [Action] No. 1 to 10 - [Operation action] No. 1 to 20

OPERATION1-1-1 to OPERATION64-10-20
1 OPERATION64-10-20 Indicates [Operation action] No.1 to 20.
Indicates [Action] No.1 to 10.
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

(3) Setting item

Table App.50 Setting item
Item Description Setting value
Substitution Tag [TAG]
2 OUTCONSTTYPE
constant type Variable [VARIABLE]
When [TAG] is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 64
3 OUTTAG Substitution tag
When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE (Blank)
Substitute When [TAG] is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE 1 to 256
4 OUTELEMENT
component When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE (Blank)
Substitute When [TAG] is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE (Blank)
5 OUTPUT
variable When other than the above is selected with OUTCONSTTYPE Variable name
Tag [TAG]
Date string [DATESTR]
Input 1 Numerical value [NUMBER]
6 IN1CONSTTYPE
Constant type Character string [STRING]
Variable [VARIABLE]
None [NONE]
When [TAG] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 64
7 IN1TAG Input 1 Tag
When other than the above is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE (Blank)
Input 1 When [TAG] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE 1 to 256
8 IN1ELEMENT
Component When other than the above is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE (Blank)
When [TAG] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE (Blank)
Character string valid
When [DATESTR] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE
as a date
9 INPUT1 Input 1 Variable When [NUMBER] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Numerical value
When [STRING] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Any character string
When [VARIABLE] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE Variable name
When [NONE] is selected with IN1CONSTTYPE (Blank)
No operation [NONE]
+ [ADD]
- [SUBTRUCT]
10 OPERATION Operator
× [MULTIPLY]
÷ [DEVIDE]
% [REMAINDER]

(To the next page)

App - 37 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.16 ACOPERATION.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
(From the previous page)

XML MESSAGE
Table App.50 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

FORMAT
When [NONE] is selected with OPERATION (Blank)
Tag [TAG]

Input 2
Date string [DATESTR]
10
11 IN2CONSTTYPE
Constant type
When other than the above is Numerical value [NUMBER]

TROUBLESHOOTING
selected with OPERATION Character string [STRING]
Variable [VARIABLE]
None [NONE]
When [NONE] is selected with OPERATION (Blank)
When [TAG] is selected with
1 to 64
IN2CONSTTYPE
12 IN2TAG Input 2 Tag When other than the above is
When other than the above is
selected with OPERATION
selected with (Blank)
IN2CONSTTYPE

APPENDICES
When [NONE] is selected with OPERATION (Blank)
When [TAG] is selected with
1 to 256
Input 2 IN2CONSTTYPE
13 IN2ELEMENT
Component
When other than the above is
When other than the above is
selected with OPERATION
selected with (Blank)
IN2CONSTTYPE
When [NONE] is selected with OPERATION (Blank)
When [TAG] is selected
(Blank)
with IN2CONSTTYPE

INDEX
When [DATESTR] is selected Character string valid
with IN2CONSTTYPE as a date
When [NUMBER] is selected
Numerical value
14 INPUT2 Input 2 Variable When other than the above is with IN2CONSTTYPE
selected with OPERATION When [STRING] is selected
Any character string
with IN2CONSTTYPE
When [VARIABLE] is selected
Variable name
with IN2CONSTTYPE
When [NONE] is selected
(Blank)
with IN2CONSTTYPE

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.16 ACOPERATION.CSV
App - 38
 APPENDICES

Appendix 2.17 REMOTE.CSV

(1) File format

Table App.51 File format
Item Description
File name REMOTE.CSV
File contents [Job settings] - [Program execution] Section 7.10.3 Setting items in Program execution

2 3 4

ITEM REMOTEEXEC SERVER COMMAND

REMOTEEXEC1-1 ENABLE 1 C:\DBAPP\RECIPE_02.exe
REMOTEEXEC1-2 ENABLE 1 C:\DBAPP\COUNT_01.exe
1)
REMOTEEXEC5-1 ENABLE 2 C:\DBAPP\LOG_01.exe
REMOTEEXEC5-2 DISABLE

5 6 7 8 9

RETURNCHECK RETURNVALUE ERRORWRITE ERRORTAG ERRORELEMENT

ENABLE 0 DISABLE
DISABLE
1) 2)
ENABLE 0 ENABLE 1 10

10 11 12

ERRORVALUE ERREXEC WAIT

ENABLE WAIT
NOWAIT
2)
File format 4010 DISABLE WAIT

Item row
Label column, setting area

[Program execution setting (before action)]

[Program execution setting (after action)]
1
2
3
4

5
8 9 10
6

11

12

App - 39 Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.17 REMOTE.CSV
 APPENDICES

9
(2) Label

XML MESSAGE
Table App.52 Label

FORMAT
Label Description
[Job settings] No. 1 to 64 - 1: [Before actions], 2: [After actions]
10
REMOTEEXEC1-1 to REMOTEEXEC64-2

TROUBLESHOOTING
1 REMOTEEXEC64-2
Indicates 1: [Before actions], 2: [After actions].
Indicates [Job setting] No.1 to 64.

(3) Setting item

Table App.53 Setting item
Item Description Setting value

APPENDICES
Execute program before When enabled [ENABLE]
2 REMOTEEXEC
(after) action When disabled [DISABLE]

3 SERVER Program execution destination 1 to 32

4 COMMAND Command line Up to 127 characters

When enabled [ENABLE]
5 RETURNCHECK Check return value
When disabled [DISABLE]

6 RETURNVALUE Normal return value -2147483648 to 2147483647

INDEX
Write the value into the tag When enabled [ENABLE]
7 ERRORWRITE
when the value is faulty When disabled [DISABLE]

8 ERRORTAG Tag 1 to 64

9 ERRORELEMENT Component 1 to 256

10 ERRORVALUE Substitute value Any character string

Do not execute job when When enabled [ENABLE]
11 ERREXEC
the value is faulty When disabled [DISABLE]
Wait for execution When enabled [WAIT]
12 WAIT
completion When disabled [NOWAIT]

Appendix 2 Setting Information File Format (CSV File Format)

Appendix 2.17 REMOTE.CSV
App - 40
 APPENDICES

Appendix 3 Processing Time

This section explains the processing time required for "communication action" as a result
of measurements made under the conditions shown in (1).
The processing time can be lengthened, however, depending on any of the following
factors:
• The load status of the server computer and the network
• Sequence scan time
• The status of access from a personal computer, terminal display, or intelligent
function module to the PLC CPU
• Access from a personal computer by MES Interface Function Configuration Tool
and XML processing
• Settings of the MES interface module
Use the measurement result shown in (2) as reference of the processing time.

(1) Measurement conditions

Table App.54 Measurement conditions
Item Description
CPU Intel Xeon 2.8GHz
Memory 256MB
Server computer
OS Microsoft Windows Server TM 2003
Database Oracle 10g
PLC CPU Q25HCPU (Host control CPU)
Access target
Network No other station specified (Host)
CPU
Sequence scan time 1ms
For trigger conditions: 1 tag
For communication data:
No. of tags 1 tag (for 16, 64, 256 fields)
4 tags (for 1024 fields)
16 tags (for 4096 fields)
For trigger conditions:
Device tag setting
Sampling setting High-speed sampling (1 x 100ms)
For communication data: Do not sample
For trigger conditions: Bit transmit and receive
Data type
For data: Single precision
For trigger conditions: No. of jobs x 2
No. of components
For communication data: Same as the number of fields
Trigger conditions Handshake operation
1 job (for 16, 64, 256, 1024 fields)
No. of jobs
2 jobs (for 4096 fields)
1 action (for 16, 64, 256 fields)
Job setting
No. of actions 4 actions (for 1024 fields)
16 actions (for 4096 fields)
Select/Update condition Comparison with constant value (1 condition only)
Program execution None
From ON of Handshake startup to OFF of Completion
Measuring Measurement interval
notification
method
No. of measurements Average of 20 measurement results

App - 41 Appendix 3 Processing Time

APPENDICES

9
(2) Measurement results

XML MESSAGE
(a) When [Enhance sampling efficiency] is checked

FORMAT
The following shows the results in the case where the [Enhance sampling
efficiency] box is checked in [Sampling settings] of [Device tag settings].
10
Table App.55 Measurement results when [Enhance sampling efficiency] is checked

TROUBLESHOOTING
No. of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096
Select 0.2s 0.3s 0.9s 3.21s 13.5s
Update
0.2s 0.2s 0.5s 1.4s 5.2s
Insert

(b) When [Enhance sampling efficiency] is not checked

The following shows the results in the case where the [Enhance sampling
efficiency] box is not checked in [Sampling settings] of [Device tag settings].

APPENDICES
Table App.56 Measurement results when [Enhance sampling efficiency] is not checked
No. of fields 16 64 256 1024 4096
Select 0.2s 0.3s 0.9s 3.2s 13.5s
Update
0.2s 0.3s 1.0s 3.5s 15.0s
Insert

INDEX

Appendix 3 Processing Time App - 42

 APPENDICES

Appendix 4 External Dimensions

This section shows the external dimension diagrams of the MES interface module.

QJ71MES96
RUN
ERR.

PULL

CF CARD

10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

100
M

(3.86)
SD/

98
RD

R1
(*1)

QJ71MES96

90 27.4
(3.54) (1.08)
(0.55)
14

PULL

CF CARD

10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX

100
M

SD/
RD

QJ71MES96

(Unit: mm (inch))
Figure App.4 External dimensions
*1 The bending radius near the connector (R1: yardstick) should be at least four times longer than the
cable's outside diameter when the twisted pair cable is connected.

App - 43 Appendix 4 External Dimensions

 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 5 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be
Accessed Directly

XML MESSAGE
FORMAT
This section explains the method for collecting data from CPUs that cannot be accessed
directly (hereafter, explained with the Motion CPU).
10

TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Auto refresh using CPU shared memory in a multiple CPU system
By performing auto refresh between the QCPU and Motion CPU in the multiple CPU
system, device data in the Motion CPU can be read to the QCPU.
Registering device data read to the QCPU with tags enables to handle the device data
in the Motion CPU.

(2) Settings required for auto refresh

Set the devices to which data are stored and the number of points sent by each CPU

APPENDICES
with [PLC parameter] - [Multiple CPU settings] - [Refresh settings] of GX Developer.
For auto refresh settings, refer to the following manual.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)

(3) Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data

(a) System configuration

INDEX
MES interface
module
CPU (No.1)
Motion CPU (CPU No.2)
Figure App.5 System configuration

Appendix 5 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly App - 44
 APPENDICES

(b) [Refresh settings] for the Motion CPU (CPU No. 2)

Set the number of points to be sent and devices stored to the auto refresh area in
the CPU shared memory of the Motion CPU.
(Example): D256 to D511 Auto refresh area 0000 to 00FF

Figure App.6 [Refresh settings] for the Motion CPU (CPU No. 2)

(c) [Refresh settings] for the QCPU (CPU No. 1)

Set the number of points and devices of the QCPU to which auto refresh area
data in the Motion CPU shared memory is stored.
(Example): CPU No. 2 auto refresh area 0000 to 00FF D256 to D511

Figure App.7 [Refresh settings] for the QCPU (CPU No. 1)

(d) [Device tag settings] for the MES interface module

Register the QCPU (CPU No. 1) devices (devices set for refreshing) in the device
tag.
(Example): Register D256 to D511 in tag 1.

MES interface QCPU (No.1) Motion CPU (CPU No.2)

module
CPU shared memory
Device Device Auto refresh area
Tag 1
0000

00FF
Component D256 D256
Component
Component D511 D511

Figure App.8 Acquisition example of the Motion CPU device data

App - 45 Appendix 5 Data Collection Method for CPUs that cannot be Accessed Directly
 APPENDICES

9
Appendix 6 Transportation Precautions

XML MESSAGE
When transporting a battery containing lithium, handling according to transportation

FORMAT
regulations is required.

Appendix 6.1 Controlled model 10

TROUBLESHOOTING
The lithium battery used in the MES interface module is classified as follows.

Table App.57 Lithium battery

Classification for
Product name Model Product supply status
transportation
Non-hazardous
Q series battery Q6BAT Lithium battery
material

APPENDICES
Appendix 6.2 Handling for shipping

The products are packed in accordance with transportation regulations before shipment.
When transporting products after repacking or unpacking them, make them comply with
the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Code, and national transportation
regulations.
For details, consult with the shipping carrier.

INDEX

Appendix 6 Transportation Precautions

Appendix 6.1 Controlled model
App - 46
INDEX
[A] job cancellation .................................................... 7-66
Access log ............................................. 8-4,8-17,8-23
Access target CPU .............................................. 7-28 [N]
Account........................................................A-16,7-21 Network setting .................................................... 7-18
Action................................................................... A-16
Actions ................................................................. 7-67 [O]
Adding an item....................................................... 7-6
Arithmetic processing (Operation action) .... 6-11,7-85 ODBC ..................................................... A-16,8-2,8-5
One-shot execution of a job ........................... 7-98,9-1
[C]
[P]
character string .................................................... 7-39
component setting ............................................... 7-37 program execution ................................. 6-11,7-61,8-3
constant ....................................................... 7-78,7-87 Project Setting ..................................................... 7-16

[D] [R]

Database setting.................................................... 8-5 Read .................................................................... 7-92

DB buffering......................................................... A-16 Remote operation ................................................ 7-99
clear processing ..................................... 7-26,7-106 Change job status .......................................... 7-104
function ............................................................ 6-12 CompactFlash card operation ........................ 7-107
manual resend processing ..................... 7-25,7-106 Connection result at the time of previous
Operation (online) ................................ 7-105,7-106 job execution .................................................. 7-103
setting ...................................................... 7-24,7-65 DB buffering operation ................................... 7-106
Deleting an item..................................................... 7-7 DB buffering status......................................... 7-105
Detailed log.......................................................... 7-95 Module operation ........................................... 7-101
Device tag (Tag) ....................................A-17,6-5,7-32 Module status ................................................. 7-100
Disabling the job .................................. 7-48,7-104,9-1 Trigger buffering status .................................. 7-107
Replicating an item ................................................ 7-7
REQUEST tag ....................................................... 9-2
[E]
RESPONSE tag ..................................................... 9-3
Enabling the job ................................... 7-48,7-104,9-1
Error log ............................................................... 7-93 [S]
Event log.............................................................. 7-94
Exception processing Select action ........................................................ 7-73
Multiple applicable records............................... 7-82 Select/Update conditions ..................................... 7-80
No applicable record ........................................ 7-81 Server service ......................................................A-16
server service ...................................................... 7-42
SNTP ...........................................................A-16,7-19
[F]
SQL failure log ....................................... 8-4,8-18,8-25
Formatting the CompactFlash card ................... 7-107 SQL text transmission (Communication action) ......A-16,
Function List .......................................................... 3-8 6-10,7-71
Function list startup log ............................................................ 7-94
DB Connection Service .................................... 3-11 startup logging ..................................................... 7-49
MES Interface Configuration Tool .................... 3-10 statistical processing............................................ 7-40
MES interface module........................................ 3-9 System Setting..................................................... 7-17

[H] [T]
HTTP .............................................................A-16,9-4 Test mode............................................................ 7-49
Time synchronization................................... 6-23,7-19
[I] Time zone ....................................................A-17,7-19
Insert action ......................................................... 7-76 Transfer setup...................................................... 7-89
IP filter ........................................................... 8-3,8-16 Trigger buffering ..................................................A-17
function............................................................... 6-7
setting............................................................... 7-47
[J]
Status ............................................................. 7-107
Job ....................................................................... A-17 Trigger condition ..................................................A-17
job .......................................................... 6-1,7-46,7-67 trigger condition ..................................................... 6-6

Index - 1
trigger conditions ................................................. 7-50
9
[U]
Update action ...................................................... 7-75

XML MESSAGE
Update settings.................................................. 7-102

FORMAT
URL ............................................................... A-16,9-4

[V]
10
Variable ...............................................A-17,7-79,7-87

TROUBLESHOOTING
Verify ................................................................... 7-92

[W]
Working log.......................................................... 7-93
Write .................................................................... 7-90

[X]
XML processing.....................................A-16,6-22,9-1

APPENDICES
INDEX

Index - 2
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within
the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall
not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction
manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found
not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products,
special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test
run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not
lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and that
backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries,
etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants
operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such
as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller
applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical
applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety
devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi
representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the
special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
Microsoft, Windows, SQL server, Visual Studio are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, Java, J2ME and J2SE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in
the United States and other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation.
Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the united States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
Other company names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners.
VS-FlexGrid Pro 8.0J
Copyright (C) 2001-2003 ComponentOne LLC.
 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA KAZPROMAUTOMATICS LTD. KAZAKHSTAN
Gothaer Straße 8 Wiener Straße 89 bld.Traian 23/1 2,Scladskaya str.
D-40880 Ratingen AT-2500 Baden MD-2060 Kishinev KAZ-470046 Karaganda
Phone:+49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Phone:+43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone:+373 (0)22 / 66 4242 Phone:+7 3212 / 50 11 50
Fax:+49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 Fax:+43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax:+373 (0)22 / 66 4280 Fax:+7 3212 / 50 11 50
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE TEHNIKON BELARUS KONING & HARTMAN B.V. NETHERLANDS ELEKTROSTILY RUSSIA
25,Boulevard des Bouvets Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off.704 Haarlerbergweg 21-23 Rubzowskaja nab.4-3,No.8
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex BY-220030 Minsk NL-1101 CH Amsterdam RU-105082 Moscow
Phone:+33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Phone:+375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone:+31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Phone:+7 495 / 545 3419
Fax:+33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 Fax:+375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax:+31 (0)20 / 587 76 05 Fax:+7 495 / 545 3419
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND KONING & HARTMAN B.V. BELGIUM BEIJER ELECTRONICS A/S NORWAY ICOS RUSSIA
Westgate Business Park,Ballymount Woluwelaan 31 Teglverksveien 1 Industrial Computer Systems ZAO
IRL-Dublin 24 BE-1800 Vilvoorde NO-3002 Drammen Ryazanskij Prospekt,8A,Office 100
Phone:+353 (0)1 4198800 Phone:+32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone:+47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 RU-109428 Moscow
Fax:+353 (0)1 4198890 Fax:+32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax:+47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 Phone:+7 495 / 232 0207
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY AKHNATON BULGARIA MPL TECHNOLOGY SP.Z O.O. POLAND Fax:+7 495 / 232 0327
Viale Colleoni 7 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd.Pb 21 Ul.Krakowska 50 NPP “URALELEKTRA” RUSSIA
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI) BG-1756 Sofia PL-32-083 Balice Sverdlova 11A
Phone:+39 039 / 60 53 1 Phone:+359 (0)2 / 97 44 05 8 Phone:+48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 RU-620027 Ekaterinburg
Fax:+39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax:+359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax:+48 (0)12 / 630 47 01 Phone:+7 343 / 353 2745
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN INEA CR D.O.O. CROATIA SIRIUS TRADING & SERVICES SRL ROMANIA Fax:+7 343 / 353 2461
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Losinjska 4 a Str.Biharia nr.67-77
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) HR-10000 Zagreb RO-013981 Bucuresti 1
Phone:+34 93 / 565 3131 Phone:+385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone:+40 (0)21 / 201 1147 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE
Fax:+34 93 / 589 1579 Fax:+385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax:+40 (0)21 / 201 1148
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK AUTOCONTCONTROLSYSTEMSS.R.O. CZECH REPUBLIC CRAFT CONSULTING & ENGINEERING D.O.O. SERBIA ILAN & GAVISH LTD ISRAEL
Travellers Lane Jelinkova 59/3 Toplicina str.4 lok 6 24 Shenkar St.,Kiryat Arie
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB CZ-721 00 Ostrava Svinov SER-1800 Nis IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
Phone:+44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Phone:+420 (0)59 / 5691 150 Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 , 523 962 Phone:+972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
Fax:+44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Fax:+420 (0)59 / 5691 199 Fax:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 , 523 962 Fax:+972 (0)3 / 924 0761
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN B:TECH A.S. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA SR D.O.O. SERBIA TEXEL ELECTRONICS LTD. ISRAEL
Office Tower “Z”14 F Na Ostrove 84 Karadjordjeva 12/260 2 Ha´umanut,P.O.B.6272
8-12,1 chome,Harumi Chuo-Ku CZ - 58001 Havlickuv Brod SER-113000 Smederevo IL-42160 Netanya
Tokyo 104-6212 Phone:+420 (0)569 / 408 841 Phone:+381 (0)26 / 617 163 Phone:+972 (0)9 / 863 08 91
Phone:+81 3 622 160 60 Fax:+420 (0)569 / 408 889 Fax:+381 (0)26 / 617 163 Fax:+972 (0)9 / 885 24 30
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 BEIJER ELECTRONICS A/S DENMARK AUTOCONT CONTROL S.R.O. SLOVAKIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION USA LAUTRUPHOJ 1-3 Radlinského 47
500 Corporate Woods Parkway DK-2750 Ballerup SK - 02601 Dolný Kubín AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Phone:+45 (0)70 / 26 46 46 Phone:+421 (0)43 / 5868 210
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fax:+45 (0)70 / 26 48 48 Fax:+421 (0)43 / 5868 210 CBI LTD. SOUTH AFRICA
Fax: +1 847 478 22 83 BEIJER ELECTRONICS EESTI OÜ ESTONIA CS MTRADE SLOVENSKO,S.R.O. SLOVAKIA Private Bag 2016
Pärnu mnt.160i Vajanskeho 58 ZA-1600 Isando
EE-11317 Tallinn SK - 92101 Piestany Phone:+ 27 (0)11 / 928 2000
Phone:+372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone:+421 (0)33 / 7742 760 Fax:+ 27 (0)11 / 392 2354
Fax:+372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax:+421 (0)33 / 7735 144
BEIJER ELECTRONICS OY FINLAND INEA D.O.O. SLOVENIA
Ansatie 6 a Stegne 11
FIN-01740 Vantaa SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone:+358 (0)9 / 886 77 500 Phone:+386 (0)1 / 513 8100
Fax:+358 (0)9 / 886 77 555 Fax:+386 (0)1 / 513 8170
UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE BEIJER ELECTRONICS AUTOMATION AB SWEDEN
5,Mavrogenous Str. Krangatan 4A
GR-18542 Piraeus S-20124 Malmö
Phone:+30 211 / 1206 900 Phone:+46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax:+30 211 / 1206 999 Fax:+46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
MELTRADE LTD HUNGARY ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND
Fertõ utca 14. Hinterdorfstr.12
HU-1107 Budapest CH-8309 Nürensdorf
Phone:+36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone:+41 (0)44 / 838 48 11
Fax:+36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax:+41 (0)44 / 838 48 12
BEIJER ELECTRONICS SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY
Lienes iela 28 Darulaceze Cad.No.43 KAT.2
LV-1009 Riga TR-34384 Okmeydani-Istanbul
Phone:+371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone:+90 (0)212 / 320 1640
Fax:+371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax:+90 (0)212 / 320 1649
BEIJER ELECTRONICS UAB LITHUANIA CSC AUTOMATION LTD UKRAINE
Savanoriu Pr.187 15,M.Raskova St.,Fl.10,Office 1010
LT-02300 Vilnius UA-02002 Kiev
Phone:+370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Phone:+380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax:+370 (0)5 / 232 2980 Fax:+380 (0)44 / 494-33-66

MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-486112 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.de /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
Specifications subject to change without notice /// Art. no. 204927-A /// 08.2006